T3903-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN PDF

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.
PT
In
te rn
al
T3903-390-02
Fo r
Authored and published using
U se
nl y
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its subsidiary companies (collectively PTC), and their respective licensors. This software is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see backside of this guide.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge, PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only PTC University offers: An innovative learning methodology PTCs Precision Learning Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and deliver learning solutions. Flexible Delivery Options PTC University ensures you receive the same quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity. Premier Content and Expertise A thorough instructor certification process and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices derived from thousands of deployments. Global Focus PTC University delivers training where and when you need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries offering content in nine languages. Delivering Value A role-based learning design ensures the right people have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the organizations overall performance goals. The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning offerings that PTC University has available. These include: Instructor-led Training (ILT) The ideal blend of classroom lectures, personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and post-classroom tools. Pro/FICIENCY This Web-based, skills assessment and development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity. eLearning Libraries 24/7 access to Web-based training that will compliment your instructor-led course. Precision LMS A powerful learning management system that will manage your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
Fo r
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals, current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences. Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most out of your PTC products.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America
Education Services Registration Tel: (888) 782-3773 Fax: (781) 370-5307 Technical Support (Monday - Friday) Tel: (800) 477-6435 Fax: (781) 707-0328 License Management and Contracts Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782) Fax: (781) 707-0331
Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
Asia
Fo r
PT
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and PTC Partners.
In
te rn
Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information.
al
U se
Europe
nl y
Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do: Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key concepts. These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the software application. You then apply the concepts through structured exercises. After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also identify the class topics that require further review. At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training on how to do this after the class.
Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already have one. As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account: A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a Recommended Learning Report based on your results. A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training that you may want to review. Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages. The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the live class.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Precision Learning After the Class
al
U se
nl y
Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.
Fo r
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only. Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that corresponds to your role and job functions.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module Module Module Module Module Module Module 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Advanced Selection Advanced Datum Features Advanced Sketching Advanced Hole Creation Advanced Drafts and Ribs Advanced Shells Advanced Rounds and Chamfers
Day 2
Module Module Module Module Module 08 09 10 11 12 Relations and Parameters Advanced Blends Sweeps with Variable Sections Helical Sweeps Swept Blends
Fo r
PT
Module Module Module Module Module Module
13 14 15 16 17 18
Advanced Layers Advanced Reference Management Family Tables Reusing Features Advanced Copy Advanced Patterns
In
te rn
Day 3
al
U se
nl y
Fo r C In te rn al U se O nl y
PT
Table of Contents Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.0

Advanced Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Advanced Chain Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Advanced Surface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Advanced Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Creating Datum Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Creating Datum Coordinate Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Creating Points On or Offset from Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Creating Points at Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Sketching Geometry Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Creating a Curve Through a Point Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Creating a Curve From Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Creating Composite Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Projecting and Wrapping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Creating Offset Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Creating Cosmetic Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Advanced Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Using Sketched Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Sketching Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Sketching Elliptical Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Sketching Splines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Modifying Splines Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Modifying Splines Advanced Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Importing and Exporting Spline Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Sketching Conics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Sketching Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Locking Sketcher Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Sketcher Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Advanced Hole Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Creating Standard Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Lightweight Hole Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Creating Sketched Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Creating On Point Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Creating Cosmetic Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Advanced Drafts and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Drafting Intent Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Creating Drafts Split at Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Creating Drafts Split at Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Creating Drafts Split at Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Creating Trajectory Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Advanced Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Excluding Surfaces from Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Extending Shell Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Analyzing Shell Corner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Advanced Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Analyzing Round Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Analyzing Round Creation Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Creating Rounds Through Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Creating Variable Radius Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Auto Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Creating Rounds by Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Analyzing Round References and Pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Using Intent Edges for Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Using Round Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Creating Corner Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 Creating Chamfers by Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 Analyzing Chamfer References and Pieces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 Using Intent Edges for Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58 Using Chamfer Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60 Relations and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Understanding Relation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Understanding Relation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions . . . . . 8-10
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Exact Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Advanced Parameter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Relations for Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Section Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Evalgraph Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Simultaneous Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-13 8-14 8-19 8-21 8-27 8-31 8-35 8-39
Fo r
Sweeps with Variable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection . . . 10-16 Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent Trajectories10-29 Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Using Trajpar with Solid Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features. . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Helical Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16 Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Understanding Swept Blend Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Advanced Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Analyzing Blend Section Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Analyzing Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Analyzing Rotational Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
nl y
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend . . . . . Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Swept Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Swept Blend Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-18 12-22 12-26 12-30 12-34
Fo r
Reusing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Creating UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Placing UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7 Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . 16-11 Creating Inheritance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16 Using External Merge to Add Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21 Using External Merge to Remove Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28 Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Configuring Independency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7 Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary. . . . . . . . 17-12 Advanced Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3 Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7 Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11 Creating Geometry Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16 Creating Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20 Specifying Fill Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24 Creating Pattern Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-29
PT
In
te rn
Family Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Understanding Family Table Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Creating a Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 Patternizing Family Table Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Creating a Multi-Level Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 Editing Family Table Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
al
U se
Advanced Reference Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Editing Feature References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Replacing Feature References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Replacing Sketcher References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Replacing Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
nl y
Advanced Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Creating Layer Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Creating Layers in Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Applying Pattern Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curve Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Point Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpatterning Group Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Patterns of Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving/Mirroring Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18-33 18-38 18-42 18-45 18-49 18-54
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PT
Student Preface Using the Header
Course Handbook Layout: Modules Topics Concept Theory Procedure Exercise (if applicable) Procedure / Exercise Header:
Fo r
Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections: Concept This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.
Procedure / Exercise Header
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable: 1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab. 2. Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in Exercises. 3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should close any open files and erase them from memory:
Fo r
4.
5.
and then click OK. Click Erase Not Displayed Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is: PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folder In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable. To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select Set Working Directory. Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new model, you will see Create New. To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.
PT
Click Close
In
until the icon is no longer displayed.
te rn
al
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
U se
The first module for certain courses is known as a process module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
nl y
Theory This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures. Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused, and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that contain only Concept and Theory. Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models. Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide and/or the online exercise HTML files.
6. 7.
Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab. Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete a task.
Two other items to note for labs: Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated. Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps: Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment for each lab in the course. Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXTRUDE_1.PRT
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder Step 1:
Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.
Step 2:
Fo r
1. If you currently have files open, click Close toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.
PT
Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts. from the Quick Access
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon. Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
In
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
te rn
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric2.
al
U se
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
nl y
Step 3:
Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.
1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder as indicated in the header above. 2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser navigator. tab from the
Fo r
PT
3. Click Working Directory to view the current working directory folder in the browser. Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working Directory. 5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the new working directory in the browser.
Fo r
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab: Read the first task. Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the procedure or exercise. Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5:
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable and disable. For example, Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics tool bar.
PT
Set the initial datum display options.
In
1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above. Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
te rn
Step 4:
Open the file for this procedure.
al
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.
U se
nl y
3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as necessary. For example you could disable the Select All check box, and then enable only the desired datum types.
4. The model should now appear as shown.
This completes the procedure.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PT
Module
1
U se O te rn al
Module 1 | Page 1
Advanced Selection
Module Overview
In this module, you learn advanced methods for selecting edges and geometry within a part model. Learning advanced methods for selection enables you to create more robust models in a shorter period of time.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand advanced chain selection. Understand advanced surface selection.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Advanced Chain Selection

You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness.
Chain types: Intent chain One-by-one Tangent chain Surface loop Surface loop from to Boundary From-to Boundary loop Multiple chains Selection methods: Direct with mouse Chain dialog box
Figure 1 Intent Chain
Intent chain Enables you to select edges based on their intent. For example, say you use an intent chain to select the four edges of a square cut for purposes of rounding them. If the square cut is redefined into a hexagon cut, the intent chain automatically adds the two additional edges and rounds them, because your intent was to round the edges of the cut. If you instead select the edges one at a time and round them, the round feature either fails or does not round the newly added edges. One-by-one Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a continuous path. Tangent chain Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to an anchor edge. Surface loop Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface. Surface loop from to Enables you to select a range of edges from the surface loop. Boundary Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt. From-to Boundary loop Enables you to select a range of edges from the boundary.
Module 1 | Page 2 2012 PTC
Fo r
PT
The following are the different types of chains that can be used to select edges:
Chain Types
In
You can select multiple edges in Creo Parametric using different types of chains to increase efficiency and feature robustness. A chain is a collection of adjacent edges and curves that share common endpoints. Chains can be open-ended or closed-loop, but they are always defined by two ends.
te rn
Advanced Chain Selection
al
U se
Figure 2 Surface Loop
nl y
Multiple chains You can select multiple chains by selecting the first chain, pressing CTRL and selecting an edge for a new chain, then holding down SHIFT and completing the new chain from the selected edge.
Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities: Directly with the mouse. Using the Chain dialog box The Chain dialog box enables a GUI approach to selection. This dialog box is only available in the context of a tool. You can click the Details button near the tool's reference collector to display the Chain dialog box.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Chain Dialog Box
Fo r
2012 PTC
al
Module 1 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Advanced Chain Selection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ADV_CHAINS.PRT
Selection\Adv_Chain Task 1:
Experiment with the different chain selection types.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Extrude 3.
5. De-select all geometry. 6. Select the top, front horizontal edge.
7. Press SHIFT and select the two adjacent edges One-by-one. 8. De-select all geometry. 9. Select Extrude 1.
Fo r
11. Press SHIFT and select the top, right front edge to select the Tangent chain.
12. De-select all geometry.
13. Select Extrude 1. 14. Select one of the top, front edges. 15. Press SHIFT and select the top, right flat surface to select the Surface loop. 16. De-select all geometry.
Module 1 | Page 4
PT
10. Select the top, front horizontal edge.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Cursor over one of the vertical edges and right-click to query-select the side edges Intent chain.
nl y
3. Cursor over one of the top edges and right-click to query-select the end edges Intent chain.
17. Select Extrude 1. 18. Select the top, front edge. 19. Press SHIFT and select the top, back edge to select the Surface loop from to chain. 20. Select the quilt on the right. 21. Select an edge of the quilt. 22. Press SHIFT and select the quilt to select the Boundary. 23. De-select all geometry.
25. Select the front, vertical edge. 26. Press SHIFT and select the back, vertical edge to select the From-to Boundary loop. 27. De-select all geometry.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 5
U se
24. Select the quilt again.
nl y
Advanced Surface Selection

You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of sets.
Surface set types: Individual Surfaces Solid Surfaces Intent Surfaces Seed and Boundary Loop Surfaces Exclude Surfaces Selection methods: Direct with mouse Chain dialog box
Advanced Surface Selection
Surface Set Types
Fo r
The following are the different types of surface sets that can be used to select surfaces: Individual Surfaces Enables you to select surfaces from solids or quilts one at a time. To select multiple individual surfaces, press CTRL. Solid Surfaces Enables you to select all surfaces of the solid geometry in a part model. Intent Surfaces Enables you to select surfaces based on their intent. An intent surface set tends to be more robust because it can account for changes made to geometry. Seed and Boundary Surfaces Enables you to select all surfaces from the selected seed surface up to the boundary or boundaries. Loop Surfaces Enables you to select all the surfaces that are adjacent to the edges of a surface. Exclude Surfaces Enables you to exclude surface patches during or after a surface set has been created.
PT
You can select multiple surfaces in Creo Parametric using different types of sets. A surface set is a collection of surface patches from solids or quilts. Surface patches do not need to be adjacent.
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Selecting a Surface Loop
U se
Figure 1 Selecting Multiple Individual Surfaces
nl y
Selection Methods
There are two different ways to select entities: Directly with the mouse. Using the Surface Sets dialog box The Surface Sets dialog box enables a GUI approach to selection. This dialog box is only available in the context of a tool. You can click the Details button next to the tool's reference collector to display the Surface Sets dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Surface Sets Dialog Box
Module 1 | Page 7
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Selection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ADV_SURFACE-SETS.PRT
Selection\Adv_Surface Task 1:
Experiment with the different surface set selections.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Extrude 1.
5. De-select all geometry. 6. Select any feature. 7. Select any surface on that feature. 8. Right-click and select Solid Surfaces. 9. De-select all geometry.
Fo r
12. De-select all geometry. 13. Select the front surface on the silver protrusion as the seed surface. 14. Press SHIFT and select the top, right flat surface as the Boundary.
Module 1 | Page 8
PT
11. Select the Intent surface.
In
10. Right-click to query and select cut Extrude 2.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Press CTRL and select the second individual surface.
nl y
3. Select the front surface of Extrude 1.
15. Release SHIFT to select all the surfaces from the seed surface up to the Boundary. You can continue to use SHIFT to select additional boundaries.
16. Select the top, flat surface.
19. Press CTRL and click to de-select the two surfaces, excluding them from the loop. 20. De-select all geometry.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 9
U se
18. Release SHIFT to select the Surface loop.
nl y
17. Press SHIFT and select the front edge.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
2
U se O te rn al
Module 2 | Page 1
Advanced Datum Features

Module Overview
Datum features often serve as the foundation when modeling advanced geometry. A datum feature framework can efficiently capture the design intent of the model, and then solid features can be created on the framework. Datum curves and sketches may reference other datum features, such as datum points and coordinate systems. In addition, you can create datum graphs that can be utilized by relations to control part geometry. In this module, you learn how to create datum points and several types of datum curves. You will also learn how to create datum graphs and coordinate systems.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create datum graphs. Create datum coordinate systems. Sketch geometry datums. Create numerous types of datum points. Create numerous types of datum curves. Create cosmetic sketches.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Creating Datum Graphs

A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model.
Created like a Sketch feature: Used as an X-Y function. Can be used to control part geometry. Must contain a Sketcher coordinate system. Must contain sketched geometry.
Creating Datum Graphs
Fo r
A 2-D datum graph can be created as a feature in the model, as shown in Figure 1. The datum graph is created much like a sketch feature, except that a visible datum curve is not created. Instead, the system is able to use the sketch as an X-Y function. This function can then be utilized by relations to control part geometry based on the X-Y relation of the graph. The datum graph must contain a Sketcher coordinate system, and sketched geometry. Centerlines and construction geometry can be used to simplify the sketch creation, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. However, the system only recognizes solid sketched geometry such as lines, arcs, and splines for the graph function.
Module 2 | Page 2
PT
In
Figure 2 Creating a Datum Graph using Lines
te rn
Figure 3 Creating a Datum Graph from a Spline
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Datum Graph Features
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Graphs

Close Window Datum\Graph Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DATUM_GRAPH.PRT
Create a datum graph comprised of lines.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph 3. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_1. 4. A new Sketcher window opens. 5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 6. Click Centerline from the Sketching group and sketch a vertical and horizontal centerline. 7. Click Coordinate System from the Sketching group. Click the intersection of the centerlines to place the coordinate system. .
Fo r
9. Click Normal from the Dimension group and dimension the sketch, editing the values as shown. 10. Click OK .
2012 PTC
PT
8. Click Line Chain and sketch an angled line and a horizontal line. The left endpoint of the angled line should be aligned to the vertical centerline.
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 3
U se
nl y
.
11. Notice the datum graph feature in the model tree.
Task 2:
Create a datum graph comprised of two arcs. .
2. Press ENTER to accept the default graph name GRAPH_2. 3. A new Sketcher window opens. 4. Click Centerline from the Sketching group and sketch two vertical centerlines and one horizontal centerline. 5. Click Coordinate System and click the left intersection of the centerlines to place the coordinate system. 6. Click 3-Point / Tangent End
Fo r
7. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and constrain the arc endpoints perpendicular to the vertical centerlines. 8. Click Normal from the Dimension group and dimension the arcs and centerlines, pressing ENTER to accept the default values. 9. Click One-by-One and edit the dimensions as shown.
10. Click OK
Module 2 | Page 4
PT
and sketch two arcs. The arcs should be tangent to one-another, and their endpoints aligned to the vertical centerlines.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph
11. Notice the datum graph feature in the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

Datum coordinate systems can be used as a modeling or assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and for assembling components.
Define References: Datum features Existing model geometry Define Orientation: References selection Selected CSYS axes
Coordinate Systems
Datum coordinate systems are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A coordinate system defines a specific location in space based on coordinates. Datum coordinate systems can be used as a modeling or assembly reference, as the basis for calculations, and for assembling components.
Fo r
Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

To create a new datum coordinate system, you must define the following two items: References Used to define the coordinate system location. You can select existing datum references including datum planes, datum axes, datum points, or other datum coordinate systems. You can also select existing geometry including edges, vertices, and surfaces. Orientation Used to define the position of the coordinate system's axes. There are two different ways to orient the datum coordinate system: References selection Enables you to select reference geometry for any two of the coordinate system's axes. Selected CSYS axes Is available only when another coordinate system is specified as the reference. This option enables you to rotate the coordinate system about the axes of the reference coordinate
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 1 Datum Coordinate System Types
U se
nl y
system. You can also use the Set Z Normal To Screen option to orient the z-axis perpendicular to the screen.
Defining Coordinate System Offset Types

If a coordinate system is selected as a reference, there are three coordinate system offset types that can be created in Creo Parametric. Cartesian Created by defining X, Y, and Z parameters. Cylindrical Created by defining R, Theta (), and Z parameters. Spherical Created by defining r, Theta (), and Phi () parameters.
If datum planes or surfaces are specified as references, there are up to three coordinate system types that can be defined in Creo Parametric. The type defines the dimensioning scheme used to locate the coordinate system. The three types are as follows: Linear Places the coordinate system using two linear dimensions. Radial Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and an angular dimension. Diameter Places the coordinate system using a linear dimension and an angular dimension.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
You must specify the offset references from which to define the dimensions.
al
U se
nl y
Defining Coordinate System Placement Types
Module 2 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Coordinate Systems

Close Window Datum\Coord_Sys Task 1: Erase Not Displayed COORD-SYS.PRT
Create an offset datum coordinate system.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .
3. Select coordinate system DEF. 4. In the Coordinate System dialog box, edit the Offset type to Cartesian, if necessary. Edit the Z offset to 10. Select the Orientation tab. Select the Selected CSYS axes option. Edit the About Z angle to 180. Click OK. 5. De-select the geometry.
1. Click Coordinate System
PT
Task 2:
Create a datum coordinate system using three planes.
In
Fo r
2. Select the front surface of the model. 3. Press CTRL and select datum planes TOP and RIGHT from the model tree. 4. In the Coordinate System dialog box, select the Orientation tab. Use the surface to determine Z. Use datum plane TOP to project Y. Click OK. 5. De-select the geometry.
Module 2 | Page 8
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
2. Click Coordinate System from the Datum group in the ribbon.
nl y
Task 3:
Create a datum coordinate system using axes and planes.
1. Start the Coordinate System . 2. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_4 and datum plane DTM1 as references. 3. In the Coordinate System dialog box, select the Orientation tab. 4. In the Orientation tab, click in the First Direction collector. Select datum coordinate system CS1 and use Z to determine Z. 5. In the Orientation tab, click in the Second Direction collector. Select datum axis A_4. Use datum axis A_4 to project Y. Click Flip to flip the Y projection.
7. De-select the geometry. Task 4:
Create a datum coordinate system on a surface.
1. Start the Coordinate System
Fo r
2. Select the top, rounded surface. 3. Right-click and select Offset References. 4. Press CTRL and select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree and the front surface. 5. Edit the Angle from datum plane RIGHT to 0. 6. Edit the Axial distance from the front surface to 30. 7. Click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Click OK from the Coordinate System dialog box.
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

You can create datum points both on and offset from geometry or other datum features.
Reference types: Placement Offset Reference combinations: On/Offset surface or datum plane On/Offset axis On curve: Length Ratio Real Length Reference Center of surface or curve
Fo r
Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features, for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points both on and offset from geometry or other datum features. Most geometry that defines or locates a point in 3-D space can be specified as a reference. Both Placement references and Offset references can be selected, depending upon the combination. The following reference combinations are available: On/Offset surface or datum plane Locate a point directly on a surface or datum plane, or offset a specified distance. In Figure 1, the datum point is on the selected surface, and offset from the two datum planes. On/Offset axis Locate a point on a datum axis, or offset a specified distance. On curve You can locate a point on a curve. There are three ways to further define the point location on the curve:
2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 11
PT
Figure 2 Datum Point on Curve Ratio Offset
In
te rn
Figure 3 Datum Point at Center of Curve
al
U se
Figure 1 Datum Point on a Surface Offset from Datum Planes
nl y
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Length ratio Enables you to locate the point as a function of the curve's overall length. For example, if you want to locate the curve 3/4 from the end of the curve you type 0.75 as the ratio. You can also switch from which curve endpoint the ratio is determined by clicking Next End. In Figure 2, the point is on the curve, offset from the right endpoint a ratio of 0.75. Real length Enables you to locate the point a specified distance from the curve's endpoint. You can switch from which curve endpoint the distance is measured by clicking Next End. Use reference You can specify another entity as an offset reference and specify the offset value from that reference. Center of surface or curve Selecting a rounded surface or curve enables you to locate a point at the center of the surface or curve, as shown in Figure 3.
PROCEDURE - Creating Points On or Offset from Entities

Close Window Erase Not Displayed POINTS_ON-OFFSET.PRT
Datum\Points_On-Offset Task 1:
Create datum points on and offset from surfaces.
2. Click Point from the Datum group in the ribbon. 3. Select the top surface in the back, left quadrant. 4. In the Datum Point dialog box, click in the Offset references collector. 5. Press CTRL and select datum planes FRONT and RIGHT from the model tree. 6. Edit both offset values to 5.
7. In the Datum Point dialog box, click New Point.
Fo r
9. In the graphics window, right-click and select Offset References. Press CTRL and select datum plane FRONT from the model tree and the bottom, flat surface. Edit the offset from datum plane FRONT to 3.00. Edit the offset from the bottom surface to 7.00.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Select the right, drafted surface near the front center. Edit the Offset from On to Offset. Edit the Offset value to 2.
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 13
U se
nl y
10. In the Datum Point dialog box, click New Point. 11. Select the top, curved surface. Edit the Offset from Offset to Center. 12. Click OK from the Datum Point dialog box.
Task 2:
1. Click Point
2. Select datum axis A_2 in the model tree. 3. In the graphics window, right-click and select Offset References. Right-click to query and select the bottom, flat surface. 4. In the graphics window, edit the offset value to 25.00. 5. In the Datum Point dialog box, click New Point. 6. Select the back, top vertex.
Fo r
8. Select the curve on the right, drafted surface. 9. Edit the offset from On to Center. 10. Click OK.
Module 2 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Create datum points on axes and curves.
Task 3:
Create datum points on curves. .
1. Click Point
6. Select the front datum curve to the right of the datum plane that intersects it. Select Reference as the Offset reference. Select datum plane RIGHT as the reference. Edit the Offset value to 2.00. Click OK.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
4. Select the front datum curve to the right of the datum plane that intersects it. Edit the Offset drop-down to Real. Edit the Offset value to 8.00. Click Next End twice.
al
Module 2 | Page 15
U se
nl y
2. Select the front datum curve to the right of the datum plane that intersects it. Edit the Offset drop-down to Ratio. Edit the Offset value to 0.75. Click Next End twice.
Creating Points at Intersections

You can create points at the intersections of two or three references from geometry or other datum features.
Combinations include: Three planes/three surfaces Two curves Two edges A curve and edge Two axes Curves/Edges/Axes with Surfaces/Planes References do not need to physically intersect Next Intersection
Figure 1 Point at the Intersection of Three Planes
Fo r
Creating Points at Intersections

You can create datum points as reference geometry for other datum features, for solid features, or for surface features. You can create points at the intersections of two or three references from geometry or other datum features. Most geometry that defines or locates a point in 3-D space can be specified as a reference. The following reference combinations are available for creating intersections: Three planes/three surfaces Locate a point at the intersection of three planes, three surfaces, or a combination. In Figure 1, the point is located at the intersection of the three datum planes. Two curves Locate a point at the intersection of two curves. In Figure 2, points 4 and 5 are located at the intersection of the two curves. Two edges Locate a point at the intersection of two edges. A curve and edge Locate a point at the intersection of a curve and edge. Two axes Locate a point at the intersection of two axes.
PT
Figure 2 Points at the Intersections of Curves and Planes
In
te rn
Figure 3 Point at the Intersection of a Surface and Datum Axis
al
U se
nl y
Curves/Edges/Axes with Surfaces/Planes Locate a point at the intersection of a curve, edge, or axis, and a surface or plane. In Figure 2, point 6 is located at the intersection of a datum plane and a curve. In Figure 3, the point is located at the intersection of the datum axis and the surface. There does not need to be a physical intersection between the selected entities. The system extrapolates to find an intersection, if one exists. If more than one intersection exists between the selected entities, you can click Next Intersection to toggle between all available intersections for the specified entities. In Figure 2, there are two intersections between the two datum curves. Point 4 is located at one intersection, and point 5 is located at the other intersection.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 17
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Points at Intersections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed POINTS_INTERSECT.PRT
Datum\Points_Intersect Task 1:
Create points at the intersections of different entities.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Point group. . from the Datum
4. In the Datum Point dialog box, click New Point. 5. Press CTRL and select the top, rear edge and datum plane RIGHT from the model tree. 6. Click OK. 7. Disable 8. Click Point . .
Fo r
10. Disable the following Datum Display types: . 11. In the Datum Point dialog box, click New Point.
12. Press CTRL and select the rear, right, and front surfaces. 13. Click OK. 14. Notice that the selected references do not have to physically touch. The point determines the intersection.
PT
9. Press CTRL and select datum planes TOP, RIGHT, and FRONT from the model tree.
In
te rn
al
U se
3. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_1 and the top surface.
nl y
15. Click Point
16. Press CTRL and select the two datum curves to the left side of the model.
22. Click OK.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 19
21. Press CTRL and select the top datum curve and datum plane RIGHT.
U se
19. In the Datum Point dialog box, click Next Intersection.
nl y
18. Press CTRL and select the two datum curves on the left side of the model.
Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System

You can create an array of datum points by referencing a coordinate system.
Array is one feature in model tree. Specify reference coordinate system. Specify coordinate system type: Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical Specify parameters based on coordinate system type.
Figure 1 Creating an Array of Points using an Offset Coordinate System
Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System
Fo r
You can create an array of datum points by referencing a coordinate system. The entire array of points created becomes a single feature in the model tree. To create the array of points you must first select a reference coordinate system. You can then specify the type of coordinate system selected. The coordinate system type specified determines the parameters that must be typed for each datum point. The locations of all points in the array are based on the coordinates for each parameter. The following coordinate system types are available: Cartesian You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters for the points. Cylindrical You must specify R, Theta (), and Z parameters for the points. Spherical You must specify r, Theta (), and Phi () parameters for the points. You can create new points in the array by clicking in the empty row at the bottom of the existing point array. You can edit the point coordinate values within the table by editing the values in the graphics window, or by dragging the handle in the appropriate parameter direction. For example, if the
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
reference coordinate system type is Cartesian, the drag handle parameters are X, Y, and Z. You can also specify the option for Use Non Parametric Array. Enabling this option converts the point array to a Non Parametric Array, which does not include any dimensions. You are not able to modify the values using the Edit command in the right mouse button menu, as this option is removed from the menu. The following file options are available for creating points using an offset coordinate system: Import Enables you to import a text file of coordinate data. The file type that can be imported is a .pts file. Update Values Enables you to add, delete, or update the point coordinates using a text editor. Upon saving the file in the text editor, the list of points in the Offset Csys Datum Point dialog box updates. Save Enables you to save an array of points as a .pts file.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 21
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Points using an Offset Coordinate System

Close Window Erase Not Displayed POINTS_OFFSET-CSYS.PRT
Datum\Points_Offset-Csys Task 1:
Create a set of datum points using an offset coordinate system.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. In the ribbon, select Offset from the Coordinate System Point types drop-down menu in the Datum group. 3. Select coordinate system CS0. 4. Click in the first row of the Datum Point dialog box to create the first row of points. Right-click the first row of points and select Rename. Edit the name to START. Verify that the X, Y, and Z coordinates are 0, 0, and 0, respectively. 5. Click in the second row of the Datum Point dialog box to create the second row of points. Edit the X, Y, and Z coordinates to 0, 10, and 0, respectively.
Fo r
6. Click in the third row of the Datum Point dialog box and create seven more rows of points. 7. Edit the values as shown.
Module 2 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
8. Click OK from the Datum Point dialog box. 9. Disable the following Datum Display types: .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 23
U se
nl y
Sketching Geometry Datums

Create points, axes, and coordinate systems in a Sketch.
Geometry Points Create: Datum Points (External Sketch) Datum Axes (Internal Sketch) Geometry Centerlines Create: Datum Axes Geometry Csys Create: Datum Csys
Figure 1 Geometry Points
In
te rn
You can create datum points, datum axes, and datum coordinate systems in a sketch. A sketch may contain any number of sketched datum features without any further geometry. Likewise, a sketch may contain sketched geometry or construction geometry in addition to sketched geometry datums. You can also use a sketch that contains sketched datum features to create features, such as an extrude or revolve. The following tools, found in the Datum group of the ribbon, are used to create geometry datums: Point Centerline Coordinate System Traditional sketched points, centerlines, and coordinate systems now have new icons with a dashed appearance to distinguish from the new sketched geometry tools. Geometry datums can be created in external or internal sketches:
Fo r
PT
Sketching Geometry Datums
Figure 2 Geometry Centerline and Csys
al
Figure 3 Datum Features Created
U se
nl y
For external sketches existing on their own, the geometry datums are created in the sketching plane. For an internal sketch within an Extrude, the Geometry Point tool creates an axis normal to the sketching plane. Note the following when creating geometry datums: When a sketch containing geometry datums is used for a feature, the geometry datums are hidden along with the sketch. When a geometry datum is selected, you can right-click and select Construction to convert it to a sketch entity. Likewise you can select a construction point, centerline, or sketched coordinate system, and right-click and select Geometry to convert the entity to a geometry datum.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 25
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Sketching Geometry Datums

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_DATUMS.PRT
Datum\Geometry_Datums Task 1:
Create geometry points in an external sketch.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Select Sketch 1 from the model tree. Right-click and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 4. Select the arc, then right-click and select Construction.
5. Click Point from the Datum group in the ribbon. Place three points on the construction arc: one on each centerline, and one on the vertical reference.
6. Click OK
Fo r
7. Notice that datum points are created as part of Sketch 1 in the model tree.
Task 2:
1. Click Extrude from the Shape group in the ribbon. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. Click Use Previous.
Module 2 | Page 26
PT
Place geometry points in an internal sketch for an extrude.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Click Center and Ends from the Arc drop down menu in the Sketching group in the ribbon. Sketch and dimension an arc as shown. 3. Click Point , and place a geometry point on each arc endpoint. 4. Click OK .
5. Right-click and select Remove Material. 6. Right-click and select Flip Depth Direction. 7. Right-click the depth handle and select Through All. 8. Click Complete Feature 9. Notice the created axes. Task 3: .
Fo r
3. Click Centerline from the Datum group in the ribbon. Place a horizontal geometry axis through PNT1.
4. Click Coordinate System from the Datum group. Place a geometry coordinate system as shown.
2012 PTC
PT
2. Right-click and select References. Select PNT1 and click Close.
In
1. Click Sketch Previous.
te rn
. Click Use
Create a geometry centerline and a geometry coordinate system.
al
U se
Module 2 | Page 27
nl y
5. Click OK
6. Notice the axis and coordinate system.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex

You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum points, or edge/curve vertices.
Curve Dashboard options: Use Line Line Spline Use Spline Curve Attributes: Free Place curve on surface Ends conditions: Free Tangent Normal Curvature Continuous Tweak: Move type Style Points Movement Plane Motion direction Region Sliders Diagnostics
In
Fo r
You can create a curve through a series of at least two datum points, or edge/curve vertices. Each point to point segment can be defined as either a line (Use Line ) or a spline (Use Spline ). Segments defined as straight lines can be filleted at the points where they connect to one another using the Add fillet option. When this option is used, the segments are selectable so that a dragger for a radius value can be accessed. If no radius is added, the segments are joined through each point. You can group points of equal fillet radii together, thereby controlling multiple radii with a single dimension.
Defining Curve Placement Options

When creating a curve through points, you can define the following placement options: Free (Default) The curve passes through the selected points using the Free option. The curve in the upper image of Figure 1 is Free. On Surface The curve passes through the selected points and lies on a specified quilt or surface using the Place curve on surface option. Only
PT
Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex
te rn
Figure 2 Displaying Curvature Plot
al
U se
Figure 1 Defining Curve Placement
nl y
one surface can be selected, so it may be necessary to merge surfaces if more than one is to be selected. The curve in the lower image of Figure 1 lies on the surface.
Defining Tangency Conditions

Using the Ends Condition tab in the dashboard, you can define tangency conditions for both the start point and end point of the curve. The following options are available for tangency conditions: Free Enables you to set the end tangencies to be free (default). Tangent Enables you to define the curve endpoints tangent to the selected reference. Normal Enables you to define the curve endpoints normal to the selected reference. Curvature Continuous Enables you to define the curve as curvature continuous. This means that the curvature equals the curvature of the selected tangency reference. This option is only available for the tangent condition. When specifying the tangency condition, you must select a reference that is used to set the tangency condition against. For example, if you define a tangent condition, you must select a reference to which the curve endpoint is tangent. The reference types that can be selected include curves, edges, axes, surfaces, or a surface normal to the edge. You can also create an axis. You can always remove a tangency condition from either end point by selecting Free from the End condition drop down list.
Defining Tweak Options
Move type Enables you to move the curve either using its control polyhedron or by its spline points. In Figure 2, the spline's control polyhedron is displayed. Style Points Enables you to move, add, delete, or redistribute points. This option is only available when the Move type is set to spline points. Movement Plane Enables you to specify the movement plane as the Curve Plane, a Defined Plane, or the View Plane. Motion direction Enables you to move the curve in the First direction, Second direction, or the Normal direction. Region Enables you to determine which area of the curve to move, whether Local, Smooth Region, Linear Region, or Constant Region. Sliders You can move the curve using sliders for First direction, Second direction, and Normal direction. You can also adjust the sensitivity of the sliders. There is also a series of diagnostics available to help you achieve the desired curve shape. Available diagnostics include: Curvature display Radius display
Fo r
PT
The Tweak curve option enables you to click Tweak Curve Settings and dynamically manipulate the spline. The following types of manipulations can be performed to the curve:
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Tangents display Interpolation Points display
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 31
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Curves Through a Point or Vertex

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CURVE_THRU-PNT-VTX.PRT
Datum\Curve_Thru-Pnt-Vtx Task 1:
Create a curve through two vertices.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Curve through Points from the Curve types drop-down list. 3. Select the two vertices. 4. Select the Ends Condition tab from the Curve dashboard. 5. Select Start Point from the Curve side list and select Tangent from the End condition drop-down menu. Select the front edge on the left surface. 6. Select End Point from the Curve side list and select Tangent from the End condition drop-down menu and select the front edge on the right surface.
Fo r
7. Select the Options tab, select Tweak curve and click Tweak Curve Settings. 8. In the Modify Curve dialog box, click Diagnostics and display the Curvature plot. 9. In the graphics window, click the middle two points and drag them outward so the curvature plot line resembles an arc.
Module 2 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. Click Apply Changes from the Modify Curve dialog box. 11. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from
Task 2:
Create a curve through two vertices and a point.
Fo r
7. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.
PT
6. Select the long adjacent edge on the right surface. from
8. Right-click datum plane DTM2 from the model tree and select Edit. 9. Edit the offset value to -1.
2012 PTC
5. Cursor over the right control handle, then right-click and select Normal.
In
te rn
4. Select the long adjacent edge on the left surface.
al
Module 2 | Page 33
3. Cursor over the left control handle, then right-click and select Normal.
U se
2. Select the left vertex, the datum point, and the right vertex.
nl y
1. Click Curve from the Datum drop-down menu.
Task 3:
Create a curve through a point and vertex. .
1. Click Curve
2. Select datum point PNT1, and the rear vertex.
4. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
from the dashboard.
al
2012 PTC
3. Spin the model and notice that the curve is above the surface. Select the Placement tab in the dashboard and select Place curve on surface. Right-click to query, select Quilt:F11. Notice that the curve now lies on the quilt.
U se
nl y
Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of points.
Connection types: Spline Single Radius Multiple Radius Point selections: Single Point Whole Array
PT
Fo r
Figure 2 Fitting a Single Radius Curve
In
te rn
Figure 3 Fitting a Multiple Radius Curve
Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

You can quickly create a datum curve through a number of points when those points are created as a point array. When selecting the points, query the array until all points highlight, then select the whole array. You can fit the following types of curves through an array of datum points: Enables you to create a spline curve through the Use Spline selected array of datum points. Use Line Enables you to join points with line segments and, if desired, to add a radius to the line segments, making the resulting curve smoother. Zero Radius Single Radius A single radius value controls the fit of the curve.
al
U se
Figure 1 Fitting a Spline Curve
nl y
Multiple Radii Provided the points are selected individually within the array, multiple radii can be used to control the fit. Enable the Group with equal radius points option to group separate radii controls together, thereby controlling them with a single dimension value.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve Through a Point Array

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CRV_THRU-PNT-ARRAY.PRT
Datum\Crv_Thru-Pnt-Array Task 1:
Create a spline datum curve through an array of points.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Curve through Points from the Curve drop-down list. 3. Highlight datum point START. 4. Right-click so the entire point array highlights, then select the point. 5. Click Complete Feature . 6. Right-click Curve 1 in the model tree and select Hide.
Task 2:
1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Curve .
Fo r
2. Highlight datum point START, then right-click and then select it. 3. Click Use Line in the dashboard to toggle from a spline to straight lines. 4. Click Preview Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
Create a curve through an array of points with straight line segments, with zero radius and a single radius.
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 37
U se
nl y
5. Click Resume Feature 6. Click Round Curve the radius to 10.
. and edit .
7. Click Complete Feature
8. Right-click Curve 2 in the model tree and select Hide.
Task 3:
Create a multiple radius datum curve through an array of points.
2. Select datum point START. 3. Select the next adjacent datum point in the array. 4. Click Use Line dashboard. from the
5. Select the next 7 points in the array.
8. Select Point 5. Select Add fillet. Disable Group with equal radius points. Edit the Radius to 10.00. 9. Select Point 6, press CTRL and select Point 7, Point 8, and Point 9. Select Add fillet. Edit the Radius to 5.00. Enable Group with equal radius points.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 38
PT
7. Select Point 2, press CTRL and select Point 3, and Point 4. Select Add fillet. Edit the Radius to 5.00.
In
6. Select the Placement tab in the dashboard.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Curve .
nl y
10. Double-click any of the 5.00 radius values on the model, and edit it to 2.00.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 39
12. Right-click the third Curve 3 in the model tree and select Edit. Notice that even though bend radius 2 was used in multiple locations, it is only displayed once.
U se
nl y
Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

You can create a curve at the intersection of a planar cross-section and part outline.
You can use solid or surface models. The cross-section boundary is used to create the datum curve.
Figure 1 Planar Cross-Section
Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section
You can create a curve from a cross-section in one of three ways: You can use the Curve from Cross Section option to create a datum curve from a planar cross-section by selecting the cross-section from the drop-down list in the dashboard. You can create or select a cross-section from the Sections tab in the View Manager, then right-click and select Curve from xsec. You can expand the Sections node in the model tree, right-click a section and select Create a Curve. The system creates a curve at the intersection of the planar cross-section and the part outline. You can create cross-section curves from solid or surface models. The cross-section boundary is used to create a datum curve. If a cross-section has more than one chain, each chain has a composite curve. In Figure 1, a cross-section was created at a datum plane intersecting the model. The curve in Figure 2 was then created using this cross-section boundary. You cannot use a boundary from an offset cross-section to create a datum curve.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Creating the Curve
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from a Cross-Section

Close Window Erase Not Displayed XSEC.PRT
Datum\Curve_Xsec Task 1:
Create a surface cross-section.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. from the In Graphics toolbar. 2. Click View Manager Select the Sections tab, if necessary. Click New > Planar and press ENTER to accept the default name of Xsec0001. 3. Select datum plane DTM3 from the model tree. 4. Select the Options tab in the dashboard. 6. Click Complete Feature .
5. Select Include the select quilt and click anywhere on the model.
8. Right-click Xsec0001 and select Show Section. 9. Click Close. 10. Click in the graphics window to deselect any geometry.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Curve from Cross Section from the Curve types drop-down menu.
2. In the dashboard, select cross-section XSEC0001 from the Cross-section drop-down list. 3. Click Complete Feature . 4. Notice that the curve is created.
2012 PTC
PT
Create the curve from the cross-section.
In
te rn
7. Double-click No Cross Section in the View Manager.
al
Module 2 | Page 41
U se
nl y
Task 3:
Create a Cross Section Curve from the View Manager.
1. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. Select the Sections tab, if necessary. 2. Right-click cross section A and select Curve from xsec. Notice that the curve is created. 3. Click Close.
Task 4:
Create a cross-section using the Sections group in the model tree.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 42
PT
In
te rn
2. Right-click section B and select Create a Curve. Notice the curve is created.
al
2012 PTC
1. In the model tree, expand the Sections node.
U se
nl y
Creating a Curve From Equation

You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a mathematical equation.
Can create in terms of parameter T Varies from 0 to 1 Can also type in explicit equations Automatically finds the independent variable. Range specified by the user. You may use substitutions to keep expressions simple. You must specify the following: Coordinate system Coordinate system type Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical Equation
Figure 1 Straight Line Curve
In
te rn
Figure 3 Sine Wave Curve
Creating a Curve From Equation

You can create a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D datum curve defined by a mathematical equation. The equation can be defined for one, two, or three coordinate system axes. The coordinate system type can be specified for the selected coordinate system. The following three coordinate system types can be used: Cartesian You must specify X, Y, and Z parameters in the equation. Cylindrical You must specify R, Theta (), and Z parameters in the equation. Spherical You must specify R, Theta (), and Phi () parameters in the equation. You type the equation into a text editor, which launches once you specify the type of coordinate system. You define the three parameters for the coordinate system type specified, each on a separate line of the text editor.
Fo r
Using the T Parameter

One method of defining equations is to do so in terms of a parameter T, which varies from 0 to 1. The following are examples of different Cartesian coordinate system equations that you can create a curve from: Straight Line (in X direction) x=35*t, y=0, z=0. Shown in Figure 1.
PT
al
U se
Figure 2 Parabola Curve
nl y
Parabola (in XZ plane) x=35*t, y=0, z=35*t^2. Shown in Figure 2. Sine wave (in XY plane) x=t*10, y=3*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure 3. Circle (in XY plane) x=4*cos(t*360), y=4*sin(t*360), z=0. Shown in Figure 4.
Using Explicit Equations
Straight Line y=x, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 5.
Fo r
Figure 6 Angled Line Curve Full parabola y=10*(x/10)2, range 10 to 10. Shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7 Full Parabola Curve Half parabola y=10*(x/10)2, range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 8.
Module 2 | Page 44
PT
Figure 5 Straight Line Curve Angled Line y=x/2+5 range 0 to 10. Shown in Figure 6.
In
te rn
al
The following are examples of different explicit equations that you can create a curve from:
U se
Another method of defining curves is to type in an explicit equation. Creo Parametric automatically finds the independent variable and internally parameterizes the equations to draw the curve. You type in the independent variables range, with the default range being 0 to 1. You may use substitutions to keep the expressions simple, as long as there is only a single independent variable.
nl y
2012 PTC
Figure 4 Circular Curve
Figure 8 Half Parabola Curve Sine wave y=100*sin(2*x)+10, range 0 to 360. Shown in Figure 9.
Figure 9 Sine Wave Curve Helix along Z axis, cylindrical csys r=1000, z=5*theta, range 0 to 360. Shown in Figure 10.
PT
Fo r
2012 PTC
In
te rn
Figure 10 Helical Curve
al
Module 2 | Page 45
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve From Equation

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CURVES_EQUATION_1.PRT
Datum\Curves_Equation Task 1:
Create a datum curve from an equation using the T parameter.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
5. Click Equation. 6. Read the Equation information dialog box then click Close. 7. In the Equation dialog box, type the following equation: x=6*t y=0 z=0
Fo r
8. Click OK from the Equation dialog box. .
Module 2 | Page 46
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. In the dashboard, select Cartesian, if necessary.
3. In the model tree, select coordinate system CS0.
nl y
2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Curve from Equation from the curve types drop-down list.
10. Edit the definition of Curve 1. 11. Click Equation. 12. In the Equation dialog box, edit the equation to: x=6*t y=14*t z=0 13. Click OK. 14. Click Complete Feature .
16. Click Equation.
18. Click OK.
In
17. In the Equation dialog box, edit the equation to: x=6*t y=14*t^3 z=0 19. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 47
15. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Investigate and refine a datum curve using an explicit equation.
1. Click Open , select CURVES_EQUATION_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 3. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
8. Edit the definition of Curve 1. 9. Click Equation. 10. In the Equation dialog box, edit the equation to: y=100*sin(2*x)+10 11. Click OK. 12. Edit the To range value to 360. 13. Click Complete Feature .
15. Edit the Coordinate System type to Cylindrical.
Fo r
16. Click Equation. 17. In the Equation dialog box, edit the equation to: r=1000 z=5*theta 18. Click OK. 19. Click Complete Feature .
Module 2 | Page 48
PT
14. Edit the definition of Curve 1.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
6. Edit the From range value to 0.
5. Click OK from the Equation dialog box.
nl y
4. Click Equation from the dashboard to review the equation.
Creating Composite Curves

You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a solid or surface model to create a composite datum curve.
Two types of composite curves: Exact Approximate
Figure 1 Creating an Exact Composite Curve
Figure 2 Creating an Approximate Composite Curve
Creating Composite Curves
Fo r
Exact Creates an exact copy of the selected edge(s). Approximate Creates a datum curve that approximates a chain of tangent (C1) curves by creating a single curvature continuous (C2) spline. This is useful for surfacing applications, when a continuous curvature curve is desired to create a surface, in cases where the original edges may only be tangent. You can also use approximate curves to remove small surfaces from the design, and create a single surface with continuous curvature, instead of a surface with multiple patches.
During curve creation, you can drag the handles at either endpoint of the previewed curve to lengthen or shorten the resulting curve. You can also edit the values directly. In Figure 1, you can view the drag handles. To shorten the resulting composite curve you can type negative values. To lengthen or extend the endpoints of the resulting composite curve you can type positive values.
2012 PTC
PT
Approximate curves cannot be created on joint angles greater then 5 degrees.
In
You can copy and paste selected edges or edge chains from a solid or surface model to create a composite datum curve. There are two types of composite curves that can be created:
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 49
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Composite Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COMPOSITE.PRT
Datum\Curve_Composite Task 1:
Create an exact copy composite curve.
5. Click Copy .
and click Paste
Task 2:
Create an approximate copy composite curve.
1. Select the boundary blend surface.
Fo r
2. Query-select the rear tangent chain of edges until the entire edge length is pre-highlighted. 3. Click to select the pre-highlighted edge.
Module 2 | Page 50
PT
In
8. Notice the Copy 1 feature in the model tree.
te rn
.
6. Select Exact from the Curve type drop-down list in the dashboard, if necessary.
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Click to select the pre-highlighted edge.
3. Query-select the straight, front, surface edge until the entire edge length is pre-highlighted.
nl y
2. Select the boundary blend surface.
4. Click Copy .
and click Paste
5. Select Approximate from the Curve type drop-down list in the dashboard. 6. Click Complete Feature . 7. Notice the Copy 2 feature in the model tree. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 51
U se
nl y
Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections

With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection of two sketches.
System extrudes theoretical surfaces. Curve created at the intersection of these surfaces.
With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection of two sketches. The system theoretically extrudes surfaces towards each other from the selected sketches, as shown Figure 1, and then creates the curve at the intersection of the theoretical surfaces.
Fo r
The Intersect feature automatically completes without opening the Intersect dashboard if you preselect both references. You can, however, redefine the intersect feature to change the selected sketch references. You can also preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the Intersect dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.
Module 2 | Page 52
PT
Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections
In
Figure 1 Viewing Theoretically Extruded Surfaces
te rn
al
Figure 2 Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve from Curve Intersections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CURVE_INTERSECTION.PRT
Datum\Curve_Isect-Curve Task 1:
Create a new curve from the intersection of two other curves.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice that there are two 2-D datum curves. 3. Press CTRL and select the two datum curves.
6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1. 7. Select the References tab in the dashboard and view the selected sketches. 8. Click Complete Feature
PT
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
te rn
.
5. Notice the 3-D curve that is created. Notice that the original two curves are hidden.
al
Module 2 | Page 53
4. Click Intersect from the Editing group in the ribbon.
U se
nl y
Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

The Intersect tool enables you to create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection of two surfaces.
Curve created at the intersection of two surfaces. Resulting curve can be 2-D or 3-D.
With the Intersect tool you can create a 2-D or 3-D curve at the intersection of two surface quilts. The system creates the curve at the intersection of the surfaces, as shown in Figure 1. The Intersect feature automatically completes without opening the Intersect dashboard if you preselect both references, since the Intersect process is fully defined. However, you can redefine the intersect feature to change the selected quilt references. You can also preselect one reference and start the Intersect tool. This opens the Intersect dashboard and prompts you to select the second sketch.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 54
PT
Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection
In
te rn
al
Figure 1 Creating a Curve from Surface Intersection
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Curve at Surface Intersection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CURVE_INTERSECT-SURF.PRT
Datum\Curve_Isect-Surface Task 1:
Create a curve at the intersection of two surfaces.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the two surfaces.
4. Click Intersect from the Editing group in the ribbon. 5. Notice the 3-D curve that is created.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
7. Select the References tab and view the selected quilts. .
In
6. Edit the definition of Intersect 1.
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 55
U se
nl y
3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.
Projecting and Wrapping Curves

You can project or wrap curves onto a surface or set of surfaces.
Projected Curves Projected onto a surface or set of surfaces Normal to reference plane Length can increase or decrease from original Wrapped Curves Formed over a surface Length does not change from original
Figure 1 Projecting a Curve
When projecting a curve, the following options are available:
Fo r
References Enables you to select the sketch or chain of curves to be projected and the surface or surfaces to be projected onto. If desired, you can define an internal sketch. Direction Enables you to specify both the direction reference and the direction. There are two different directions you can select: Along direction Projects the selected chains or sketch in a specified direction. Normal to surface Projects the selected chains or sketch normal to the target surface. Flip Enables you to flip the direction of the projected datum curve.
Creating Wrap Curves

You can wrap (form) a sketched curve over a surface. The length of the wrapped curve is not changed from the original. The surface the curve
PT
You can project a selected curve onto a surface or set of surfaces, normal to a reference plane. Depending on the shape of the surface and the angle of the plane, the length of the projected curve can increase or decrease from the original.
In
Creating Projected Curves
te rn
al
Figure 2 Wrapping a Curve
U se
nl y
is wrapped onto must be developable, meaning that it must be some type of ruled surface. When wrapping a curve, the following options are available: Select the sketch to be wrapped. If desired, you can define an internal sketch. Specify the destination surface onto which the curve is to be wrapped. Define the wrap origin By default, the wrap origin is the sketch center. You can also create a sketched coordinate system in the wrapped sketch and define it as the wrap origin. Ignore intersection surface Causes any intersecting surfaces to be ignored when wrapping the curve. Trim at boundary Trims the portion of a curve that cannot be wrapped at the surface boundary.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 57
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Projecting and Wrapping Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PROJECT_WRAP.PRT
Datum\Curve_Project-Wrap Task 1:
Project a datum curve onto a surface.
5. Select the surface. 6. Click Complete Feature . 7. The curve is projected onto the surface. 8. Edit the definition of Project 1.
PT
9. In the dashboard, click in the Direction reference collector to activate it. Select datum plane DTM2 from the model tree as the new datum reference.
Fo r
Task 2:
Wrap a datum curve onto a surface.
1. Select datum curve WRAP_CURVE. 2. Select the Editing drop-down menu and click Wrap . .
Module 2 | Page 58
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
from the 4. Click Project Editing group in the ribbon.
3. Select datum curve PROJ_CURVE from the model tree.
nl y
2. Notice the two circular datum curves.
4. Edit the definition of datum curve WRAP_CURVE. 5. Click Coordinate System from the Sketching group. Place a sketched coordinate system on the sketch. 6. Click OK .
8. Edit the definition of Wrap 1. 9. Edit the Wrap Origin from Center to Sketcher CSYS. 10. Notice the difference in the wrapped curve location. 11. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 59
U se
nl y
7. Orient to the WRAP view orientation.
Trimming Curves
You can trim a curve at a selected point to either break it into segments or specify which side to keep.
Curve trimmed at Trimming object: Datum Point Datum Plane Another curve Blue side denotes the portion to be removed. You can flip which side to keep: Keep side 1 Keep side 2 Keep both sides
Figure 2 Keeping Both Sides
Fo r
Trimming Curves
The Trim tool adapts to the object selected. It enables you to trim a curve or a surface, whichever is selected. You can use the Trim tool to either remove a portion of a curve or break it into multiple segments. To trim a curve, you must select it as the Trimmed curve. You must then select the Trimming object such as a datum point, datum plane, or point. The curve is split at the Trimming object location. In Figure 1, a datum plane is selected as the Trimming object. The blue shading on the curve indicates the side that will be trimmed, or removed. The arrow points towards the side to be kept. In the middle image of Figure 1, the right half of the curve is to be removed. You can flip the side of the curve that is trimmed using the following order: Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 1. Curve split at Trimming object, keep side 2.
PT
Figure 1 Selecting Trimming Object, Keeping a Side, Viewing Completed Trim
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Curve split at Trimming object, keep both sides. No geometry is trimmed. Rather, the curve is segmented. In Figure 2, both sides of the curve are to be kept. Thus, both sides display an arrow. You can flip the side by clicking the arrow in the graphics window, by right-clicking and selecting Flip, or by clicking Flip Trim Sides dashboard. from the
You cannot access the option to keep both sides by clicking the arrow in the graphics window.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 61
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Trimming Curves

Close Window Datum\Curve_Trim Task 1: Trim a datum curve. Erase Not Displayed CURVE_TRIM.PRT
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Sketch 1. 3. Click Trim from the Editing group in the ribbon. 4. Select datum point PNT0. 5. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim to make the arrow Sides point to the left, leaving blue geometry on the right. .
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 62
PT
8. De-select all features.
In
7. The curve side that was blue has been trimmed away.
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
9. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. 10. Enable Plane Display . 11. Select the curve on its left side as shown. Notice it is a trim feature in the model tree. 12. Also notice that only one piece is available for subsequent selection.
13. Click Trim
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 63
14. Select datum plane DTM1 from the model tree.
U se
nl y
15. In the dashboard, click Flip Trim Sides sides. twice to keep both
16. Click Complete Feature 17. De-select all features.
19. Also notice that two pieces are available for subsequent selection.
20. Select the lower half of the curve.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 64
PT
In
te rn
18. Select the curve. Notice it is another trim feature in the model tree.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Offset Curves

You can create curves that are offset either along a surface or normal to a surface.
Curves offset along a surface: Original reference can be a curve or surface edge. Define offset values: Distance Distance Type Location Curves offset normal to a surface: Original reference must be a curve. Specify Scale. Can specify datum graph.
Fo r
Creating Offset Curves Along a Surface

You can create a datum curve that is offset from a surface boundary edge, a chain of edges, or another curve on that surface. The resulting curve lies on the surface. By default, one offset value is provided. However, you can create additional offset values and then locate those offset values along the offset edge as desired. The offset value location is a ratio of the entire offset line length. For example, if you want to locate an offset value at the midpoint of the curve, you would specify a Location of 0.5. You can also locate the offset values on the curve endpoints. In Figure 1, the curve has two offset values defined, one at each endpoint. For each offset value, you can specify the distance the curve is offset from its original curve. In Figure 1, the curve is offset on one side by 2.00, and on the other side by 1.00. This distance value can be measured using the following distance types: Normal to Edge Measures offset distance normal to the boundary edge.
PT
Figure 2 Offsetting a Curve Normal to a Surface
In
te rn
Figure 3 Offsetting a Curve using a Datum Graph
al
U se
Figure 1 Offsetting a Curve Along a Surface
nl y
Along Edge Measures offset distance along the measurement edge. To Vertex Starts offset curve at the vertex and parallel to the boundary edge.
Creating Offset Curves Normal to a Surface

You can offset a curve on a surface, normal to a reference surface. The resulting curve is raised off the surface by a distance, as shown in the Figure 2 and Figure 3. You can specify this offset distance using the following methods: Offset value The distance the curve is offset from the surface. Unit Datum Graph A datum graph with a constant X-length of 1.0 is used to specify the curve offset. The resulting curve is offset at a constant value as defined by the Scale value in the dashboard. In Figure 2, a unit datum graph is used to offset the curve. As a result, the offset is the same along the entire curve. Optional Datum Graph The curve offset is determined by an optionally specified datum graph. When an optional datum graph is defined, the system uses the Offset value as a multiplier. In Figure 3, the optional datum graph is specified. As a result, the offset varies along the curve based on the datum graph.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 66
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Curves

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CURVES_OFFSET.PRT
Datum\Curves_Offset Task 1:
Create a curve offset along a surface.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the surface.
5. Edit the offset distance to 2. 6. In the dashboard, select the Measurements tab. Right-click in the tab and select Add. A point is added. Drag the point's dot to the rightmost end. Edit the Distance Type to Along Edge. 7. Right-click in the Measurements tab and select Add. Another point is added. Edit the Location to 0.35. Edit the Distance to 1.
Fo r
8. In the Measurements tab, right-click the third point and select Delete. .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 67
U se
from the Editing 4. Click Offset group in the ribbon.
nl y
3. Select the front edge.
Task 2:
Create a curve offset normal to a surface.
1. Edit the definition of GRAPH1. In the menu manager, click Done. Press ENTER. 2. View the graph. Notice that it slopes from 0.5 to 1.25. 3. Click OK .
4. Select curve Offset 1. 5. Click Offset . 6. The dashboard now has more options. The first, and default, option is Offset Along Surface . The first curve was this type. 7. Select Offset Normal To
8. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.
Fo r
9. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Click in the Graph collector to activate it. Select GRAPH1. Notice that the curve has updated. .
Module 2 | Page 68
PT
Surface . Edit the Scale to 1.0, if necessary.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Spin the model to notice the difference in curve creation.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 69
U se
nl y
Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Cosmetic sketches are used to sketch entities on the model for purely visual purposes.
Purely visual Do not add or remove material Fully constrained or Under-Constrained Unique display on screen and in model tree Can be cross-hatched
Figure 2 Under-Constrained Mode
Creating Cosmetic Sketches
Fo r
Cosmetic sketches are created using the Cosmetic Sketch option in the Engineering group of the ribbon, and can contain any sketched geometry. The sketch can be fully constrained, as with standard sketched features, or can use the special Under-Constrained Mode of sketcher. This mode enables you to snap the sketched geometry to references if desired, but does not require dimensions to fully constrain the sketch, as shown in Figure 2. Under-Constrained Mode enables the import of large and complex 2-D geometry. By default, cosmetic sketches are created in a different color (orange) from standard sketches (blue), and also have a unique icon in the model tree, as shown in Figure 3. Cosmetic sketches can contain cross-hatching that can be modified on a drawing. Several restrictions apply to cosmetic sketches: They do not appear by default when rotating the model. They cannot be used as a sketch reference for a sketch-based feature (such as extrude). They cannot be referenced by other features or sketches. For example, you cannot select a cosmetic sketched curve for a sweep trajectory or for a snapping reference in sketcher.
PT
In
Cosmetic sketches are created very similar to a typical sketch feature (sketched datum curve). Unlike sketch features, cosmetic features are not used to add or remove material from the model, but instead are used to sketch on the model for purely visual purposes, as shown in Figure 1.
te rn
al
Figure 3 Cosmetic Sketched Text Created
U se
nl y
Figure 1 Before and After Cosmetic Features
PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Sketches

Close Window Cosmetic\Sketch Task 1: Erase Not Displayed WRENCH.ASM
Create a constrained cosmetic sketch with text.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT in the model tree, then right-click and select Open. Notice the existing standard sketch features (blue). 3. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu and select Cosmetic Sketch. 4. Select the main model surface and click Sketch. 5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
Fo r
7. In the Text dialog box: Type 5mm. Select Right for the Horizontal Position. Select Middle for the Vertical Position. Click OK.
8. Click One-by-One and edit the dimensions as shown. 9. Click OK sketch. to complete the
10. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select any geometry. Notice the difference in the cosmetic appearance.
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Click Text and sketch a reference line.
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 71
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Create an unconstrained cosmetic sketch with hatching.
1. Press ALT and select the main surface. 2. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu and select Cosmetic Sketch. 3. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle drop-down list, and create the sketch shown. 4. Click the Setup group drop-down menu and enable Under-Constrained Mode. Notice the lack of dimensions in Under-Constrained Mode. 5. Select Center and Axis Ellipse from the Ellipse drop-down list and sketch two ellipses. Constrain the ellipse centers coincident to the diagonal construction line endpoints. 6. Click Delete Segment and trim the sketch as shown.
Fo r
8. Click Sketch Setup Setup group.
PT
7. Click the Setup group drop-down menu and disable Under-Constrained Mode.
9. Select the Properties tab in the Cosmetic Sketch dialog box. Enable Add cross-hatching. Edit the spacing to 5. Click Sketch. to complete the
10. Click OK sketch.
Module 2 | Page 72
In
te rn
from the
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
3
U se O te rn al
Module 3 | Page 1
Advanced Sketching
Module Overview
Sketches can consist of simple entities, such as lines, arcs, and circles. However, you can create more complex shapes by using advanced entities, such as ellipses, conics, splines, and elliptical fillets. You can also create sketched text entities by either manually typing in the text value, or by using the value of a parameter that you have specified in the design model. You can adjust the text as desired. You can use Sketcher diagnostic tools to aid you while in Sketcher to be more efficient.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand sketched curves. Sketch ellipses, elliptical fillets, and conics. Sketch and modify splines, as well as import and export spline points. Sketch and modify text. Analyze Sketcher convert options including Strong, Spline, Reference, Perimeter, and Tapered. Analyze Sketcher dimension options, including creating reference and baseline dimensions as well as locking dimensions. Use Sketcher diagnostic tools including shading closed loops, highlighting open ends, highlighting open geometry, and feature requirements check.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Using Sketched Curves

Sketched curves can be used in a variety of different ways.
Uses include: Section Boundary Trajectory Reference Geometry Other curves Other datum features Surfaces or supporting geometry
Section In Figure 1, the sketched curve was used as one of the three sections in a rotational blend feature. Boundary In Figure 2, the two sketched curves are used as the first direction boundaries in a boundary blend feature. Trajectory In Figure 3, the two sketched curves were used as trajectories in the variable section sweep feature. As a reference for other geometry Sketched curves can be used in general for reference geometry for other features. They can be used as a reference for other curves, other datum features, or ultimately for surfaces or supporting geometry.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 2
PT
Sketched curves are powerful because they can be used in so many different ways. The following are common uses of sketched curves:
Using Sketched Curves
In
Figure 2 Sketched Curves Used as Boundaries
te rn
al
Figure 3 Sketched Curve Used as a Trajectory
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Sketched Curve Used as a Section
nl y
Sketching Ellipses
You can sketch elliptical sections using two methods.
Ellipse creation options: Center and Axis Axis Ends Dimension options: Length of Major/Minor Axes Radius of Major/Minor Axes Any custom scheme Either Ellipse type can be created or rotated to any angle.
Figure 2 Axis Ends Ellipse, Radius Dimensions
PT
In
Fo r
Sketching Ellipses
You can create two different types of ellipses:
Center and Axis Ellipse When using this type of ellipse, you select a center location for the major axis and one endpoint of the major axis. (The major axis is always created symmetric to the center location.) You then select a third location that defines the length of the minor axis. Axis Ends Ellipse When using this type of ellipse, you select a location for one endpoint of the major axis and the other endpoint of the major axis. You then select a third location that defines the length of the minor axis. Keep in mind the following when sketching ellipses:
te rn
Figure 3 Center and Axis Ellipse, Created on an Angle
al
U se
Figure 1 Center and Axis Ellipse, Length Dimensions
nl y
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
The center point can be dimensioned or snapped to Sketcher references. In the previous figures, the center point has been located using the horizontal and/or vertical references. Ellipses are created with construction lines for the major and minor axes. These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain the ellipse. You can dimension an ellipse by its major and minor axes, even if the ellipse is created on an angle. To create these dimensions, you can select the axes construction lines and dimension them directly. You can also dimension an ellipse using the major axis (Rx) and minor axis (Ry) radius dimensions. These radius values are measured along the axes from the ellipse to its center. The major axis is always the first axis placed, regardless of size compared to the minor axis. You can create an ellipse at any angle, based on the placement points for the major axis. You can also rotate the ellipse to any angle after creating it. You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Sketching Ellipses

Close Window Sketcher\Ellipse Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ELLIPSE.PRT
Sketch an Axis Ends Ellipse and dimension it using radius dimensions on the major and minor axes.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Sketch group. from the Datum
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.
7. Click the intersection of the references as the first endpoint of the major axis. Move the cursor to the right and click to define the second endpoint for the major axis. Move the cursor up and click to define the length of the minor axis.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Click Axis Ends Ellipse the Sketching group.
te rn
from the from
al
Module 3 | Page 5
U se
3. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch Plane. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
nl y
8. Middle-click to stop sketching. Notice the default dimensioning scheme. 9. Click Normal . Select the ellipse and then middle-click. Click Major Axis and click Accept. Type 120 as the value and press ENTER. Select the ellipse again and then middle-click. Click Minor Axis and click Accept. Type 75 as the value and press ENTER. Task 2:
1. Select Center and Axis Ellipse from the Ellipse types drop-down menu.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 6
PT
2. Click the center of the previous ellipse. Move the cursor up and to the right, then click to define the endpoint of the major axis. Without permitting the ellipse to snap to existing geometry, move the cursor and click to define the length of the minor axis.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Sketch a Center and Axis Ellipse and dimension it using length dimensions on the major and minor axes.
nl y
3. Middle-click to stop sketching. Notice the default dimensioning scheme. 4. Click Normal . Select the major axis and middle-click to place the dimension. Type 275 as the value and press ENTER. Select the minor axis and middle-click to place the dimension. Type 85 as the value and press ENTER. Select the major axis from each ellipse and then middle-click to place the angle. Type 75 as the value and press ENTER. 5. Middle-click and then select the dimensions and drag them as shown. 6. Click OK .
7. Press CTRL+D to orient to the standard orientation.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Sketching Elliptical Fillets

You can sketch elliptical fillets between sketched entities.
Sketching elliptical fillets: Select two sketched entities. Tangent at the endpoints. Dimension schemes are the same as ellipses. Fillets can be rotated.
Sketching Elliptical Fillets
Elliptical fillets are similar to sketched ellipses in the following ways: Elliptical fillets are created with construction lines for the major and minor axes. These construction lines can be used to dimension or constrain the ellipse. You can dimension an elliptical fillet by its major and minor axes, as shown in the right elliptical fillet. To create these dimensions, you can select the axes' construction lines and dimension them directly. You can also dimension an elliptical fillet using the major axis (Rx) and minor axis (Ry) dimensions, as shown in the upper-left elliptical fillet. These radius values are measured along the axes from the elliptical fillet to its center. The major axis is always the horizontal axis when the fillet is first sketched, regardless of size compared to the minor axis. You can also rotate the elliptical fillet after creating it, as shown in the right elliptical fillet. You can use Tangent, Coincident, and Equal Radii constraints. You cannot select parallel lines as the entities for creating elliptical fillets.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
Creating an elliptical fillet is very similar to creating a circular fillet; the size of the fillet is initially based on pick point locations. However, using elliptical fillets enables you to create an elliptical intersection between two entities, rather than a rounded intersection. The elliptical fillet is tangent at its endpoints to the adjacent geometry.
al
U se
Figure 1 Creating Elliptical Fillets
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Sketching Elliptical Fillets

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ELLIPTICAL_FILLET.PRT
Sketcher\Fillet_Elliptical Task 1:
Sketch and dimension three elliptical fillets using different dimensioning schemes.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 4. Select Elliptical from the Fillet types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Click the vertical and horizontal sketched entities at the locations shown to create the elliptical fillet. 6. Click Vertical from the Constrain group and select the vertical minor axis.
7. Click Normal . Select the fillet and then middle-click. Select Major Axis and click Accept. Type 0.47 as the value and press ENTER. Select the fillet again and then middle-click. Select Minor Axis and click Accept. Type 0.25 as the value and press ENTER.
Fo r
8. Click Elliptical
PT
9. Click the vertical and horizontal sketched entities at the locations shown to create the elliptical fillet.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
.
al
Module 3 | Page 9
U se
nl y
2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
10. Click Normal . Select the major axis and middle-click to place the dimension. Type 0.42 as the value and press ENTER. Select the minor axis and middle-click to place the dimension. Type 0.80 as the value and press ENTER. 11. Click Elliptical .
and select the 13. Click Vertical vertical minor axis.
Fo r
15. Further constrain and dimension the sketch as shown. 16. Click OK .
Module 3 | Page 10
PT
14. Click Normal . Select the right fillet endpoint and left vertical line. Middle-click to place the horizontal dimension and type 1 as the value. Select the left fillet endpoint and bottom horizontal line. Middle-click to place the vertical dimension and type 0.25 as the value.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
12. Click the vertical and horizontal sketched entities at the locations shown to create the elliptical fillet.
nl y
Sketching Splines
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or more points.
Minimum two points required. Can have any number of intermediate points. Dimensioning schemes include: Dimensioning and constraining spline points Tangency Angle Radius-of-Curvature
Figure 1 Dimensioning a Spline
Sketching Splines
Fo r
Dimensioning Splines
You can dimension the endpoints of a spline, and you can also dimension any of the intermediate points if desired. You do not have to dimension any points of a spline if both endpoints snap to Sketcher references. There are special dimensioning schemes for splines: Tangency Angle Dimensions You can create tangency angle dimensions for endpoints and intermediate points of a spline. Changing the angle value alters the shape of the spline. To create this dimension, select the spline, the spline endpoint, and a reference for tangency, then middle-click to place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement location dictates the quadrant for angle dimension measurement. In Figure 2, the spline endpoints are dimensioned with tangency angles. Radius-of-Curvature Dimensions After a Tangency Angle dimension is created for a spline endpoint, you can create a Radius of Curvature dimension for that endpoint. The Radius of Curvature dimension can be
PT
Splines are freeform curves that pass smoothly through two or more points. A spline can also have any number of intermediate points. Each time you click the mouse, you create an additional point through which the spline passes. Note that a spline passing through only two points initially forms a straight line.
In
Figure 2 Dimensioning Points Tangency Angle
te rn
al
Figure 3 Dimensioning Radii of Curvature
U se
nl y
used to control the radius of curvature at the endpoint of a spline; changing its value changes the shape of the spline near the endpoint. Controlling the Radius of Curvature dimension is useful in cases where a spline meets up with other geometry (an arc for example), and a curvature continuity is desired. To create this dimension, select the spline endpoint, then middle-click to place the dimension. The dimension appears similar to a radius dimension. In Figure 3, the spline endpoints are dimensioned for radius of curvature.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Sketching Splines

Close Window Sketcher\Splines Task 1: Sketch a spline. Erase Not Displayed SPLINE.PRT
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Sketch group. . from the Datum
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Click Spline from the Sketching group.
Fo r
8. Middle-click to stop creating points and complete the spline. 9. Click One-by-One and edit the two dimensions to 5 and 12, respectively. .
10. Click OK
2012 PTC
PT
7. Click four more times to create additional points through which the spline must pass. The first, third, and fifth points should all be on the horizontal reference.
In
6. Click the vertical and horizontal reference intersection as the spline starting point.
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 13
U se
3. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Plane. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
nl y
Task 2:
Edit the spline definition and dimension an intermediate point.
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. 2. Click Normal and dimension the lowest intermediate point to the horizontal reference. Type 2.65 as the value and press ENTER. 3. Click One-by-One and edit the weak, horizontal dimension to 9.30. 4. Click OK Task 3: .
Edit the spline definition and dimension tangency angles and radii of curvature.
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. . 2. Click Normal Click the spline, the left endpoint, and the horizontal reference, and middle-click to place the tangency angle dimension. Type 65 and press ENTER. Click the spline, right endpoint, and horizontal reference, then middle-click to place the dimension. Type 90 and press ENTER. When placing a tangency angle dimension on a spline, you must select the spline body, a spline control point, and a reference entity to create the dimension. However, it does not matter in which order you make the dimension reference selections.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
3. Click the left endpoint, then middle-click to place the radius of curvature dimension. Type 7.5 and press ENTER. Click the right endpoint, then middle-click to place the dimension. Type 4.5 and press ENTER. 4. Click OK .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Modifying Splines Basic Operations

There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a spline in Sketcher.
Moving points. Spline Edit mode: Move individual points Move a range of points Specify X-Y coordinate location Add points Delete points Extend spline
Figure 2 Adding a Point
Modifying Splines Basic Operations
You can also perform further basic operations within Spline Edit mode. To access Spline Edit mode, you have two options: you can either double-click the spline in the graphics window, or you can select it, then right-click and select Modify. Upon accessing Spline Edit mode, the dashboard appears. You must be in Spline Edit mode to perform the following basic spline operations: Moving Points You can move points using the following methods: You can select individual points and drag them to new locations to change the shape of the spline. You can also select multiple points to move simultaneously. To do this, you select a range of points to move by pressing SHIFT and selecting two points to limit the range. For example, to move points 2, 3, and 4 in a spline that has 5 points you press SHIFT, select points 1 and 5, then drag points 2-3-4 together. Note that the range of points cannot contain constrained points. You can move points to precise locations by selecting a point and then using the Point tab in the dashboard. In the Point tab, you can specify
Fo r
PT
There are a number of basic operations you can perform on a spline in Sketcher. You can select individual points that comprise the spline and drag them to new locations to change the shape of the spline, as shown in Figure 1.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Deleting a Point
U se
Figure 1 Moving a Point
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 17
U se
nl y
a reference as the sketch origin or a selected sketched coordinate system. Once the coordinate value's reference is selected, you can specify precise X-Y location values. If the spline is placed in an internal sketch for a sweep feature, and the spline is dimensioned to a Local coordinate system, then you can edit the X, Y, and Z-coordinates to create a 3-D spline. Adding and Deleting Points You can add intermediate points to a spline by right-clicking the spline and selecting Add Point, as shown in Figure 2. You must right-click over the spline for this menu to appear. You can delete intermediate points from a spline by right-clicking the point you wish to delete and selecting Delete Point, as shown in Figure 3. You must right-click the top of the point for this menu option to appear. Extending the spline You can also extend a spline by pressing CTRL+ALT and clicking beyond a spline endpoint. This can only be done on an endpoint without tangency or constraints defined.
PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines Basic Operations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MOD_SPLINE_BASIC.PRT
Sketcher\Splines_Modify Task 1: Move the points of a spline.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Sketch 3. Sketcher Display types: 4. Notice that the spline contains five points. 5. Click the point second from the left and drag it upward. 6. Click the point third from the left and drag it to the left. 7. Click the point fourth from the left and drag it downwards and to the left. Task 2: .
2. Right-click the spline below the horizontal reference and select Add Point.
Fo r
3. Add two more points to the spline below the horizontal reference. 4. Select the point fourth from the left. 5. Press SHIFT and select the point seventh from the left. 6. Select the point fifth from the left and drag it downward. Notice that points five and six move together as a range.
Module 3 | Page 18
PT
1. Double-click the spline to access Edit mode.
In
Access Spline Edit mode, add three points, and move points as a range.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
3. Enable only the following
Task 3:
Edit the X-Y coordinate values of a point to specific values and delete a point.
1. In the Spline ribbon, select the Point tab. 2. Select the point above the horizontal reference. Notice that the Point tab displays the X and Y coordinate values of this point. Edit the X and Y coordinate values to 4 and 3, respectively.
3. Select the point sixth from the left, then right-click and select Delete Point.
Fo r
4. In the dashboard, click Complete Spline . .
5. Click OK
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 19
U se
nl y
Modifying Splines Advanced Operations

There are a number of advanced operations you can perform on a spline in Sketcher.
Edit Spline mode enables you to perform advanced operations: Fit Type Sparse Smooth Spline Curvature Scale Density Interpolation versus Control Points Control Polygon mode
PT
In
Figure 2 Viewing Curvature Analysis
Fo r
Modifying Splines Advanced Operations

There are a number of advanced operations you can perform on a spline in Sketcher. These operations are performed within Spline Edit mode. To access Spline Edit mode, you can either double-click the spline in the graphics window, or select it, then right-click and select Modify.
Using Fit Type

Fit type enables you to remove redundant data in the spline. You can use either of the following methods: Sparse Using the Sparse option, you can evenly decrease the number of points on a spline. To use this option, you specify a sparsity deviation value. Smooth Using the Smooth option, you can alter the shape of the spline to make it flow more smoothly. To use this option, you specify a quantity of spline points the system can use for averaging. In Figure 1, the Smooth option was used to smooth the spline.
te rn
Figure 3 Interpolation versus Control Points
al
U se
Figure 1 Using the Smooth Fit Type
nl y
Displaying Spline Curvature

You can click Curvature Analysis in the Spline ribbon to display the spline curvature. The spline curvature is a porcupine-style spline curvature plot. The length of the spikes are proportional to the amount of curvature at that location along the spline. The curvature plot can be displayed while dynamically dragging spline points, and you can adjust the scale and density of the curvature plot as desired. Scale increases or decreases the length of all spikes, and density increases or decreases the quantity of spikes in the plot. The spline curvature is displayed in Figure 2.
Interpolation Points Versus Control Points

By default, the system uses interpolation points to control the shape of the spline. If desired, however, you can switch to viewing control points instead in the Spline ribbon, as shown in the top by clicking Control Points image of Figure 3. When you have toggled to control points, you can then drag the spline points by the control points, as shown in the bottom image of Figure 3. You can add or delete control points to control the shape of the spline. You cannot, however, dimension to the control points unless you switch to Control Polygon mode.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
click Control Polygon in the Spline ribbon. You can also move the interpolation points by dragging the control points. Plus, you can add or delete control points to control the shape of the spline.
te rn
You can switch to Control Polygon mode to dimension to the control points instead of the interpolation points. To access Control Polygon mode,
al
Control Polygon Mode
U se
nl y
Module 3 | Page 21
PROCEDURE - Modifying Splines Advanced Operations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MOD_SPLINE_ADV.PRT
Sketcher\Splines_Modify-Advanced Task 1:
Display the spline's curvature and adjust the fit type.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 4. Double-click the spline to access Edit mode. 5. Click Curvature Analysis in the dashboard. Drag the Scale slider to the right to increase the scale. Drag the Density slider to the right to increase the density. Drag one point upward to simulate a non-ideal spline. Notice that the curvature becomes erratic.
6. In the dashboard, select the Fit tab. Select the Smooth Fit type. Edit the number of Odd Points to 5. Edit the number of Odd Points to 3. Click Yes, if necessary. 7. In the Fit tab, select the Sparse Fit type. Edit the Deviation to 0.01. Close the Fit tab.
Fo r
PT
In
8. Click Curvature Analysis
Module 3 | Page 22
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Edit the spline control point locations.
1. In the dashboard, toggle the spline modification to Control . Points Drag the point second from the right upward to the height of the point third from the right. 2. Enable Display Dimensions from the In Graphics toolbar. Notice the single dimension. to 3. Click Control Polygon access Control Polygon mode. 4. Drag the control points to approximate a dome shape. 5. In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab. 6. In the Sketch tab, click Normal as if to create a dimension. 7. Notice that the polygon control points are dimensioned rather than the spline. 8. Click OK
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 23
U se
nl y
Importing and Exporting Spline Points

You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each point along a spline.
Requirements: Sketched Coordinate System Specify Coordinate System Type Cartesian Polar Coordinate File options: Open a .pts text file. Save current coordinate data to a file. Display current coordinate data.
Importing and Exporting Spline Points
Fo r
You can display, export, or import the coordinate values for each point along a spline. You must first select a sketched Coordinate System. You can then specify the type of Coordinate System selected, whether Cartesian (X, Y, Z) or Polar (R, Theta, Z). Once the coordinate system is selected, you have three options available: Open a text file (with a *.pts extension) of coordinate data by selecting from the File tab. Open Coordinates Save the current coordinate data to a file by selecting Save Coordinates from the File tab.
Display the current coordinate data by selecting Coordinate Info the File tab.
PT
Figure 1 Viewing Spline Point Coordinates
In
te rn
Figure 2 Importing Point Coordinate File
al
from
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Importing and Exporting Spline Points

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SPLINE_PTS.PRT
Sketcher\Spline_Points Task 1:
Create a spline and import a file of point coordinates.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. Sketcher Display types: .
5. The third spline point should lie on the horizontal line. 6. Click Coordinate System from the Datum group in the Sketch ribbon.
7. Click the left line endpoint to place the coordinate system.
8. Middle-click to stop sketching coordinate systems.
Fo r
10. In the dashboard, select the File tab. Select the coordinate system. Click Coordinate Info to view the current spline point locations. You could save this information to a text file. Click Close.
2012 PTC
PT
9. Double-click the spline to access Edit mode.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 25
U se
4. Click Spline and sketch a spline with 5 points. The spline endpoints should snap to the line endpoints.
nl y
3. Enable only the following
11. In the File tab of the dashboard, click Open Coordinates . 12. In the Modify Spline dialog box, click Yes to delete the strong dimensions. 13. In the Open dialog box, click SPLINE_DATA.PTS and click Open.
16. In the dashboard, click Complete Spline . 17. Click OK .
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
15. In the dashboard, click Coordinate Info to view the current spline point locations. Click Close.
nl y
14. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.
Sketching Conics
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic using conic arcs.
The type of conic created depends upon the value of RHO. Dimensioning Conic Sections Conic endpoints Using RHO parameter RHO = A/(A+B), where C=D Using three points Tangency angle dimensions
Figure 2 Creating a Conic using RHO
In
te rn
Figure 3 Creating a Conic using Three Points
Fo r
You can create sketched shapes that are elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic using Conic arcs. To create a conic arc, select the endpoint locations and then select an apex or shoulder location. A centerline is automatically created connecting the endpoints of the conic.
Dimensioning Conic Endpoints

You can dimension the ends of the conic using dimensions or constraints. You then further dimension conic sections by using the RHO parameter, by using three points, or through tangency angle dimensions.
Using the RHO Parameter

You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic, as shown in Figure 2. This is a dimension that appears on the conic similar to a radius dimension. As shown in Figure 1, the RHO value is the ratio of length A to A+B (that is, A/(A+B)), where C=D. RHO can vary from 0.05 to 0.95. Higher RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values create a more flat conic shape. The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
PT
Sketching Conics
al
U se
Figure 1 Understanding the RHO Parameter
nl y
0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical 0.5 = Parabolic > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic 2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse
Using Three Points

Instead of using a RHO parameter, you can locate a Sketcher point at the apex of the conic to control the conic shape. The Sketcher point can then be dimensioned or constrained accordingly. In Figure 3, the conic is created using three points. Notice that a RHO parameter is not present.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
You can create tangency angle dimensions for endpoints of a conic. Changing the angle value alters the shape of the conic. To create this dimension, select the conic, the conic endpoint, a reference for tangency, and middle-click to place the dimension in the desired location. Note that the placement location dictates the quadrant for angle dimension measurement. In Figures 2 and 3, the endpoints have tangency angle dimensions defined.
nl y
Using Tangency Angle Dimensions
PROCEDURE - Sketching Conics

Close Window Sketcher\Conic Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CONIC.PRT
Sketch a conic and dimension it with a RHO parameter.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Sketch from the Datum group.
3. Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Plane. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box. 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 5. Select Conic from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Click the origin of the vertical and horizontal references as the left endpoint. Click the horizontal reference to the right of the vertical reference as the right endpoint. Move the cursor upward and click to complete the conic. 6. Click Normal . Click the conic, the left endpoint, and the horizontal reference, and middle-click to place the tangency angle dimension. Type 70 and press ENTER. Click the conic, right endpoint, and horizontal reference, then middle-click to place the dimension. Type 50 and press ENTER.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 29
U se
nl y
.
7. Click One-by-One and edit the width dimension to 10. If the RHO dimension is already 0.5, select it, right-click, and select Strong, and press ENTER. 8. Click OK from the Sketch tab. 9. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Hide.
Fo r
5. Click Normal and create the two tangency angles, editing the left and right values to 70 and 50, respectively. 6. Notice that the point is constrained to the conic and is linearly dimensioned. 7. Notice that there is no RHO dimension.
Module 3 | Page 30
PT
4. Click the conic near the apex to create the point.
3. Click Point from the Sketching group.
In
te rn
2. Click Conic . Click the origin of the vertical and horizontal references as the left endpoint. Click the horizontal reference to the right of the vertical reference as the right endpoint. Move the cursor upward and click to complete the conic.
al
2012 PTC
U se
1. Click Sketch . Click Use Previous in the Sketch dialog box.
nl y
Task 2:
Sketch a conic and dimension it using three points.
8. Click One-by-One and edit the remaining dimensions as shown, starting with the width dimension. 9. Click OK .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 31
U se
nl y
Sketching Text
You can add text as a sketched entity.
Creating Text Specify manually Using existing parameters Placing Text Define start and end point Modifying Text Fonts Horizontal and Vertical Position Aspect ratio Slant angle Place along curve Kerning Open-Type Fonts Multi-Language Support Expanded Character Set Advanced Control
Figure 1 Sketching Text
PT
In
Fo r
Creating Sketched Text

You can add text in a sketch when creating extruded protrusions and cuts, trimming surfaces, and creating cosmetic features. The sketched text can be used by almost any solid or surface feature, as long as the rules for open and closed sketches are followed. You can either manually type the value for the text, or use existing parameters in the design model. The system displays the value of the parameters as the text value. You can also include text symbols, such as degree (), plus or minus (), and omega ().
Placing Sketched Text

To add text, you must define a start point and an end point. The system creates a construction line between the start point and end point. The length of this line determines the height of the text, while the angle of the line determines the text orientation.
te rn
Figure 3 Placing Text Along a Curve
al
Figure 2 Modifying Text Attributes
U se
nl y
To help you visualize the direction and the orientation of the text, a small triangle symbol is presented at the text start position point. You can select the start point of the construction line at the beginning of the text flow, and drag it to increase or decrease the height of the text. You can also select the end point of the construction line and drag it to change the text orientation. The construction line length is determined by a dimension, which you can modify to change the overall text height.
Modifying Sketched Text

You can perform the following types of modifications to sketched text entities: Fonts To modify the font of sketched text entities, select from a list of standard fonts, such as cal_alf, cal_grek, filled, font, font3d, isofont, leroy, norm_font. Creo Parametric enables you to read and place Open-Type Font (OTF) characters into Sketcher. Horizontal and Vertical Position You can modify the justification values for the horizontal and vertical positions of the text, which updates the text justification around the text start position point. You can constrain the vertical position of the text to Top, Middle, or Bottom. You can constrain the horizontal position of the text to Left, Center, or Right. The default dimensioning scheme for the text is consistent, regardless of its orientation. The resulting text boundary box is tight against the text, providing additional control on its exact position in Sketcher. Aspect ratio Using this option, you can modify the aspect ratio factor of the text without changing its height or orientation. Slant angle You can modify the slant angle of the text using this option. The Slant angle option affects how the text is angled, with respect to the sides of the rectangle in which it is contained. Place along curve Using this option you can place text along a curve. First, select the arc or circle on which you wish to place the text. Then, select the direction in which you want the text to flow. You can always flip the direction of the text flow. You can also control the justification of text along a curve by using the horizontal and vertical position options. If you change the horizontal position, the text moves along the curve, either to the right or left side of the defined curve. Kerning Enables font kerning for the text string. This controls the space between certain pairs of characters, improving the appearance of the text string. For example, in some font types an i and an m are allotted the same amount of space. Kerning provides proportionate spacing for narrow and wide letters. Kerning is a characteristic of the particular font. Alternatively, set the sketcher_default_font_kerning configuration option to automatically enable kerning for all the new text strings that you create.
Fo r
Open-Type Fonts
OTF is becoming a global font standard, with added capabilities for advanced typography. The font is based on Unicode, which enables the framework for multi-language support. Open-Type Fonts offer an expanded character set and layout features to provide better linguistic support and advanced
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
typographic control. This enables you to read and place these custom fonts, including symbols and logos that have been mapped, to specific functional keys. In addition, you can select a custom font and place it, while still maintaining proportions and ratios.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Sketching Text

Close Window Sketcher\Text Task 1: Erase Not Displayed TEXT.PRT
Sketch text on a part model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of feature TEXT_SKETCH. 3. Click No Hidden .
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 5. Click Text group. from the Sketching from the
6. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.
9. In the Text dialog box, type 123 as the text. Notice that it moves to the right. Edit the Horizontal Position to Center. Edit the Vertical Position to Middle. Click Text Symbol and click the (degree) symbol. Click Close in the Text Symbol dialog box.
Fo r
10. In the Text dialog box, edit the Aspect ratio to 1.5. Edit the Slant angle to 15.
2012 PTC
PT
In
8. Move the Text dialog box to the right.
te rn
7. Click at the center of the model and drag a line upwards to approximately 75% of the total model height. Click again to create the overall text height.
al
Module 3 | Page 35
U se
nl y
.
11. In the Text dialog box, select the Place along curve check box. Select the arc. Edit the Vertical Position to Bottom.
14. Click OK in the Text dialog box. 15. Click One-by-One .
17. Click OK
19. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select
Fo r
Parameters
20. In the Parameters dialog box, edit the VENDOR parameter Value to PTC. Click OK. 21. Click Regenerate .
Module 3 | Page 36
PT
18. Click Shading
In
te rn
16. Select the arc, then right-click and select Construction.
al
2012 PTC
U se
13. In the Select Parameter dialog box, select parameter VENDOR. Click Insert Selected. Notice that the numbers are replaced by the parameter value text.
nl y
12. In the Text dialog box, select Use parameter.
Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

Existing geometry and/or dimensions can be converted into different formats in Sketcher without having to be re-created.
The following conversions can be performed: Strong Spline Reference Perimeter Tapered Arc Length/Arc Angle Radius/Diameter/Linear
Existing geometry or dimensions can be converted into different formats in Sketcher without having to be re-created. Conversions are handled by selecting the item to be converted, then clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Convert To, followed by the desired conversion type. In many cases, you can also select the item, then right-click and select the desired conversion type. The following types of conversions can be performed:
Fo r
Strong Enables you to convert a weak (light blue) dimension to strong. You can also select the weak dimension, then right-click and select Strong. Spline Enables you to select a chain of lines and arcs, and convert them to a spline that closely approximates the selected chain. After conversion, you can delete the old entities to view or manipulate the spline. Reference Enables you to select an existing dimension and convert it to a reference dimension. You can convert any dimension type including linear, angular, and radial dimensions. You can also select the dimension, right-click, and select Reference. Reference dimensions track with geometry, but you cannot edit their value. Reference dimensions do not factor into a sketch's regeneration, so they cannot cause
PT
Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options
Figure 2 Converting to a Perimeter Dimension
In
te rn
Figure 3 Converting an Offset Line to a Tapered Line
al
U se
Figure 1 Converting to a Reference Dimension
nl y
over-dimensioning. Also, you can display reference dimensions on a 2-D drawing. You can always convert a reference dimension back to a strong dimension. Perimeter Enables you to convert existing dimensions into a perimeter dimension. To create a perimeter dimension, you select all dimensions to be converted and the geometry that is to be included in the perimeter measurement. You must then specify the dimension to be varied. This dimension is driven by the perimeter dimension. That is, as the perimeter value is updated, the sketch geometry updates by varying the dimension specified. You can also click Perimeter from the Dimension group in the Sketch tab. Tapered Enables you to select a single offset edge and taper it. The system achieves this by creating a second dimension for the offset edge. You can then edit either dimension to create the taper. Note that you can only taper single offset edges and not loops. Arc Length/Arc Angle Enables you to convert an arc angle dimension to an arc length dimension, or an arc length dimension to an arc angle dimension. Radius/Diameter/Linear Enables you to convert a radius, diameter, or linear dimension to either of the other dimension types.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Convert Options

Close Window Sketcher\Convert Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CONVERT.PRT
Convert a radius to a diameter and an arc angle to an arc length.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1.
. 4. Select the 5 radius dimension, then right-click and select Convert to Diameter. 5. Select the 100 dimension, then right-click and select Convert to Length. 6. Click OK Task 2: .
Convert a normal dimension to a reference dimension.
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click No Hidden
Fo r
4. Notice the angle dimension is created because the reference dimension is no longer factored into the sketch's regeneration.
5. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and select the two angled lines. Notice the angle dimension is removed and the reference dimension value has adjusted to match the new geometry. Middle-click to stop constraining entities.
2012 PTC
PT
3. Select the 8.38 dimension, then right-click and select Reference.
In
te rn
.
al
Module 3 | Page 39
U se
nl y
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:
Task 3:
Convert an existing dimension to a perimeter dimension.
1. Press CTRL, select the five lines in the sketch, and click Perimeter from the Dimension group. 2. Read the message area prompt and select the 6.00 dimension as the dimension to vary. 3. Edit the perimeter value to 40.
Task 4:
Convert a vertical line to a tapered line. .
Fo r
4. Click One-by-One
PT
5. Select the vertical offset line. 6. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Convert To > Tapered. 7. Notice the extra dimension that is created.
Module 3 | Page 40
and sketch 3. Click Line Chain two horizontal lines.
In
2. Select the right, vertical edge of the protrusion. Type 4 as the offset and press ENTER. Click Close.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
1. Click Offset
U se
nl y
4. Notice the variable dimension adjusts to compensate for the new perimeter.
8. Edit the top 4 dimension to 2. 9. Click OK . . 10. Click Shading
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 41
U se
nl y
Locking Sketcher Entities

You lock Sketcher dimensions and/or geometry to prevent accidental modifications.
Locking Geometry Cyan lock icon Geometry cannot be dragged Will update to other edits Locking Dimensions Red color Dimension cannot be dragged Value can be edited
Figure 2 Geometry Lines Locked
In
Locking Sketcher Entities
Fo r
In a sketch, you can lock either geometry or dimensions to help preserve your design intent. By locking an entity, you prevent accidental modifications from dragging to an undesired value. However, you can still make changes to locked geometry or dimensions by editing the dimension value. Keep in mind the following when locking Sketcher entities: For geometry, a cyan lock symbol is shown when you highlight an entity or Show entity locks. For dimensions, the whole dimension displays in red. The locked status of an entity is preserved when you complete and redefine a sketch. The locked status of an entity is preserved when using dynamic edit to drag a section from Part mode.
Locking Sketcher Geometry

To lock sketcher geometry, select the geometry item (for example, a line or arc) you want to lock and then either right-click and select Lock, or select
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Dimensions Locked
al
U se
Figure 1 No Entities Locked
nl y
Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock the selected geometry, select Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon, or right-click and select Unlock. You can toggle the display of the lock icons by right-clicking, with nothing selected in the sketch, and selecting Show entity locks or Hide entity locks from the right-click pop-up menu.
Locking Sketcher Dimensions

To lock dimensions, select the dimension or dimensions you want to lock and then either right-click and select Lock, or select Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon. To unlock the selected dimension, click Toggle Lock from the Operations drop-down menu in the ribbon, or right-click and select Unlock. In addition, the Autolock option enables you to automatically lock user-defined dimensions. You can specify whether you want to automatically lock the dimension that you create or modify by setting the value of the sketcher_dimension_autolock configuration option to yes. Alternatively, you can click File > Options, select the Sketcher category in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, and select the Lock user defined dimension check box. After you specify that the user-defined dimensions are to be locked, all dimensions that you subsequently create or modify automatically appear locked. The locked state of the user-defined dimension is maintained when you quit or reenter Sketcher mode. The state of the dimensions that are created before you specify to automatically lock the dimensions, do not change.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
The locked state of a dimension is not retained if the dimension is referenced in a relation; the relation takes priority over the locked status of the dimension.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 3 | Page 43
Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types of dimensions within Sketcher and perform operations on dimensions.
Dimension options include: Creating Reference Dimensions Driven dimension Track with geometry Not editable REF suffix Creating Baseline Dimensions Creates ordinate dimension scheme
Figure 1 Creating a Reference Dimension
PT
In
Fo r
Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

In addition to normal dimensions, you can create other types of dimensions within Sketcher. You can also perform various operations on dimensions within Sketcher.
Creating Reference Dimensions

A Reference dimension is a driven dimension that is created within Sketcher. Reference dimensions track with geometry, but you cannot edit their value. Reference dimensions are denoted within Sketcher with the suffix REF. You can create a Reference dimension for linear, angular, and radial dimensions. Reference dimensions do not factor into a sketch's regeneration, so they cannot cause over-dimensioning. Also, you can display Reference dimensions on a 2-D drawing. A Reference dimension has been created in Figure 1. You can click the Reference
Module 3 | Page 44
te rn
Figure 2 Creating a Baseline Dimension and Ordinate Dimensions icon from the Dimension group.
2012 PTC
al
U se
nl y
Creating Ordinate Dimensions using a Baseline Dimension

A baseline dimension creates an ordinate dimension scheme. When you place the baseline dimension, switch to normal dimensioning, and dimension the baseline to a reference; the resulting dimension is ordinate. In Figure 2, the baseline dimension is the 0.00 dimension, and the 5.00 and 15.00 dimensions were dimensioned to the baseline dimension, which resulted in from the Dimension group to an ordinate scheme. You click Baseline create the ordinate scheme.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 45
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sketcher Dimension Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIMENSIONS.PRT
Sketcher\Dimensions_Options Task 1:
Create a reference dimension and resolve a Sketcher conflict.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. 3. Click No Hidden . 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Click Reference Dimension group. from the
7. Click Normal and dimension the adjacent angled line.
Task 2:
Fo r
1. Click One-by-One
PT
Lock dimensions to restrict the sketch. .
2. Click the lower-right corner of the sketch and drag it in a circular motion. 3. Notice that the whole sketch moves. 4. Click Undo .
5. Press CTRL and select the 4.00 and 5.00 dimensions. Right-click and select Lock. Notice the red color.
Module 3 | Page 46
9. In the Resolve Sketch dialog box, click Dim > Ref to resolve the conflict.
In
8. Notice the over-dimensioned condition.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
6. Select the upper-right angled line and middle-click to place the dimension.
U se
nl y
6. Click the lower-right corner of the sketch and drag it in a circular motion. 7. Notice the sketch motion is restricted. 8. Click Undo .
9. Select the bottom sketched entity, then right-click and select Lock. 10. Cursor over the entity and notice the lock. 11. Click the lower-right corner of the sketch and drag it. 12. Notice the sketch motion is fully restricted. Task 3: Create ordinate dimensions.
3. Right-click and select Dimension. Select the 0.00 baseline dimension. Select the first peak and middle-click above it to place the dimension. Select the perpendicular (orthogonal) constraint below the first peak. Click Delete in the Resolve Sketch dialog box and press ENTER.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
2. Select the left vertical sketch line and middle-click above it to place the baseline dimension.
al
Module 3 | Page 47
1. Click Baseline from the Dimension group.
U se
nl y
4. In the graphics window, select the 0.00 baseline dimension. Select the second peak and middle-click above it to place the dimension. Select the perpendicular (orthogonal) constraint below the second peak. Click Delete and press ENTER. 5. Click OK . . 6. Click Shading
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 48
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Sketcher diagnostic tools enable you to analyze common sketching problems.
Sketcher Diagnostic Capabilities Shade closed loops. Highlight overlapping geometry. Highlight open ends. Feature requirements check.
Figure 1 Shade Closed Lopes
Figure 3 Highlight Open Ends
PT
Fo r
Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Four diagnostic tools have been added to Sketcher to help find, analyze, and solve common sketching problems. The following icon tools are available in the Inspect group in the Sketch ribbon tab: Shade Closed Loops The area inside entities that form a closed loop is shaded. The default shading color is a pale yellow. Overlapping Geometry Sketched geometry that is overlapping is highlighted in red. This includes sketched geometry that crosses other geometry, or lies directly on other geometry. The icon for this option does not remain depressed, meaning the highlighting appears until the sketch view is changed or repainted, and then you can click the icon again.
In
te rn
Figure 2 Highlight Overlapping Geometry
Figure 4 Feature Requirements Check
al
U se
nl y
Highlight Open Ends The endpoints of entities that are not common to more than one entity are highlighted. For example, any open ends of the sketch are highlighted. The highlight appears as a large red square on the open endpoints in question. The icon for this option stays depressed, enabling you to sketch and manipulate the sketch to view the open ends highlighting appear and disappear. Feature Requirements Provides a report indicating whether the sketch meets the requirements for the feature being created. This option is available in 3-D (Part mode) Sketcher only. Although this option works for an external or internal sketch, to get the full benefit from the tool you should be in an internal sketch. This ensures that the tool can compare the sketch geometry with the specific requirements for that feature. For example, the following features each have different sketch requirements: Solid Extrude Must form a closed loop by itself or against adjacent geometry. Solid Revolve Sketched geometry must be on one side of the centerline. Rib Must have an open sketch.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 50
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Sketcher Diagnostic Tools

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIAGNOSTICS.PRT
Sketcher\Diagnostics Task 1:
Utilize the diagnostic tools on a sketch with issues.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Extrude from the Shapes group. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. Select the front model surface. Click Sketch. Click No Hidden Click Sketch View . .
Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 3. Click Palette . Double-click the diagnostic sketch.
U se
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Place the sketch anywhere on the model. Click Close from the Sketcher palette. Edit the Scale to 1.0 and press ENTER. Drag the sketch to snap to the centerlines. Click Accept Changes .
If you do not see the diagnostic sketch, make sure to set the Working Directory to Sketcher\ Diagnostics folder.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 51
O
.
nl y
4. Click OK . Notice the two warnings in the message window. Click No. 5. Click Feature Requirements from the Inspect group. Notice the various warnings. Click Close. is enabled in the Inspect group so closed sections should be shaded. Notice that the sketch is not shaded, indicating that the section is open. 7. Click Overlapping Geometry . Zoom in on the red highlighted lines. 8. Click Corner lines. Click Refit and trim the
Fo r
9. Verify that Highlight Open Ends is enabled in the Inspect group. Zoom in on the two red squares. and trim the
10. Click Corner lines.
. Click Refit Notice that the closed sketch is now shaded.
Module 3 | Page 52
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. By default Shade Closed Loops
11. Click Feature Requirements . Notice that the sketch has no warnings and the section is now shaded, indicating a closed section. Click Close. Click OK .
13. Click Shading
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
14. Right-click and select Remove Material. Right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. Select the rectangular surface of Extrude 2.
al
Module 3 | Page 53
U se
12. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
nl y
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 54
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
4
U se O te rn al
Module 4 | Page 1
Advanced Hole Creation

Module Overview
Holes are found in most manufactured products, and come in a variety of shapes and sizes. Holes can be drilled, contain counterbores, contain countersinks, contain threads, or be created from an industry standard set of sizes. In this module, you learn more advanced methods of hole creation, including using standard holes, sketched holes, and on point holes.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create standard holes. Display holes in a lightweight manner. Create sketched holes. Create on point holes. Create cosmetic threads.
In
nl y
Creating Standard Holes

Standard holes use hole and thread sizes from ISO, UNC, or UNF engineering standards.
Standard hole options include: Thread series: ISO UNC UNF Represented by a surface Tapping: Tapered hole No tapping: Drilled hole Clearance hole
Figure 1 Standard Hole Options
The following standard hole options are available: Tapping You can specify thread sizes from ISO, UNC, or UNF standards. You can also make a tapped hole tapered. In Creo Parametric, you can specify whether threads are displayed in the interface. Threads are represented by a surface, as shown on the left two holes in the figure. No Tapping If you do not tap the hole, you must specify whether the hole is a clearance hole or a drilled hole. If the hole is a clearance hole, specify whether the fit is Close, Medium, or Free. If the hole is drilled, there are two different ways to dimension the depth: 1. Hole Shoulder Depth Enables you to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the end of the shoulder. 2. Hole Depth Enables you to specify the depth of the drilled hole to the tip of the hole. Add countersink Creates a countersink on the hole. You can edit the countersink angle and diameter, although standard values are provided based on the hole size. You can also create an exit countersink on a through all hole.
Fo r
PT
Standard holes are based on industry-standard fastener tables. Creo Parametric provides hole charts and tapped or clearance diameters for the selected fastener from ISO, UNC, or UNF standards. Any hole can be made into a standard hole, including linear, radial, diameter, and coaxial holes.
In
Creating Standard Holes
te rn
al
U se
Drilled hole depth options: Shoulder Depth Add countersink: Add Exit Countersink Add counterbore
nl y
Add counterbore Creates a counterbore on the hole. Again, you can edit the counterbore diameter and depth, although standard values are provided based on the hole size.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Standard Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed HOLE_STD.PRT
Hole\Standard_Hole Task 1:
Redefine four simple holes to make them standard holes.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of HOLE_1. Hole . 3. In the dashboard, click Standard
PT
4. Select the Shape tab in the dashboard. Select the Include thread surface check box, if necessary. Select Thru Thread. Select the Exit Countersink check box.
Fo r
6. Edit the definition of HOLE_4. 7. In the dashboard, click Standard Hole .
Click Tap Hole to de-select it. . Click Clearance Hole Edit the hole size to UNC 3/8-16 from the drop-down lists. Edit the depth to Through All . Click Counterbore
Module 4 | Page 4
In
te rn
. .
2012 PTC
Click Countersink
al
Click Tap Hole , if necessary. Edit the hole size to UNC 1/4-20 from the drop-down lists. Edit the depth to Through All .
U se
nl y
8. Select the Shape tab in the dashboard. Select Free Fit from the drop-down list. Clear the Exit Countersink check box, if necessary. 9. Click Complete Feature .
Click Tap Hole to enable it, if necessary. Edit the hole size to ISO M8x1. , if Click Shoulder Depth necessary. Edit the depth value to 20. 12. Select the Shape tab in the dashboard. Select the Include thread surface check box if necessary and edit the depth to 15.
PT
In
Fo r
Click Tap Hole to de-select it. Edit the hole size to ISO M12x1. Click Tip Depth , if necessary. Edit the depth value to 20. 16. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 4 | Page 5
U se
nl y
17. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Lightweight Hole Display

Only the hole outline appears with Lightweight Hole Display.
Icon in Dashboard Hole outline appears Icon in model tree Mass Properties affected Dialog box appears upon calculation
Figure 2 Lightweight Hole in Model Tree
In
te rn
Figure 3 Message Window
You can enable the Lightweight hole display option by clicking Lightweight
Fo r
Hole in the dashboard for a straight hole. Once enabled, the hole is represented by only its outline on the placement surface, speeding up regeneration and simplifying the display for models with high quantities of holes. Keep in mind the following when using this option: The model tree displays the Lightweight hole icon for holes with the Lightweight option enabled. Mass Properties are affected after changing a hole to Lightweight display. A dialog box appears to remind you if Lightweight holes are present when calculating mass properties. A model with Lightweight holes enabled generally has an increased mass over its mass with solid holes. The Lightweight hole option is only available for simple holes. You can change the display of an existing solid hole by selecting it, (either on the model or in the model tree) then right-clicking and selecting Convert to
PT
Lightweight Hole Display
al
Figure 1 Default and Lightweight Holes
U se
nl y
Lightweight. Conversely, the display of a Lightweight hole can be converted to that of a solid hole by selecting it, then right-clicking and selecting Convert to Solid.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Sketched Holes

For situations where a custom hole profile is required, you can create a sketched hole.
Holes can be linear, radial, or coaxial. Sketch the profile or open an existing one. Sketch requirements: The hole must be sketched vertically. The first vertical datum centerline is used to revolve the section. The section must be closed. The uppermost horizontal line must be aligned with the placement surface.
PT
Figure 2 Horizontally Placed Sketched Hole Figure 3 Placing a Sketched Hole
Fo r
Creating Sketched Holes

For situations where a custom hole profile is required, you can create a sketched hole. You can place a sketched hole using linear, radial, or coaxial placement. You can either sketch within the context of the hole feature or open an existing sketch file. If desired, your company can create a library of previously saved sketches to be used in the creation of sketched holes. When creating a sketched hole, the following are requirements for the sketch: The hole must be sketched vertically. However, the sketch can be placed in any orientation in the model. For example, in Figure 2, the sketched hole is placed horizontally. The first vertical datum centerline is used to revolve the section. The section must be closed. The system aligns the uppermost horizontal line in the sketch with the placement surface on the model. In Figure 3, the top edge of the sketch is aligned to the top surface of the model.
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Viewing the Sketch
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sketched Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed HOLE_SKETCHED.PRT
Hole\Sketched_Holes Task 1:
Create a sketched hole by sketching the hole profile.
3. Click the top surface to place the hole.
4. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 5. Press CTRL and select the left and back surfaces. Edit the offset from the left surface to 12.5. Edit the offset from the back surface to 6.75. 6. In the dashboard, click Use Sketch
Click Activate Sketcher
PT
In
from the Click Centerline Datum group and sketch a vertical centerline. Sketch and dimension the hole profile as shown. Click OK .
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 10
te rn
. .
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the ribbon, click Hole the Engineering group.
from
Task 2:
Create a sketched hole by importing the hole profile. .
1. Click the Hole
2. Click the front, rounded surface to place the hole. 3. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 4. Press CTRL and select datum planes FRONT and TOP. Edit the angle offset from datum plane FRONT to 60. Edit the axial offset from datum plane TOP to 4.60. 5. In the dashboard, click Use Sketch .
In
Fo r
7. Select the Operations group drop-down list, and click Resume > Resume Last Set. 8. Spin the model to view the sketched hole cross-sections.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
Click Open . In the Open Section dialog box, select HOLE_SECTION.SEC and click Open.
al
Module 4 | Page 11
U se
nl y
Creating On Point Holes

You can place a hole by selecting a datum point.
Datum point must lie on a surface. The hole is created perpendicular to the surface. Useful for placing holes on contoured surfaces.
Figure 1 Creating an On Point Hole
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 12
PT
In
You can place a hole by selecting a datum point. The datum point must be created on a surface. When you select the datum point, the system positions the hole perpendicular to the surface referenced by the datum point, and the hole is center aligned with the datum point. This method is useful for placing holes on contoured surfaces, when you want the hole axis to be normal to the surface location.
te rn
al
Creating On Point Holes
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating On Point Holes

Close Window Hole\On_Point Task 1: Erase Not Displayed HOLE_ON-PNT.PRT
Create a hole on a datum point.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . from the 2. Click Hole Engineering group. 3. ClickDatum dashboard. in the
from the Datum 4. Click Point group. Select the front, right, rounded corner surface. 5. Right-click and select Offset References.
7. Click OK in the Datum Point dialog box.
Fo r
8. In the dashboard, click Resume Feature .
9. Edit the hole diameter to 3.
10. Edit the hole depth to To Next . 11. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
6. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT and FRONT from the Model Tree. Edit the offset from datum plane RIGHT to 17. Edit the offset from datum plane FRONT to 18.
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 13
U se
nl y
12. Expand Hole 1 in the model tree. 13. Notice the embedded datum point. 14. Right-click Hole 1 and select Edit. 15. Notice that you can edit the datum point offset dimensions.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Cosmetic Threads

Cosmetic threads are used to create a lightweight representation of threads on a model, without actually modeling a helical feature.
Lightweight representation No geometry created Surface Feature Associated parameters Properties from standard holes Internal or external threads
Figure 1 External Cosmetic Thread
Figure 2 Internal Cosmetic Thread
In
Creating Cosmetic Threads
Fo r
Cosmetic threads are used to create a lightweight representation of threads on a model, without actually modeling a helical feature, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Cosmetic threads generate a surface feature with a set of parameters that define the thread, as shown in Figure 3. The parameters can be imported, exported, or used in a drawing. Cylindrical or Conical surfaces can be selected to create internal or external threads. Cosmetic threads use known information about standard holes to automatically assign cosmetic thread properties, wherever possible. You can define thread pitch and major/minor diameter if the reference surface does not belong to a standard threaded hole. The resulting Cosmetic thread definition is not parametrically linked to hole definition.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Cosmetic Thread Parameters
al
Module 4 | Page 15
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Cosmetic Threads

Close Window Cosmetic\Thread Task 1: Erase Not Displayed WRENCH.ASM
Create an external cosmetic thread.
3. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu and select Cosmetic Thread. 4. Select the surface on which to apply the cosmetic thread.
5. Select the Depth tab.
6. Select the surface from which to start the thread.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Select SETSCREW.PRT in the graphics window, then right-click and select Open.
7. Notice the thread depth defaults to surface length.
8. Select the Properties tab and notice the default properties.
9. Click Define Standard Thread from the dashboard. 10. Select ISO from the standard drop down-list, if necessary.
12. Notice the default properties have been updated.
Fo r
13. Click Complete Feature Click Close
PT
11. Select M2.3x.45 from the thread size drop-down list.
In
Task 2:
Create an internal cosmetic thread.
1. Select SIDE_PLATE_OFF.PRT, right-click, and select Open.
2012 PTC
te rn
. and return to the assembly.
al
Module 4 | Page 17
U se
nl y
2. Click the Engineering group drop-down menu and select Cosmetic Thread. 3. Select the surface on which to apply the cosmetic thread. Notice the cosmetic thread has automatically matched to the underlying M2.3 x .45 hole. 4. Select the thread start surface.
5. Right-click the depth drag handle and select To Selected. 6. Query select the back surface. 7. Click Complete Feature .
8. With the feature still selected, right-click and select Pattern.
10. Click Close
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
5
U se O te rn al
Module 5 | Page 1
Advanced Drafts and Ribs

Module Overview
With the draft feature, you can create tapered or angled surfaces from existing geometry. It is common to create drafted surfaces on molded or cast parts, however the draft feature can also be used to create this type of geometry for everyday modeling tasks. It is also common to add ribs on molded and cast parts for increased structural rigidity. In this module, you learn how to utilize several advanced draft options, such as drafting intent surfaces, drafting with multiple angles, and using different features for splits. You also learn how to create trajectory ribs.
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Draft intent surfaces. Create drafts with multiple angles. Create drafts using the extend intersect surfaces option. Create draft splits at sketch, at curve, and at surface. Create trajectory ribs.
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
Drafting Intent Surfaces

Intent surfaces work well for drafts when referencing all surfaces from a single feature.
Creates robust references to concepts. Use when referencing surfaces from one feature.
Drafting Intent Surfaces
When geometry from multiple features must be selected, you should use methods such as Loop surfaces and Surface and Boundary.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 2
PT
You can select intent references within the Draft tool. Using intent references creates robust references to concepts rather than explicit surface id's such as side surfaces or end surfaces. Intent surfaces work well for drafts when referencing all surfaces from a single feature. For example, in Figure 1, intent surfaces are used to draft all surfaces of the hex cut. When the sketch for the hex cut is modified, the draft feature automatically updates. Had the surfaces been selected individually, the draft feature would have failed.
In
te rn
al
Figure 1 Using Intent Surfaces to Draft a Part Model
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Drafting Intent Surfaces

Close Window Draft\Intent-Surfs Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_INTENT-SURFS.PRT
Draft a part model using intent surfaces.
2. Click Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu. 3. Right-click to query and select the intent surfaces of the inner hex cut feature.
Fo r
5. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Select datum plane TOP in the model tree.
6. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Select Split by draft hinge as the Split option. Select Draft sides dependently as the Side option. 7. Edit the draft angle to 10.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 3
4. Press CTRL, right-click to query, and select the outer cylindrical intent surfaces.
U se
nl y
8. In the dashboard, click Reverse Angle . 9. Click Complete Feature 10. Disable Plane Display . .
Click Center and Point and sketch a circle. Click One-by-One the diameter to 10. 12. Click OK . and edit
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 4
PT
In
13. Notice that the draft automatically updated without failing.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
. Drag a window around the hex sketch and press DELETE.
nl y
11. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:
Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles

You can create draft features that contain multiple angles.
Each angle has: Draft angle value Reference Location Ratio Draft Angle operations: Add/Delete angle Flip Angle Make Constant
Figure 1 Angles Tab in Dashboard
Fo r
You can create draft features that contain multiple angles. To create additional angles in the draft feature you use the Angles tab in the dashboard, as shown in Figure 1. In addition to its own draft angle value, you can also specify the following two items for each draft angle: Reference The selected entity on which the draft angle lies. You can either click this collector and select a new edge reference, or you can drag the dot in the graphics window onto a new reference. Any edge of the drafted surface can be used for the Reference. Location The length ratio value along the Reference edge. For example, if you want the draft angle to reside at the midpoint of the reference you would specify a Location value of 0.5, as shown in the figures. You can either type a different location value in the Angles tab, or you can drag the dot in the graphics window to a new location. You can right-click an angle in the Angles tab to perform the following operations: Add Angle Enables you to add additional draft angles. You can also right-click a draft angle dot to add additional angles.
PT
Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles
Figure 2 Adding Multiple Draft Angles
In
te rn
Figure 3 Flipping an Angle
al
U se
nl y
Delete Angle Enables you to delete the draft angle you right-clicked. You can also right-click a draft angle dot to delete that particular draft angle. Flip Angle Flips the direction of the draft at the selected angle location. You can also right-click the drag handle to flip the angle. In Figure 3, the 8 degree draft angle was flipped relative to the other angles. Make Constant Deletes all draft angles except the first one. The Reverse Pull Direction option in the dashboard flips the pull direction for all draft angles. To flip the draft direction for a specific draft angle, right-click its drag handle and select Flip Angle.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
The Adjust angles to keep tangency option forces the resultant draft surfaces to be tangent. This option is only available for a single draft angle, as drafts with multiple angles always keep surfaces tangent.
PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts with Multiple Angles

Close Window Draft\Mult-Angles Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_MULTIPLE-ANGLES.PRT
Create a draft with multiple draft angles on a part model.
Fo r
5. In the graphics window, click the angle dots and drag them to the outside and the center of the surface edge.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
4. In the dashboard, select the Angles tab. Right-click the existing angle and select Add Angle twice.
al
Module 5 | Page 7
U se
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Select the top surface.
nl y
2. Click Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu. Select the right face to draft.
6. From the back, edit the angles to 15, 10, and 8.
8. Notice that all three angles have flipped.
PT
9. In the Angles tab of the dashboard, right-click the 8 angle and select Flip Angle.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 8
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
7. In the dashboard, click Reverse Pull Direction .
nl y
Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option

The Extend intersect surfaces option becomes valuable when resulting draft geometry encounters an edge of the model.
Default behavior: Overhanging geometry created. Extend Intersect Surfaces cases: Draft extended to meet adjacent model surface. Model surface extends into the draft surface. Reverts to default behavior.
In
te rn
Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option
Fo r
The Extend intersect surfaces option becomes valuable when resulting draft geometry encounters an edge of the model. By default, the system automatically creates the draft geometry so that it overhangs the edge of the model, as shown in Figure 1. You can use the Extend intersect surfaces option to create different resultant geometry. When this option is selected, Creo Parametric tries to extend the draft to meet the adjacent surface of the model. If the draft cannot extend to the adjacent model surface, the model surface extends into the draft surface, as shown in Figure 2. If neither of these cases are possible, the system reverts to creating a draft surface that overhangs the edge of the model as if the option were not selected.
2012 PTC
PT
al
Figure 2 Extending Intersect Surfaces
Module 5 | Page 9
U se
Figure 1 Default Draft Behavior
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using the Extend Intersect Surfaces Draft Option

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXTEND-INTERSECT.PRT
Draft\Extend-Intersect Task 1:
Use the Extend intersect surfaces draft option in a part model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu. Select the right surface of the small rectangle. 3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Select the top surface of the small rectangle. 4. Drag the draft angle outward to 30 degrees. 5. Click Preview Feature .
6. Click Resume Feature
7. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Extend intersect surfaces check box. 8. Click Complete Feature . 9. Notice that the model surface has extended into the draft surface.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

You can use a sketch to define custom split lines.
Sketch becomes linked. Sketch can be unlinked. A new sketch can be defined. Sketch need not lie on draft surface.
Figure 1 Viewing Sketch
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split object, it becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You can also define a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface, Creo Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to the sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for the draft in Figure 2.
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 11
U se
Figure 2 Draft Split at Sketch
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Sketch

Close Window Draft\Split-Sketch Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_SPLIT-SKETCH.PRT
Create a draft split at a sketch.
1. Disable all Datum display types.
6. Drag the angle so the draft goes into the model.
PT
5. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Select Split by split object as the Split option. Select sketch SPLIT_ SKETCH. Select Draft second side only as the Side option.
Fo r
7. Click Preview Feature .
9. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Select Draft first side only as the Side option. .
10. Click Preview Feature
Module 5 | Page 12
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
4. Drag the angle so the upper draft portion goes into the model.
U se
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Select the top surface of the left rectangular step.
nl y
2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu. Select the large, front surface containing the sketch.
12. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Select Draft sides independently as the Side option. Edit both draft angles to 7 so the draft goes into the model. 13. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 13
U se
nl y
Creating Drafts Split at Curve

You can create a draft that splits at a waistline curve.
Material at the curve remains constant.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate pull direction reference.
al
You can create a draft that splits at a waistline curve. This causes the material at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was used as the draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create the resulting geometry in Figure 2.
U se
Creating Drafts Split at Curve
Figure 1 The Datum Curve
Figure 2 Draft Split at Datum Curve
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Curve

Close Window Draft\Split-Curve Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_SPLIT-CURVE.PRT
Create a draft split at a curve.
5. Edit the draft angle to 10. 6. In the dashboard, click Reverse Angle .
Fo r
PT
In
9. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Select Split by draft hinge as the Split option. Select Draft sides dependently as the Side option. 10. Click Reverse Angle .
2012 PTC
te rn
. .
al
Module 5 | Page 15
4. Right-click and select Pull Direction. Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
U se
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Select the curve.
nl y
2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down list. Select the front surface.
12. Notice that this draft has removed material from the top and bottom of the model.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Drafts Split at Surface

You can create a draft that splits at a waistline surface, causing material at the surface to be added.
Additional draft hinges can be created. You must first split the draft surfaces. Material remains the same size at both draft hinge locations.
Fo r
Creating Drafts Split at Surface

You can create a draft that splits at a waistline surface, causing material at the surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you to select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split the draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge locations. In Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once this split object was defined, a second draft hinge was able to be added, as shown in Figure 3.
2012 PTC
PT
Figure 2 Splitting the Draft at Surface
In
te rn
Figure 3 Selecting Multiple Draft Hinges
al
Module 5 | Page 17
U se
Figure 1 Draft Split at Surface
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Surface

Close Window Draft\Split-Surface Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_SPLIT-SURFACE.PRT
Create a draft split at a surface.
Fo r
6. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Select Split by split object as the Split option. Select the surface quilt.
7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10. 8. Click Reverse Angle lower draft angle. for the
Module 5 | Page 18
PT
5. Edit the draft angle to 10.
4. Right-click and select Pull Direction. Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.
In
te rn
3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Select an edge on the front of the top surface. Press SHIFT, cursor over an adjacent edge, right-click to query, and select the upper Tangent chain.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down list. Select the front surface.
9. In the dashboard, select the References tab. 10. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. Press CTRL and select an edge on the front of the bottom surface. Press SHIFT, cursor over an adjacent edge, right-click to query, and select the bottom Tangent Chain. The Draft hinges collector should contain two Tangent Chains. 11. Click Complete Feature .
12. In the model tree, right-click QUILT and select Hide. 13. Note that this draft has added material to the center of the model. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 19
U se
nl y
Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction

The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool sweeps a ruled surface normal to a specified draft hinge.
Differences from the conventional Draft tool: Create draft sets. Specify a draft angle greater than 30. The Pull Direction Reference Surface does not have to be planar. You can specify a splitting surface.
In
Fo r
You can create draft on models that contains variable pull directions. The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool is located in the Draft drop-down menu in the Engineering group of the ribbon. It sweeps a ruled surface normal to a specified draft hinge. You do not specify surfaces to be drafted with the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool. The Variable Pull Direction Draft tool also differs from the conventional Draft tool in the following ways: You can create draft sets within the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool, similar to the Round and Chamfer tools. In Figure 1, the left and right surfaces are drafted in one set, and the rear surface is drafted in a second set. You can specify a draft angle greater than 30 degrees. The Pull Direction Reference Surface specified does not have to be planar. You can specify a splitting surface with the Variable Pull Direction Draft tool. The splitting surface causes the draft to split at the selected surface reference. This enables you to specify a different draft angle on each side of the splitting surface reference. In Figure 2, the draft angle above the splitting surface is 30 degrees, and the draft angle below the splitting surface is 10 degrees.
PT
Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction
te rn
Figure 2 Defining a Splitting Surface
al
U se
Figure 1 Creating Draft Sets
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts with Variable Pull Direction

Close Window Draft\Var-Pull Task 1: Erase Not Displayed DRAFT_VAR-PULL.PRT
Create a variable pull direction draft feature with two sets.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient to the SETS view orientation. 3. Select Variable Pull Direction from the Draft Draft drop-down menu. 4. Select the top U-shaped surface as the Pull Direction Reference Surface. 5. Select the References tab from the dashboard. Click in the Draft Hinges collector. Press CTRL and select the two upper side edges. Edit the draft angle to 14.
Fo r
6. In the References tab, click *New set. 7. Select the upper rear edge. 8. In the graphics window, right-click and select Make variable. 9. Edit the left draft angle to 20, and the right draft angle to 30.
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 5 | Page 21
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Create a variable pull direction draft feature with a splitting surface.
1. Orient to the SPLIT view orientation. 2. In the model tree, right-click SPLIT and select Unhide. 3. De-select the feature. 4. Select Variable Pull Direction from the Draft Draft drop-down menu. 5. Select the top U-shaped surface as the Pull Direction Reference Surface. 6. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. 7. Select the front, upper edge. 8. In the dashboard, select the References tab. Select the Splitting Surfaces check box. 9. Select surface SPLIT. 10. Notice the draft splits at the surface location.
11. Edit the upper draft angle to 21. 12. Edit the lower draft angle to 10. 13. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
14. In the model tree, right-click SPLIT and select Hide.
Module 5 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Trajectory Ribs

Quickly create a network of ribs with draft and rounds.
Trajectory Rib Sketch: Self-extends to the model. Can self-intersect. Can pass through features. Can have multiple open loops. Trajectory Rib Feature: Can add draft. Can add rounds.
Figure 1 Original Model
Figure 2 Trajectory Rib Sketch
te rn
Creating Trajectory Ribs
The system can add material above or below the sketch, but with a Trajectory Rib the thickness is always applied symmetrically about the sketch. You can also add draft or rounds as part of the Trajectory Rib feature.
Fo r
The sketch used for a Trajectory Rib has special abilities: The rib self-extends to find solid material. Therefore, you do not have to extend the sketch and align it to the part. If sketched beyond the model, the rib automatically trims itself to the model boundaries. In the case of a model with complex wall geometry, it is best to permit the system to self-extend the rib to the model. The rib sketch can intersect itself. This enables quick and easy sketching to achieve the desired rib. The rib sketch can pass through existing features, such as screw boss geometry. The system simply ignores the existing solid geometry, and continues the rib in the next free space. The rib sketch can have multiple open loops, unlike sketches for most other solid features. This enables you to sketch multiple unconnected ribs in the same feature. The Trajectory Rib has several options:
PT
Like the traditional Profile Rib, Trajectory Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts; however, with a Trajectory Rib, you sketch the rib centerline from a top view, instead of sketching the rib from a side view. You can select an existing sketch or sketch internal to the Trajectory Rib.
In
al
Figure 3 Trajectory Rib Created
U se
nl y
You can add Draft. Draft is added such that the exposed end of the rib maintains its width, and you can specify the angle that tapers outward and towards the base of the model. You can add rounds on the exposed edges of the rib. With this option you can round the top of the rib using a two-tangent round. The size of the two-tangent round is controlled by the width of the rib, similar to creating a full round. You can also create the rounds by specifying radius values manually. You can add rounds on the internal edges of the rib. With this option you can round the bottom of the rib using a radius value that is equal to the top (exposed edges), or by specifying radius values manually. Once a Trajectory Rib is created, there are some additional options: You can right-click the rib and select Externalize Rounds. This separates the rounds from the rib feature, and creates a round feature in the model tree. The rounds can then be further customized. If you did not add rounds within the rib feature, the internal and exposed edges of the rib are made available for quick selection by querying to an intent edge set.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Trajectory Ribs

Close Window Rib\Trajectory_Rib Task 1: Erase Not Displayed TRAJECTORY_RIB.PRT
Create rib features on a part model.
5. Click Sketch. 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
10. Select the outer circular edge on the boss feature on the right and click Close.
Fo r
11. Right-click and select Line Chain, and sketch two lines. . .
12. Click OK
13. Drag the width handle to 3. 14. Click Complete Feature 15. Click Shading 16. Press CTRL+D. .
2012 PTC
PT
9. Right-click and select References.
In
8. In the In Graphics toolbar, click No Hidden from the Display Style type drop-down menu.
te rn
from the 7. Click Sketch View Setup group in the ribbon.
al
Module 5 | Page 25
U se
4. Select datum plane RIB from the model tree.
3. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
nl y
from 2. Select Trajectory Rib the Rib types drop-down list.
17. With the rib still selected, right-click and select Edit Definition. 18. Click Add Draft dashboard. from the
19. Select the Shape tab and edit the angle to 2. 20. Click Add Exposed Rounds .
21. In the Shape tab, click Specified Value. 22. Type 1 for the radius.
23. Select the Placement tab and click Edit. 24. Click No Hidden .
27. Click OK
29. Press CTRL+D.
30. Click Add Internal Rounds
PT
28. Click Shading
In
26. Right-click and select Line Chain, and then sketch an additional line.
Fo r
31. Select the Shape tab, and click Same as top. 32. Click Complete Feature .
33. Notice that a single rib feature is created in the model tree.
Module 5 | Page 26
te rn
.
25. Click Sketch View from the Setup group in the ribbon.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
34. With the rib still selected, right-click and select Externalize Rounds, then click OK. 35. Notice that a separate round feature is created in the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 27
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
6
U se O te rn al
Module 6 | Page 1
Advanced Shells
Module Overview
With the shell feature, you can hollow out the inside of a solid, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness. You can also select surfaces to be assigned a different thickness as well as specify surfaces to be removed. You can even create partial shells to exclude surfaces from being shelled. In this module, you learn how to create the shell feature and utilize several shell options, such as excluding surfaces, removing surfaces, and creating shells of multiple thicknesses.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Analyze shell references and thickness options. Exclude surfaces from Shell features. Extend shell surfaces. Understand shell corner options.
In
nl y
Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options

You can manipulate a Shell feature by specifying surfaces to remove, specifying surfaces of non-default thickness, and flip which side of the model adds the shell thickness.
Removed surfaces Non-default thickness Change thickness direction
Figure 2 Shell Feature with One Thickness
Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options
Fo r
Removing Surfaces
The References tab in the dashboard contains the Removed surfaces collector. If you do not select any surfaces for removal, a closed shell is created, with the whole inside of the part hollowed out, as shown in Figure 1. You can select surfaces to be removed as part of the shell operation. In Figure 2, the top surface has been removed from the Shell feature. You can view the shell by creating a cut or cross-section.
Specifying Non-Default Thickness Surfaces

The References tab in the dashboard also contains the Non-default thickness collector. You can select surfaces to which a different thickness dimension is applied than the rest of the Shell feature. For each surface included in this collector, you can specify a different individual thickness value. In Figure 3, two surfaces have been assigned different non-default thicknesses of 20mm and 30mm, while the remainder of the model is shelled at a thickness of 10 mm.
PT
You can manipulate a Shell feature by specifying surfaces to remove, specifying surfaces of non-default thickness, and flip which side of the model adds the shell thickness.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Shell Feature Containing Non-Default Thicknesses
U se
Figure 1 Shell Feature, No Surfaces Removed
nl y
Inverting Shell Thickness

In the dashboard, you can flip the shell thickness by clicking Change . This causes the shell thickness to be added to the Thickness Direction outside of the original model, creating a void in the shape of the original model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Shell References and Thickness Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REF_THICK.PRT
Shell\References_Thickness Task 1:
Specify surfaces to remove and surfaces to make non-default thickness.
5. Edit the definition of Shell 1.
6. Select the top surface to remove it.
8. Select the right, flat surface.
Fo r
9. Drag the non-default thickness to 20.
10. In the dashboard, select the References tab. 11. Notice that there is one reference specified to be removed, and one reference specified as non-default thickness.
Module 6 | Page 4
PT
7. Right-click and select Non Default Thickness.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
4. Right-click CUT and select Suppress. Click OK.
U se
3. Notice that the model is shelled, but that surface references have not been removed.
2. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
nl y
12. Press CTRL and select the left, flat surface to also be non-default thickness. In the dashboard, edit the thickness to 30.
13. In the dashboard, click Change . Thickness Direction
16. Click Change Thickness . Direction 17. Click Complete Feature .
19. Spin the model and notice the dimensions.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
18. Right-click Shell 1 and select Edit.
al
Module 6 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Excluding Surfaces from Shells

You can specify surfaces to be excluded so that only certain parts of a model are shelled.
Select one or more surfaces. Surface Sets dialog box enables further selection and exclusion.
Figure 1 No Surfaces Excluded
Fo r
Figure 2 Selecting Surfaces to Be Excluded
PT
In

Sometimes, you do not want all surfaces of a part model to be shelled. For example, you may not want the grips in Figure 1 to be shelled. You can exclude surfaces from the Shell feature. Excluding surfaces enables you to select one or more surfaces and exclude them from the Shell feature. In Figure 2, surfaces are selected to be excluded from the shell. In Figure 3, the shell has been completed, and the grips are not shelled. When specifying surfaces for exclusion, you can open the Surface Sets dialog box. The Surface Sets dialog box enables you to further add Individual Surfaces, Seed and Boundary Surfaces, and Excluded Surfaces.
Module 6 | Page 6
te rn
Figure 3 Surfaces Excluded from Shell
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Excluding Surfaces from Shells

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXCLUDE_SURFS.PRT
Shell\Excluding_Surfs Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, select Shell 1.
6. Right-click and select Exclude Surfaces.
7. Press CTRL and select all five surfaces from the patterned grip near the shell dimension.
9. Click Named Views select 3D.
PT
In
Fo r
10. Notice that the grip is no longer shelled, as it has been excluded.
11. Click Resume Feature and orient to the standard orientation. 12. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Right-click Individual Surfaces and select Remove. 13. Select a surface on the grip again.
2012 PTC
te rn
. and
5. Orient to the standard orientation.
al
Module 6 | Page 7
U se
nl y
3. Notice that the grips on the cap are shelled.
14. Press SHIFT and select the surface of the upper main round on the cap. 15. Notice that you have initiated a Seed and Boundary Surfaces set.
16. In the Options tab, click Details. 17. In the Surface Sets dialog box, select Seed and Boundary Surfaces. Press CTRL and select the other half of the round. Press CTRL and query-select the bottom, flat surface of the model. 18. In the Surface Sets dialog box, select Excluded Surfaces. Press CTRL and select the two outer halves of the cap. Click OK.
PT
Fo r
20. Click Named Views select 3D.
21. Notice that all grips are now excluded from the Shell feature.
Module 6 | Page 8
In
te rn
. and
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Extending Shell Surfaces

In many cases, there are two possible geometry results when partially shelling a feature.
Surface extension options include: Extend inner surfaces Default option Extend excluded surfaces
Figure 1 Shell Feature Result
te rn
Figure 2 Inner Surfaces Extended
Fo r
In many cases, there are two possible geometry results when partially shelling a feature. The result depends on the surfaces that will be used to close the solid. In Figure 1, the model has been shelled. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, the cylinder feature surfaces have been excluded from the Shell feature. The two results are: Extend inner surfaces Forms a cover over the inner surfaces of the shell feature. This is the default option, and is shown in Figure 2. The inner surfaces of the shell were extended in front of the excluded cylinder surfaces. Extend excluded surfaces Forms a cover over the excluded surfaces of the shell feature. In Figure 3, the excluded cylinder surfaces were extended into the shell.
2012 PTC
PT
Extending Shell Surfaces
In
al
Figure 3 Excluded Surfaces Extended
Module 6 | Page 9
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Extending Shell Surfaces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXTEND_SURFACES.PRT
Shell\Extend_Options Task 1:
Experiment with the options available for extending surfaces of a Shell feature.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. Notice that the Shell feature hollows out the cylinder portion of the model.
4. Right-click and select Exclude Surfaces. 5. Press CTRL and select the front, back, and cylindrical surfaces of the cylinder.
Fo r
PT
7. Notice that the cylinder is excluded from the Shell feature.
9. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Extend excluded surfaces option. 10. Click Complete Feature . 11. Notice that the cylinder extends into the Shell feature. This completes the procedure.
Module 6 | Page 10
In
te rn
. .
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Analyzing Shell Corner Options

There are two options to control situations when a Shell feature with an excluded surface breaks through the solid.
Prevent shell from penetrating solid at: Concave corners. Convex corners.
Analyzing Shell Corner Options
Fo r
There are two options to control situations when a Shell feature with an excluded surface breaks through the solid. Concave corners Prevents the shell from cutting through the solid at concave corners. Convex corners Prevents the shell from cutting through the solid at convex corners. Figure 1 depicts a shelled block that contains a convex chamfer (at the top) and a concave chamfer (at the bottom). In Figure 2 and Figure 3, the chamfer surfaces have been excluded from the shell. In Figure 2, the shell is prevented from penetrating the solid at concave corners. Consequently, the concave chamfer no longer penetrates the solid, while the convex chamfer still does penetrate the solid. Conversely, in Figure 3, the shell is prevented from penetrating the solid at convex corners. Consequently, the convex chamfer no longer penetrates the solid, while the concave chamfer still does penetrate the solid.
PT
Figure 2 Shell Prevented from Penetrating Solid at Concave Corners
In
te rn
Figure 3 Shell Prevented from Penetrating Solid at Convex Corners
al
U se
Figure 1 Basic Shell Feature
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Shell Corner Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CONCAVE_CONVEX.PRT
Shell\Corner_Options Task 1:
Analyze the shell corner options of a part model.
1. Disable all Datum display types. 2. Edit the definition of Shell 1.
5. Select the Options tab. 6. Verify that the Concave corners option is selected. 7. Click Preview Feature . 8. Notice that the Shell feature is cutting through.
Fo r
PT
10. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Convex corners option. .
Module 6 | Page 12
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Select the surface of the convex chamfer.
nl y
3. Right-click and select Exclude Surfaces.
12. Press CTRL and select Chamfer 1 and Shell 1. 13. Right-click and select Suppress. Click OK. 14. De-select all geometry. 15. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters. 16. Enable Suppressed Objects in the Model Tree Items dialog box, and click OK. 17. Press CTRL and select Chamfer 2 and Shell 2. 18. Right-click and select Resume. 19. Edit the definition of Shell 2. 20. Right-click and select Exclude Surfaces. 21. Select the surface of the concave chamfer.
22. Select the Options tab.
25. Notice that the Shell feature is cutting through.
Fo r
PT
23. Verify that the Convex corners option is selected. .
In
27. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Concave corners option. 28. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 6 | Page 13
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
7
U se O te rn al
Module 7 | Page 1
Advanced Rounds and Chamfers

Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to create finishing features, such as rounds and chamfers. These features can be placed directly on design models by selecting suitable references. You can create complex geometry by defining transitions between various round and chamfer sets. You can use advanced options to address placement ambiguity in rounds and chamfers, as well as trim round and chamfer geometry.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create rounds through curve. Create rounds and chamfers by reference. Create variable radius rounds and analyze round profiles. Analyze round and chamfer creation methods. Analyze round and chamfer references and pieces. Create rounds and chamfers using intent edges. Use round and chamfer transitions. Create autorounds. Create corner chamfers and other chamfer types. Analyze advanced chamfer dimensioning schemes. Create curvature continuous rounds.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Analyzing Round Profile

You can create rounds that have profiles other than that of a circular arc.
Additional profiles: Conic D1 x D2 Conic C2 Continuous D1 x D2 C2 RHO parameter 0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical 0.5 = Parabolic > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic 2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse
Figure 1 Circular Rounds
In
Figure 2 Conic Rounds
Creating Conic Rounds
You can create rounds that have profiles other than that of a circular arc, an example of which is shown in Figure 1. You can define a round that uses a conic round profile. There are two options available for conic rounds:
Fo r
Conic Defines a round profile to be conic using a single distance value. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled. D1 x D2 Conic Defines a round profile to be conic using two distance values. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled. Both conic round profiles maintain tangency like that of the circular arc round, but can be used to create sharper or shallower rounds using the RHO parameter. In Figure 2, the rounds are conic rounds.
Creating Curvature Continuous Rounds

You can also define a round that uses a curvature continuous spline as a round profile. This option is particularly useful on models where maintaining a curvature continuity is important across rounded surfaces. The system calculates the round, then applies the spline profile. You use the curvature continuous round profile with single or variable radius rounds. There are two options for curvature continuous rounds:
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Curvature Continuous Rounds
al
U se
nl y
C2 Continuous Defines the round profile to be curvature continuous (C2) using a single distance (radius) value. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled. D1 x D2 C2 Defines the round profile to be curvature continuous (C2) using two distance (radius) values. A conic shape factor (RHO value) can also be controlled. In Figure 3, the rounds are curvature continuous rounds.
Using the RHO Parameter
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 3
U se
0.05 to < 0.50 = Elliptical 0.5 = Parabolic > 0.50 to 0.95 = Hyperbolic 2-1 = Quadrant of an Ellipse
The following RHO values create specific conic section geometry:
nl y
You can specify the value for the RHO parameter of the conic or curvature continuous round to create elliptical, parabolic, or hyperbolic rounds. Higher RHO values create a more peaked conic shape, and lower RHO values create a more flat conic shape.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round Profile

Close Window Round\Profile Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ROUND_PROFILE.PRT
Create a Conic round.
3. Orient to the FRONT view to observe their profiles. 4. In the ribbon, select the View tab. from the 5. Click Previous Orientation group. 6. Edit the definition of Round 1. 7. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the drop-down list from Circular to Conic.
PT
9. Edit the Conic parameter value to 0.70 in the dashboard. .
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 4
In
8. Drag the square conic parameter handle left and right and observe the round shape changing.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Press CTRL and select Round 1 and Round 2.
Task 2:
Create a D1 x D2 Conic round.
1. Edit the definition of Round 2. 2. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the drop-down list from Circular to D1 x D2 Conic. Edit the D1 and D2 values to 5 and 10, respectively. Edit the Conic parameter value to 0.35. 3. Click Complete Feature .
5. Orient to the FRONT view to observe their profiles.
Task 3:
Create a C2 Continuous and D1 x D2 C2 round. .
1. Click Previous
2. Edit the definition of Round 3. 3. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the drop-down list from Circular to C2 Continuous.
Fo r
4. Edit the Conic parameter value to 0.70 in the dashboard. .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 5
U se
4. Press CTRL and select Round 1 and Round 2.
nl y
6. Edit the definition of Round 4. 7. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the drop-down list from Circular to D1 x D2 C2. Edit the D1 and D2 values to 7 and 5, respectively. Edit the Conic parameter value to 0.35.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Analyzing Round Creation Methods

You can create a round using either the rolling ball method or normal to spine method.
Rolling ball Standard round algorithm. Path left from rolling a ball forms the round. Normal to spine Arc cross-section swept normal to a spine curve. Good for quick round direction changes.
Figure 2 Converting Failing Round from Rolling Ball to Normal to Spine
Fo r
Analyzing Round Creation Methods

You can create a round using either the Rolling ball method or Normal to spine method. A round created using Normal to spine is shown in Figure 1. Rolling ball is the default round creation method used by Creo Parametric. It uses a standard round algorithm, where the system creates round set pieces by rolling a theoretical spherical ball along the geometry, following any tangencies. The path left by the ball forms the round. If the Rolling ball method is not successful, like in the left image of Figure 2, then you can try the Normal to spine method. The Normal to spine method works well for situations where the round changes direction quickly. For a Normal to spine round, the system sweeps an arc cross-section normal to a spine curve, where the spine curve is the edge you select to be rounded. You can also use the Conic and D1 x D2 Conic profiles with the Normal to spine method.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 7
U se
Figure 1 Completed Normal to Spine Round
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round Creation Methods

Close Window Round\Method Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ROUND_METHOD.PRT
Analyze the round creation methods in a part model.
4. Edit the radius to 4. 5. Click Preview Feature .
6. Click Resume Feature 7. Edit the radius to 5. 8. Click Preview Feature
. .
9. Notice that the round fails.
Fo r
12. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the drop-down list from Rolling ball to Normal to spine. .
Module 7 | Page 8
PT
In
10. Click Cancel in the Troubleshooter dialog box. Click Yes. .
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. Select the edge between cylinders.
nl y
2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down list.
15. From the In Graphics toolbar, select FRONT from the Named Views list. 16. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the drop-down list from Circular to Conic. Accept the default Rho value. 17. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Creating Rounds Through Curve

You can control the radius of a round by using edges or curves.
Select a curve or edge. The round radius follows the selected reference.
Creating Rounds Through Curve

You can control the radius of a round by using edges or curves. The round radius follows the selected reference, with respect to the edges being rounded. The rounds can also add or remove material. In Figure 1, two different rounds were created, one on each peg. The round on the left peg adds material, while the round on the right removes material. In Figure 2, the edge is selected for rounding in the left image. In the middle image, the curve is specified for the round to be created through. The right image displays the final round.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 10
PT
Figure 2 Rounds Created using Curves
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Rounds Created using Edges as Curves
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds Through Curve

Close Window Erase Not Displayed THRU_CURVE.PRT
Round\Thru_Curve Task 1:
Create rounds through curve.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the Engineering group,
4. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Click Through curve and select the bottom edge of the smaller cylinder. 5. Click Complete Feature .
6. Notice the round is removing material.
7. Click Round
PT
Fo r
8. Select the bottom edge of the small cylinder on the left. 9. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Click Through curve and select the top edge of the larger cylinder. Press SHIFT and select the other larger cylinder edge.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
.
al
Module 7 | Page 11
U se
3. Select the edge of the larger cylinder on the right.
nl y
select Round from the Round types drop-down list.
11. Notice that the round is adding material.
13. Click Round
14. Select the top, right edge. 15. Right-click and select Through curve. Select the spline. 16. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
17. Click Round
18. Select the concave edge. 19. Right-click and select Through curve. Select the spline.
Module 7 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
12. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
20. Right-click and select Add set. 21. Select the top, right edge. 22. Right-click and select Through curve. Select the spline.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 13
U se
nl y
Creating Variable Radius Rounds

You can create a round with multiple radius values.
Each radius has: Location Ratio Reference Radius Value Reference Radius operations Add/Delete radius Make constant/variable
Figure 1 Variable Radius Round
In
Figure 2 Location Differences
Creating Variable Radius Rounds

By default, when you create a round, Creo Parametric creates a constant round, where a single radius is applied. However, you can also create a variable round. A variable round is one that has multiple radius values as shown in Figure 1. You can convert a constant radius to a variable radius and vice versa. To convert a constant radius to a variable radius, you right-click in the graphics window or Radius table in the Sets tab and select Make variable. Conversely, you convert a variable radius to a constant radius by right-clicking in the graphics window or Radius table in the Sets tab and selecting Make constant. Each variable round must have the following two items defined: Location Defines where the variable round occurs in the part model. You can define each variable round location in either of the following ways: Ratio The length ratio value along the Reference edge. For example, if you want the variable round to reside at the midpoint of the Reference edge, specify a Ratio value of 0.5. You can either type a Ratio value in the Sets tab, or you can drag the location handle in the graphics window to a new location. In Figure 2, the left radius has a ratio of 0.85 defined. That is, it is 0.85, or 85% of the way along the highlighted reference.
Fo r
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Radius Value Differences
al
U se
nl y
Reference Enables you to select a specific reference location for the variable round to occur. In Figure 2, the right radius location is defined at a datum point. Radius Defines the round radius value at the defined location. You can define each round radius value in either of the following ways: Value Enables you to type the desired round value as a numerical value. The round radius value displays in the Radius table. In Figure 3, the upper radius has a value of 18, while the lower radius value is 8. Reference Enables you to specify the radius by using a reference. You can right-click a radius in the Radius table of the Sets tab to perform the following operations: Add radius Enables you to add additional radii. You can also right-click a radius handle to add additional radii. Delete Enables you to delete the radius you right-clicked. You can also right-click a radius handle in the graphics window to delete that particular radius. Make constant Deletes all radii except the first one.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 15
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Variable Radius Rounds

Close Window Round\Variable Task 1: Erase Not Displayed VARIABLE_RAD.PRT
Edit an existing round to make it variable.
3. Right-click and select Make variable.
4. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Notice that there are two radii. 5. In the graphics window, drag the round location handles to the far left and right of the highlighted edge. 6. In the Sets tab, notice that the Location values for the left and right radii are 1 and 0, respectively.
7. In the Sets tab, edit the Radius at the 1 Location (radius #2) to 18. Edit the Location Ratio Value from 1 to 0.9. Edit the distance Value from Ratio to Reference. Select the left vertex of the highlighted reference. 8. Edit the radius at the 0 location from 10 to 8.
Fo r
9. Edit the Location Ratio Value from 0 to 0.20.
Module 7 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Edit the definition of Round 1.
10. In the Sets tab, right-click in the table and select Add radius. Edit the distance Value from Ratio to Reference. Select datum point on the right side of the model. Edit the radius value to 12. 11. In the graphics window, right-click the last radius' handle and select Add radius. Drag the new point around to the back of the large edge.
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
al
Module 7 | Page 17
12. In the Sets tab, edit the Location Ratio Value to 0.5. Edit the Radius value from 12 to 8.
U se
nl y
Auto Round
The Auto Round tool enables you to create a complex series of rounds quickly and easily.
Auto Round Tool Create complex rounds quickly and easily. Created as a series of rounds in an auto round feature. Can convert to a group of standard round features. Robust Rounding Intelligent order of round creation. Updates to features previously inserted.
Figure 2 An Auto Round Feature
PT
In
Auto Round
Fo r
The Auto Round tool enables you to create a complex series of rounds quickly and easily. Rounds that would take an experienced modeler 30 minutes or more (due to experimenting with round order and transitions) can be created in seconds with the Auto Round tool as shown in Figure 1. To create an Auto Round, select Auto Round from the Round types drop-down list in the ribbon. Several individual rounds are created as round sub-features within an auto round feature, as shown in Figure 2. The following describes the technical aspects of the Auto Round tool, which lead to robust rounding of a model: The Auto Round tool creates rounds in an intelligent order as necessary to set up tangency for subsequent rounds. The tool does not simply select edges and then round the selected edges. Round transitions are created as necessary by the Auto Round tool.
te rn
Figure 3 Auto Round Player
al
U se
Figure 1 Model With Rounds Applied
nl y
The Auto Round Player dialog box, shown in Figure 3, appears during round calculation. You can stop regeneration and rewind or play back the different round features being created by the Auto Round tool, if desired. You can insert features before the auto round in the model tree, and the auto round will then round those features. The Auto Round tool is designed to avoid feature failures. Sometimes model geometry changes, and some of the rounds cannot be created. In this case, the rounds are excluded and the Round tool only rounds what is possible. The following are options within the Auto Round tool: You can round concave edges, convex edges, or both. You can assign different round radii to concave and convex edges. You can round all solid edges, or select a series of edges to exclude from rounding. You can also round only a selection of edges. Instead of an auto round feature with round sub-features, you can create a group of standard round features. You can also right-click an existing auto round feature and convert it to a group. A group of round features can be ungrouped, resulting in a series of standard round features that can be edited or deleted individually.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 7 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Auto Round

Close Window Erase Not Displayed AUTO_ROUND.PRT
Round\Auto_round Task 1:
Utilize an auto round to create rounds on a complex model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the Engineering group, click Auto Round from the Round types drop-down menu. Edit the convex radius value to 1.0, if necessary. Select Same for the Concave radius value, if necessary. Select the Scope tab and observe the options. Click Complete Feature . The auto round will take a few moments to generate. 3. Select the auto round from the model tree, right-click, and select Edit Definition. Select the Exclude tab. Press CTRL and select four edges to exclude.
Fo r
4. Click Complete Feature . The auto round will take a few moments to generate.
Module 7 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. Drag the Insert Indicator directly before the auto round feature. Select Sketch 1 from the model tree then click Extrude from the Shapes group. Edit the depth to 15. Click Complete Feature . 6. Right-click the Insert Indicator and click Cancel. Click Yes. Notice that the auto round has encompassed the inserted feature.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
7. Select Auto Round 1 from the model tree. Right-click and select Convert to Group. Click OK. Expand the local group (Group LOCAL_GROUP). Right-click the local group and select Ungroup. Notice that the auto round has been converted to a series of standard Round features.
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 21
U se
nl y
Creating Rounds by Reference

You can use a reference to define a round's size.
Reference types: Point Vertex Edge Geometry updates for changes made to reference location. Figure 1 Selecting References
Figure 2 Completed Geometry
Creating Rounds by Reference
Fo r
By default, when you create a round you must specify its radius. However, you can use a reference that defines the radius instead, as shown in Figure 1. You can specify a point, vertex, or edge as the reference. The system updates the geometry automatically for any changes made to the reference location. Figure 2 displays the resulting round geometry for the selected references. In Figure 3, the height of the protrusion was decreased, and the datum point position used by the upper round has been moved. Notice that the resulting round geometry updated accordingly.
Module 7 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Updated Geometry
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Rounds by Reference

Close Window Round\By_Ref Task 1: Erase Not Displayed RAD_BY_REF.PRT
Redefine round radii from a value to a reference.
6. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Notice that the Radius is 4. Edit the distance drop-down list from Value to Reference. Select datum point on the top front edge of the model. 7. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
.
Module 7 | Page 23
U se
3. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Notice that the Radius is 5. Edit the distance drop-down list from Value to Reference. Select the bottom-right, front vertex.
nl y
8. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. Edit the height from 12 to 8. 9. In the model tree, select datum point PNT0. Edit the point value from 0.7 to 0.4. 10. Click Regenerate . 11. Notice that the feature geometry updates. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Analyzing Round References and Pieces

You can manipulate round geometry based on how references are selected and the pieces that are excluded.
References Manipulate which edges are rounded. Surface loop from to One-by-one Pieces Select a piece to remove it. Trim or extend geometry.
Figure 1 Creating a Round with Surface Loop From To
Figure 2 Removing Round Piece and Trimming the Round
Analyzing Round References Selection

By default, if you select an edge to be rounded, and that selected edge has adjacent tangent edges, then the resulting round automatically propagates around those tangent edges. However, you can manipulate which edges are ultimately rounded by pressing SHIFT and using the Surface loop from to option or using the One-by-one selection option. These options enable you prevent the round from covering the whole tangent chain, enabling you to select only the edges you want to receive the round. In Figure 1, the edges were selected using a Surface loop from to. The resulting geometry does not round the top three edges, even though they are tangent. When Surface loop from to selection is used with the tool started, you can even select edges that are not tangent.
Fo r
Analyzing Round Pieces

The Pieces tab in the dashboard enables you to further manipulate the round. Using the Pieces tab you can perform the following functions: Select a piece of the round from the model to remove it. Trim the round by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece inward so that less geometry is covered. Extend the round by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece outward so that more geometry is covered. If you want to trim or extend a closed-loop round, simply remove a round piece from the round first. This causes the handles to appear for trimming or extending. In Figure 2, the bottom arc piece is excluded, which causes the handles to display. The handles were used to trim the small corners so that they were not rounded, either.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
To access the functionality that enables you to select pieces to be removed, you must select the piece in the Pieces tab. Once you have excluded or removed a piece of the round, the Pieces tab displays the piece as Edited. If you want to include all pieces again, you can edit the selected Piece drop-down list back to Included. If you need to terminate a round at a location other than at a round piece, you can use the Stop at Reference transition type.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Round References and Pieces

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REFS_PIECES.PRT
Round\Ref_Pieces Task 1:
Create rounds using different references and pieces.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Extrude 2. Select the front, left arc edge. Press SHIFT, and query-select the bottom Surface loop from to.
3. From the Engineering group, select Round from the Round types drop-down list. 4. Edit the radius to 1 and click Complete Feature .
5. Notice that the round did not follow the tangent chain at the top.
7. Select an inner concave edge.
Fo r
8. Notice that the entire tangent chain will be rounded.
2012 PTC
PT
6. Click Round
In
te rn
.
al
Module 7 | Page 27
U se
nl y
9. In the dashboard, select the Pieces tab. Select Piece 1. Select the bottom rounded arc to exclude it. Drag both handles up to exclude the small rounded corners. 10. Click Complete Feature .
11. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. 12. Click Round . 13. Select the right front large arc. Notice the tangent chain. 14. Press SHIFT and select the left front large arc One-by-one. 15. Click Complete Feature .
16. Click Round
19. Right-click and select Clear.
Fo r
20. Select the rear-top concave edge of the rectangular feature. 21. In the dashboard, select the Pieces tab. Select Piece 1. Drag both handles down across the non-tangent corners.
Module 7 | Page 28
PT
18. Press SHIFT, and query-select the bottom Surface loop from to.
In
17. Select the rear-right concave edge of the rectangular feature.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 29
U se
nl y
Using Intent Edges for Rounds

You can place a round by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces.
Reference selection is quicker. Resulting rounds are more robust. References are tied to features, not edge references.
Figure 1 Selecting Intent Edges
Using Intent Edges for Rounds

You can place a round by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces. Using intent edges or surfaces makes selecting references quicker. They are also more robust, preventing rounds from failing when model changes are made, since the references for the rounds are tied to the features in the design model, not the individual edge references. In Figure 1, the round is being created by specifying the intent edges. In Figure 2, the post feature is moved to the right, over a bump and into a gap. Though the resulting round geometry differs, the round is still successful. Even when the post is updated from five sides to four, the round is still successful. The following are examples of intent edges for a rectangular extrude coming from a block: The parallel outside edges of the extrude. The end edges of the extrude. The edges where the extrude meets the block.
Fo r
PT
Figure 2 Moving the Post Feature
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
For these examples, the shape of the rectangle is not important only that an extruded feature is present.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 31
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using Intent Edges for Rounds

Close Window Erase Not Displayed INTENT.PRT
Round\Intent_Edges Task 1:
Use intent edges when creating rounds.
Fo r
7. Cursor over one of the vertical side edges of the post and right-click to query-select the vertical side intent edges. Edit the radius value to 6.
PT
6. Click Round
8. Click Complete Feature 9. Click Round .
10. Right-click to query and select the intent intersection edges of the post. 11. Click Complete Feature .
Module 7 | Page 32
In
5. Click Complete Feature .
te rn
. .
4. Right-click and select Add set. Cursor over one of the top edges and right-click to query-select the top intent edges. Edit the radius value to 5.
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. Cursor over one of the vertical side edges and right-click to query-select the vertical side intent edges. Edit the radius value to 10.
nl y
select Round from the Round types drop-down menu.
12. Right-click POST and select Edit. 13. Edit the 50 dimension to 100, then click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 14. The intent edges are between the post and base, so the round feature ignores the bump but does not fail. 15. Right-click POST and select Edit. 16. Edit the 100 dimension you just changed to 150, then click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 17. The round feature is still successful, even with only half the post intersecting.
19. Edit the offset from 150 to 141 and the width from 38 to 18. 20. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 21. Edit the definition of POST. 22. Right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch.
Fo r
23. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
24. Zoom in on the sketch and delete the five lines, keeping the construction circle. 25. Sketch a rectangle with a width of 40, ensuring that the corners snap to the construction circle. 26. Click OK .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
18. Right-click Extrude 3 and select Edit.
al
Module 7 | Page 33
U se
nl y
27. Click Complete Feature 28. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
29. The rounds are still successful.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Using Round Transitions

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or discontinuous round pieces.
Transition mode: Displays available transitions. Enables you to change transition type for each round. Numerous transition types available.
Figure 2 Intersect Transition Type
Figure 3 Corner Sphere Transition Type
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 Round Only 1 Transition Type
Fo r
Using Round Transitions

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or discontinuous round pieces. Creo Parametric uses default transitions that are selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases, you can use the default transitions. However, sometimes you need to modify the existing transitions to achieve the preferred round geometry. from To access Transition mode, you can either click Transition Mode the dashboard or right-click and select Show transitions while using the Round tool. To exit Transition mode, you can either click Set Mode dashboard, or right-click and select Back to sets. in the
Round Transition Types

When you access Transition mode, the system displays all of the available round transitions, as shown Figure 1. When you select an available
al
U se
Figure 1 Viewing Round Transitions
nl y
transition, the dashboard displays the currently set type for that transition in the Transition Type drop-down list. The drop-down list contains a list of valid transition types available for the currently selected transition, based on the geometrical context. You can change the transition type for the currently selected transition. The following is a list of round transition types (note that not all transition types listed are available for a given context): Default Creo Parametric determines the transition type that is the best fit for the geometrical context. The transition type used for the default appears in parentheses. Intersect Extends two or more overlapping round pieces toward each other until they merge, forming a sharp boundary. Intersect transitions only apply to two or more overlapping round pieces. Corner Sphere Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping round pieces with a spherical corner. By default, the sphere has the same radius as the largest overlapping round piece. However, you can modify the radius of the sphere as well as the transition distance along each edge, enabling you to blend it into the smaller existing radii using fillet surfaces. Corner Sphere transitions apply only to geometry where three round pieces overlap at a corner. Corner Sweep Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping round pieces. Round geometry is created as a sweep that wraps around the round piece with the largest radius. The resulting geometry looks as if the round piece with the largest radius was created first, and the remaining two pieces were created subsequently. Corner Sweep transitions only apply to three round pieces that overlap each other at a corner. Patch Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four round pieces overlap. You can add an additional side to a three-sided Patch transition by selecting an optional surface on which to create a fillet that contains a radius. This fillet becomes the fourth side of the resulting patch and is tangent. Patch transitions apply only to geometry where three or four round pieces overlap at a corner. Round Only Creates a transition using compounded round geometry. Each round piece has a different radius value. Blend Creates a fillet surface between the round pieces using an edge reference. All tangent round geometry stops at sharp edges. Continue Extends the round geometry into two round pieces. All tangent round geometry does not stop at sharp edges, unlike the Blend transition. The resulting geometry looks as if the round was placed first, and then geometry was cut away. Neighboring surfaces are extended to meet round geometry where applicable. Stop Terminates the round using one of three different stop cases. Creo Parametric configures the geometry for each of the stop cases based on the geometrical context. Stop at Reference Terminates round geometry at the datum point or datum plane that you specify. Intersect at Surface Helps to maintain a linear parting line. This option is particularly useful on models that have a split draft that forms a parting line. You can define the driving side for the round by selecting Side 1 or Side 2 for the transition. You can define the transition length for the round by dragging the handle or specifying a value.
Module 7 | Page 36
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Using Round Transitions

Close Window Round\Transitions Task 1: Erase Not Displayed ROUND_TRANSITIONS.PRT
Specify different round transitions in a part model.
3. Cursor over the top-right edge and right-click to query-select the end Intent edges. 4. Press CTRL, cursor over the top-left edge, and right-click to query-select the other end Intent edges. 5. Edit the radius value to 1.
6. Right-click and select Add set.
8. Edit the radius value to 3.
Fo r
PT
In
7. Cursor over one of the horizontal side edges and right-click to query-select the side intent edges.
10. Click Resume Feature 11. In the dashboard, click Transition Mode .
12. Select the top, front-right corner transition.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 7 | Page 37
U se
nl y
select Round from the Round types drop-down list.
13. In the dashboard, edit the transition type to Intersect. 14. Click Preview Feature .
PT
Fo r
22. In the dashboard, edit the transition type to Round Only 1. .
25. Select the upper, front-middle transition. 26. In the dashboard, notice the transition type Default (Continue). 27. Click Preview Feature .
Module 7 | Page 38
In
19. In the dashboard, edit the transition type to Patch. Click in the Optional surface collector and select the right side surface. .
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
16. In the dashboard, edit the transition type to Corner Sphere. Edit L2 and L3 to 3.
nl y
29. In the dashboard, edit the transition type to Blend. 30. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 39
U se
nl y
Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types

You can also create chamfers by selecting two surfaces or a surface and an edge.
Selecting a surface and edge: You must select the surface first. Selecting two surfaces: Chamfers can engulf geometry. Chamfers can span gaps.
Figure 2 Chamfer Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge
Fo r
You can create chamfers by selecting two surfaces. The system creates the chamfer between the two surfaces, and therefore has the ability to span gaps or engulf existing geometry. In addition, chamfers created by selecting two surfaces can also provide more robust chamfer geometry in cases where chamfers created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry. You can also create chamfers by first selecting a surface and then selecting an edge. The chamfer must pass through the selected edge unless the distance between the selected surface and edge becomes too large or too small. At that point the chamfer breaks away from the edge, but still passes through the selected surface. In the figures, the geometry selected is highlighted on the left, and the resulting chamfers are shown on the right.
Module 7 | Page 40
PT
Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Chamfer Created by Selecting Two Surfaces
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Additional Chamfer Types

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CHAMFER_TYPES.PRT
Chamfer\Chamfer_Types Task 1:
Create chamfers by selecting two surfaces.
3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces. 4. Edit the D value to 10.
6. Click Edge Chamfer
PT
In
Fo r
7. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces. 8. Edit the D value to 9.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
.
Module 7 | Page 41
U se
nl y
select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down list.
3. Edit the O value to 12.
6. Press CTRL and select the main surface and the edge.
Fo r
7. Edit the O value to 13.
Module 7 | Page 42
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
2. Press CTRL and select the top surface and the edge.
nl y
Task 2:
Create chamfers by selecting a surface and edge.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 43
U se
nl y
Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

There are several different ways to dimension a chamfer to capture desired design intent.
Basic dimensioning schemes include: DxD D1 x D2 Angle x D 45 x D More advanced dimensioning schemes include: OxO O1 x O2
Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes
Fo r
There are several ways to dimension a chamfer to capture desired design intent. The following are the more basic dimensioning schemes: D x D Creates a chamfer that is at a distance (D) from the edge along each surface. Creo Parametric selects this by default. D1 x D2 Creates a chamfer at a distance (D1) from the selected edge along one surface and a distance (D2) from the selected edge along the other surface. Angle x D Creates a chamfer at a distance (D) from the selected edge along one adjacent surface at a specified angle (Angle) to that surface. 45 x D Creates a chamfer that is at an angle of 45 degrees to both surfaces and a distance (D) from the edge along each surface. These schemes are available using the Offset Surface creation method only if the following conditions are met: for Edge chamfers, all members of the edge chain must be formed by exactly two 90-degree planes (for example, the ends of a cylinder).
PT
Figure 2 D x D Chamfer on Drafted Corner
In
te rn
Figure 3 O x O Chamfer on Drafted Corner
al
U se
Figure 1 O x O and D x D Chamfer for 90 Degree Corner
nl y
The following dimensioning scheme options are more advanced: O x O Creates a chamfer that is at an offset distance (O) from the edge along each surface. Creo Parametric selects this by default only when D x D is not available. O1 x O2 Creates a chamfer at an offset distance (O1) from the selected edge along one surface and an offset distance (O2) from the selected edge along the other surface. Initially, it appears that the resulting geometry for a D x D and O x O chamfer is the same, assuming D = O. For chamfers where the geometry adjacent to the chamfered edge is at 90 degrees, the geometry is the same, as shown in Figure 1. However, when the geometry adjacent to the chamfered edge is not 90 degrees, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3, the difference in geometry between an O x O and a D x D chamfer is readily seen. The difference is in how the two chamfers are defined. Both D x D and O x O chamfers are similar in that the two adjacent surfaces are offset, and there is a resulting intersection. However, for an O x O chamfer, two perpendicular lines are drawn from the intersection to the adjacent surfaces.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 45
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Advanced Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed OXO.PRT
Chamfer\Adv_Chamfer_Schemes Task 1:
Experiment with the different schemes of a chamfer.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1. 3. In the dashboard, notice that the chamfer scheme is D x D, and the D value is 20. Select the Sets tab. Notice that the chamfer creation type is specified as Offset Surfaces in the drop-down list. 4. Click Complete Feature 5. Orient to the FRONT view. .
Fo r
7. Right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit. 8. Notice that the offsets for both DxD and OxO are 20. This is because of the 90-degree draft corner.
Module 7 | Page 46
PT
In
6. Notice that the chamfer lines up with the dashed sketch lines.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
9. Click in the graphics window to de-select the sketch, then right-click Draft 2 and select Edit. 10. Edit the draft from 0 to 10, then click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 11. Notice that the chamfer follows the DxD sketch. The white lines are offset parallel to the top and right surfaces by 20, creating the intersection. 12. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1. 13. In the dashboard, edit the chamfer type from D x D to O X O. Edit the O value to 20. 14. Click Complete Feature . 15. Notice that the chamfer now follows the construction lines for OxO, and that the construction lines are perpendicular to the top and right model surfaces. 16. Right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit. 17. Notice that the top and right surfaces are still offset by 20 to create the intersection of the white lines. However, the OxO lines are projected normal to the surfaces from that intersection.
Fo r
18. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1. 19. In the dashboard, edit the chamfer type from O x O to O1 x O2. Edit the O1 value to 15 and the O2 value to 25. 20. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 47
U se
nl y
21. Right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit. 22. Edit the top and right sketch dimensions to 15 and 25, respectively. 23. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 24. Notice the construction lines for the O1xO2 sketch (OxO in the figure).
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 48
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods

You can define the chamfer distance either with offset surfaces or with tangent distances.
Offset Surfaces Default method Adjacent surfaces are offset Perpendiculars dropped from offset surfaces intersection to adjacent surfaces Connect the intersections of the neighboring surfaces and perpendiculars Tangent Distance Tangent lines extended from adjacent surfaces Connect the points of tangency
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Offset Surfaces Chamfer Figure 3 Tangent Distance Chamfer
Fo r
Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods

Creo Parametric uses creation methods to create the chamfer geometry. Different creation methods result in different chamfer geometry. You can use the following creation methods: Offset Surfaces Determines the chamfer distance by offsetting the neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. Creo Parametric selects this method by default. In Figure 1, the two surfaces were offset by 30. At the intersection, two lines were extended perpendicular to each surface. When the chamfer of distance value 30 is created in Figure 2, it connects the two intersections of the surfaces and perpendicular lines. Tangent Distance Determines the chamfer distance with vectors that are tangent to the neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. In Figure 1, two lines were extended tangent from the two surfaces. Each line is of length 30 from the point of tangency to the other line intersection. When
al
U se
Figure 1 Part Model, No Chamfer
nl y
the chamfer of distance value 30 is created in Figure 3, it connects the two points of tangency.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 50
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Chamfer Creation Methods

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CHAMFER_METHOD.PRT
Chamfer\Chamfer_Method Task 1:
Analyze the chamfer creation methods in a part model.
3. Right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit. 4. Notice that the surface offset distance and tangent line lengths are both 30.
select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down list. 7. Select the upper-right edge. 8. Edit the O value to 30.
10. Notice that the chamfer distance is set at Offset Surfaces.
Fo r
PT
9. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab.
In
12. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. 13. Notice that the chamfer is at the Offset construction lines' points of intersection with the surfaces.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
6. From the Engineering group,
al
Module 7 | Page 51
U se
nl y
14. Edit the definition of Chamfer 1. 15. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Edit the distance drop-down list from Offset Surfaces to Tangent Distance. Edit the D value to 30.
17. Notice the chamfer is at the Tangent construction lines' points of tangency.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 52
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Corner Chamfers

A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part, creating a beveled surface between the three original surfaces common to the corner.
Requirements: Corner must be convex. Edges leading to the corner must be linear. Specify the offset values for each edge: Drag handles. Type values on the model. Type values in the dashboard.
Fo r
Creating Corner Chamfers

A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part, creating a beveled surface between the three original surfaces common to the corner. , which is a You can create corner chamfers using Corner Chamfer . The following two requirements apply
different tool than Edge Chamfer when creating a corner chamfer:
The corner, and each edge leading to corner, must be convex. The edges leading to the corner must be linear. Once you select a corner to be chamfered, you must then specify the offset values on each edge from the corner. You can specify values either by dragging the individual handles on the model or by typing values on the model or in the dashboard.
2012 PTC
PT
Figure 2 Chamfer on 90 Degree Corner
In
te rn
Figure 3 Chamfer on Non 90 Degree Corner
al
Module 7 | Page 53
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Corner Chamfers

Close Window Chamfer\Corner Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CORNER_CHAMFER.PRT
Create a corner chamfer on a 90 degree corner.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the Engineering group, from select Corner Chamfer the Chamfer types drop-down menu. 3. Select the vertex.
4. Drag the handles and type the values as necessary. 5. Click Complete Feature .
2. Select the vertex.
Fo r
3. Drag the handles and type the values as necessary. 4. Click Complete Feature .

PT
1. Select Corner Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu.
In
Task 2:
Create a corner chamfer on a non 90 degree corner.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Creating Chamfers by Reference

You can use a reference to define a chamfer's size.
Reference types: Point Vertex Edge Geometry updates for changes made to reference location. Figure 1 Selecting References
Figure 2 Completed Geometry
te rn
Creating Chamfers by Reference
Fo r
Figure 2 displays the resulting chamfer geometry for the selected references. In Figure 3, the height of the protrusion has been decreased, and the datum point position used by the upper chamfer has been moved. Notice that the resulting chamfer geometry updated accordingly.
2012 PTC
PT
By default, when you create a chamfer, you must specify its distance value. However, you can use a reference that defines the chamfer size instead. You can specify a point, vertex, or edge as the reference. The system updates the geometry automatically for any changes made to the reference location. Figure 1 displays two chamfers. One was created through a vertex, the other through a datum point.
In
al
Figure 3 Updated Geometry
Module 7 | Page 55
U se
nl y
Analyzing Chamfer References and Pieces

You can manipulate chamfer geometry based on how references are selected and the pieces that are excluded.
References Manipulate which edges are chamfered. Surface loop from to One-by-one Pieces Select a piece to remove it. Trim or extend geometry.
Figure 1 Creating a Chamfer with Surface Loop From To
Analyzing Chamfer References Selection

By default, if you select an edge to be chamfered, and that selected edge has adjacent tangent edges, then the resulting chamfer automatically propagates around those tangent edges. However, you can manipulate which edges are ultimately chamfered by pressing SHIFT and using the Surface loop from to or One-by-one selection options. These options enable you prevent the chamfer from covering the whole tangent chain, enabling you to select only the edges you want to receive the chamfer.
Fo r
In Figure 1, the edges were selected using a Surface loop from to. The resulting geometry does not chamfer the top three edges, even though they are tangent. When Surface loop from to selection is used with the tool started, you can even select edges that are not tangent.
Analyzing Chamfer Pieces

The Pieces tab in the dashboard enables you to further manipulate the chamfer. Using the Pieces tab you can perform the following functions: Select a piece of the chamfer from the model to remove it. Trim the chamfer by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece inward so that less geometry is covered. Extend the chamfer by dragging the handles at the ends of the piece outward so that more geometry is covered. If you want to trim or extend a closed-loop chamfer, simply remove a chamfer piece from the chamfer first. This causes the handles to appear for trimming or extending. In Figure 2, the bottom arc piece is excluded, which causes
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Removing Chamfer Piece and Trimming the Chamfer
al
U se
nl y
the handles to display. The handles were used to trim the small corners so that they were not chamfered, either. To specify the functionality that enables you to select pieces to be removed, you must select the piece in the Pieces tab. Once you have excluded or removed a piece of the chamfer, the Pieces tab displays the piece as Edited. If you want to include all pieces again, you can edit the selected Piece drop-down list back to Included. If you need to terminate a chamfer at a location other than at a chamfer piece, you can use the Stop at Reference transition type.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 57
U se
nl y
Using Intent Edges for Chamfers

You can place a chamfer by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces.
Reference selection is quicker. Resulting chamfers are more robust. References are tied to features, not edge references.
Figure 1 Selecting Intent Edges
Fo r
Using Intent Edges for Chamfers

You can place a chamfer by selecting intent edges or intent surfaces. Using intent edges or surfaces makes selecting references quicker. They are also more robust, preventing chamfers from failing when model changes are made, since the references for the chamfers are tied to the features in the design model, not the individual edge references. In Figure 1, the chamfer is being created by specifying the intent edges. In Figure 2, the post feature is moved to the right, over a bump and into a gap. Though the resulting chamfer geometry differs, the chamfer is still successful. Even when the post is updated from five sides to four, the chamfer is still successful. The following are examples of intent edges for a rectangular extrude coming from a block: The parallel outside edges of the extrude.
PT
Figure 2 Moving the Post Feature
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
The end edges of the extrude. The edges where the extrude meets the block. For these examples, the shape of the rectangle is not important only that an extruded feature is present.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 59
U se
nl y
Using Chamfer Transitions

Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or discontinuous chamfer pieces.
Transition mode: Displays available transitions. Enables you to change transition type for each chamfer. Numerous transition types available.
Using Chamfer Transitions
Fo r
Transitions enable you to specify how the system handles overlapping or discontinuous chamfer pieces. Creo Parametric uses default transitions that are selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases, you can use the default transitions. Sometimes, however, you need to modify the existing transitions to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry.
To access Transition mode, you can either click Transition Mode in the dashboard or right-click and select Show transitions while using the Chamfer tool. To exit Transition mode, you can either click Set Mode dashboard, or right-click and select Back to sets. in the
Chamfer Transition Types

When you access Transition mode, the system displays all of the available chamfer transitions, as shown in Figure 1. When you select an available transition, the dashboard displays the currently set type for that transition in the Transition Type drop-down list. The drop-down list contains valid
PT
Figure 2 Intersect Chamfer Transition Type
In
te rn
Figure 3 Corner Plane Chamfer Transition Type
al
U se
Figure 1 Viewing Chamfer Transitions
nl y
transition types available for the currently selected transition, based on the geometrical context. You can change the transition type for the currently selected transition. The following is a list of chamfer transition types (note that not all transition types listed are available for a given context): Default Creo Parametric determines the transition type that is the best fit for the geometrical context. The transition type used for the default appears in parenthesis. Intersect Extends two or more overlapping chamfer pieces toward each other until they merge, forming a sharp boundary. Patch Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four chamfer pieces overlap. Optionally, you can specify a surface on which to place a fillet, and specify the fillet radius to be used. Corner Plane Chamfers the corner transition formed by overlapping three chamfer pieces with a plane. Stop at Reference Terminates chamfer geometry at the selected datum point or datum plane. You must specify the reference to be used. Blend Creates a fillet surface between the chamfer pieces using an edge reference. Continue Extends chamfer geometry into two chamfer pieces. Stop Case 1 Terminates the chamfer using geometry configured by Creo Parametric.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 7 | Page 61
PROCEDURE - Using Chamfer Transitions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CHAMFER_TRANS.PRT
Chamfer\Chamfer_Transitions Task 1:
Specify different chamfer transitions in a part model.
3. Press CTRL and select the front three edges. 4. Edit the D value to 2. 5. Right-click and select Add set. 6. Press CTRL and select the two parallel edges. 7. Edit the D value to 2, if necessary.
8. In the dashboard, click Transition Mode
9. Select the upper, three-way corner transition.
Fo r
10. In the dashboard, notice that the default transition type is Intersect. 11. Select the lower, three-way corner transition. 12. In the dashboard, notice that the default transition type is Corner Plane. This corner has a different geometry case than the previously selected corner. 13. Click Preview Feature .
Module 7 | Page 62
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down list.
15. Select the upper three-way transition and edit its type to Corner Plane. 16. Click Complete Feature .
17. Click Edge Chamfer 19. Edit the D value to 2, if necessary.
20. Right-click and select Show transitions. 21. Notice that there are no corner transitions. 22. Right-click and select Back to sets. 23. Drag the D value to 4.
24. In the dashboard, click Transition Mode .
PT
25. Select the corner transition and edit its type to Patch in the dashboard.
In
Fo r
28. Click in the Optional surface collector and select the top surface. 29. Edit the Radius to 2 in the dashboard.
30. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC
te rn
. . .
al
Module 7 | Page 63
U se
nl y
18. Select the upper-right edge.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 64
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
8
U se O te rn al
Module 8 | Page 1
Relations and Parameters

Module Overview
You can incorporate your design intent into models by using mathematical relations, which enable you to incorporate additional design intent. You can also add additional data to your models using model parameters. In this module, you learn how to create relations and parameters in design models.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the theory behind relations. Understand the various relation types. Understand basic and advanced relation operators and functions. Understand exact relations. Create parameters and relations. Create relations for patterns. Create section relations. Use the EvalGraph function. Create simultaneous equations.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Understanding Relation Theory

Relations are user-defined equations written between dimensions and/or parameters.
Uses: Control effects of modifications Define dimension values based on other dimensions Set min./max. constraints Conditional relationships between dimensions Relation syntax: Symbolic dimension name Parameter name Naming dimensions: d1 versus HEIGHT Equation types: Equality Comparison Modifying relation-driven dimensions. Order of operations.
Figure 1 Viewing Dimension Symbolic Names
Fo r
Relations are user-defined equations written between dimensions and/or parameters. Relations let you capture design intent by defining relationships within sketches, features, parts, or assembly components. Relations can be simple assignments, equations, or complex, conditional, branching statements. The relation equations themselves are simply stored in the model.
Relation Uses

You can use relations in the following ways: To control the effects of modifications on models. To define values for dimensions based on other dimensions. To set minimum or maximum constraints for dimension values. To describe conditional relationships between dimensions.
Relation Syntax
You compose a relation using the symbolic dimension name, as shown in Figure 1, or parameter name. An example of a relation is, d1=d2+d3. The dimension values switch to their symbolic names when using the Relations dialog box, a portion of which is shown in Figure 2.
PT
Understanding Relation Theory
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Section of Relations Dialog Box
U se
nl y
You can also click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch or view a dimension's properties and view the contents of the Symbols Name field.
Naming Dimensions
You can edit the properties for a dimension, and give it a meaningful name. For example, instead of d1 and d2, you could edit the dimension names to WIDTH and HEIGHT. These names can then be used in the relation. If a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically reflected in the relation.
The following two types of equations are:
If a dimension is driven by a relation, the dimension cannot be modified directly. You can edit the relation that is driving it, or remove that dimension from the relation. For example, if you type the relation d0=d1+d2, you cannot modify d0 directly. You must modify d1 or d2, or edit the relation to change the value of d0. If a dimension name is modified, the change is automatically reflected in the relation.
Fo r
Order of Operations
Relations are not evaluated until the model is regenerated. During a regeneration, relations are evaluated in the following order: 1. At the beginning of a regeneration, the system solves model relations in the order in which they were typed in. 2. In an assembly, the assembly relations are calculated first. Then the system calculates all sub-assembly relations in order of component placement. This means that all sub-assembly relations are calculated before any features or components begin regeneration. 3. The system starts regenerating features in the order of creation. If a feature is attached to feature relations, these relations are solved before regenerating that feature. 4. If you specified any relations as Post Regeneration, the system solves these relations after the regeneration is complete.
PT
In
Modifying Dimensions Driven by Relations
te rn
Equality Equates a parameter on the left side of the equation with an expression on the right side. This type of relation is used for assigning values to dimensions and parameters. For example: Simple assignments: d3=25, d3=HOLE_DIA, or d5=d2/3 More complex assignment: d5=LENGTH * (SQRT (d7 / 3 + d4) ) Comparison Compares an expression on the left side of the equation with an expression on the right side. This type of relation is commonly used as a constraint or in conditional statements for logical branching. For example: Simple constraint: d6>30 More complex constraint: (d1+d2)>(d3+2.5) Conditional statement: IF(d0+3)>=10, d3=30
al
U se
nl y
Equation Types
Understanding Relation Types

There are numerous types of relations that can be created within a Creo Parametric model.
Types include: Section Feature Part Assembly Inherited Pattern Skeleton Component Specify a feature and model in a relation Rules
Figure 1 Sketcher Dimensions
Section relations Relations created in Sketcher to control geometry of complex sections. The relation is calculated with the sketch. In Figure 1, the Sketcher dimensions displayed can be used in the creation of a Section relation. Feature relations Relations added to a selected feature. During a part regeneration, these relations are resolved after part relations, but before the regeneration of the feature to which they apply. You can use feature relations to change feature geometry after part relations are applied and some features have been regenerated. In Figure 2, the feature dimensions displayed can be used in the creation of a Feature relation. Part relations Relations added on a part level. During a part regeneration, these relations can be calculated before or after the part features are regenerated. Part relations are typically the most common type of relation created between model features. The feature dimensions displayed in Figure 2 can be used in the creation of a Part relation. Assembly relations You can write relations to control geometry between components, either by using session ID or component ID.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 4
PT
There are numerous types of relations that can be created within a Creo Parametric model. The types of relations that can be created include:
Understanding Relation Types
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Feature Dimensions
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Specifying a Feature and Model in a Relation
Fo r
However, if you write a relation in the features parent model (part or assembly) or in another feature, you must use one of the following formats to reference that feature: d2 = parameter_name:fid_#, where # is the feature ID (obtained by clicking from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon) Feature d2 = parameter_name:fid_N, where N is the feature Name In Assembly mode, you can access a user parameter in a feature of another model by adding the session ID: d2 = parameter_name:fid_#:session_id d2 = parameter_name:fid_N:session_id
Rules for Creating Relations in Parts

The following rules apply to creating or modifying relations in parts: Driven variables can be as follows: Dimensions in the part, for example, d#.
PT
You can write relations that use the parameters of a feature. Within a feature relation, you can identify a feature parameter attached to that feature by the parameter name. For example: d2 = parameter_name.
In
te rn
from the Investigate group in the Tools tab of the ribbon and then selecting a component and clicking Apply. The name and component ID display in the message window. Inherited relations Access relations from an inheritance feature from Part and Assembly modes. Pattern relations Access relations specific to a pattern in the Part or Assembly mode. Skeleton relations Access relations for a skeleton model in Assembly mode. Component relations Access relations for an assembly component.
al
U se
Using session ID If you refer to a parameter that belongs to another model, the parameter must include the Session ID of the referenced model. The format for assembly relations is as follows: parameter_in_driven_model:session_id = parameter_in_driving_ model:session_id You can determine the session ID from the Relations dialog box by clicking Show > Session ID or by selecting the desired object type, whether Assembly, Part, or Skeleton, and then selecting a component. The name and session ID display in the message window. Using component ID When creating a relation in Assembly mode, you may need to use a component's internal ID. Every component in an assembly has a unique component ID, even if two components have the same component name and the same session ID. Use the following syntax when referencing a component ID: d#:cid_(component ID #), or d2:CID(2), for example. You can determine the component internal ID by clicking Component
nl y
User parameters in the part, for example, parameter_name. User parameters in features, for example, parameter_name:fid_N or parameter_name:fid_feature_name. Driving variables can be the same as the driven variables. For example, d2 = d2 +d3. In addition, you can use Reference dimensions from the part (rd#), or Analysis feature measurements in the following format: measurement_name:fid_N measurement_name:fid_feature_name
Rules for Creating Relations in Features

The rules for creating relations in features are as follows: Feature relations are saved with the feature, and stay with it regardless of the model in which the feature is used. Feature relations are evaluated after part relations and they are solved when the feature to which they belong is regenerated. Therefore, if a relation performs geometry evaluation (such as the distance between two points), it can provide different results depending on whether it is used as a feature relation or as a part relation. Note that you can modify existing model parameters by name from the feature level.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions

You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators when writing a relation.
Commenting Use /* Symbols d#, for example Predefined variables PI, for example Arithmetic +, , /, *, ^, ( ) Assignment Equal sign = Mathematical functions sin (), cos (), tan (), for example Mass properties
Understanding Basic Relation Operators and Functions
Commenting
Fo r
/* Width is equal to 2*height d1=2*d2
The comment should precede the relation to which it applies. This way, when relations are sorted, the comment moves with the relation and remains above it.
Symbols
The various dimension types use a symbolic code followed by an index number: Dimensions The following are the different dimension syntaxes: d# Dimensions in Part or Assembly mode. d#:# Dimensions in a component in Assembly mode. The session ID of the assembly or component is added as a suffix. rd# Reference dimensions in a part or top-level assembly.
PT
It is a best practice to use comments in your relations. Comments can help you remember why you added the relation. They also benefit others who use your models. Every comment line must begin with a forward slash and an asterisk, and then the relation follows on the next line. For example:
In
You can utilize many different basic mathematical functions and operators when writing a relation.
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Relations Dialog Box
nl y
rd#:# Reference dimensions in Assembly mode. The session ID of assembly or component is added as a suffix. ad# Associative (Driven) dimensions in Part, Assembly, or Drawing mode. Sketcher These dimension symbols are used in Sketcher relations: sd# Dimensions in Sketcher mode. rsd# Reference dimensions in Sketcher. kd# Known dimensions in Sketcher. A dimension created between existing geometry (not between section entities) is given this symbol. Patterns Displayed as p#, where # is the number of instances in the pattern. Direction patterns in two directions have two p#'s. Note that if you edit the instance number to a non-integer value, the system truncates it. For example, 2.90 becomes 2 pattern instances. Tolerances Parameters associated with tolerance formats. You must enable tolerances to view these symbols: tpm# Tolerance in plus/minus symmetrical format; # is the dimension number. tp# Positive tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number. tm# Negative tolerance in plus-minus format; # is the dimension number.
The following predefined variables are available: PI = 3.141592654 C2 = 2 G = 9.8 m/sec2 C3 = 3 C1 = 1 C4 = 4
The following arithmetic symbols are available:
Fo r
+ = Addition
PT
Arithmetic Symbols
In
= Subtraction ^ = Exponentiation
te rn
Predefined Variables
* = Multiplication
If you are using negative dimensions, and you want to capture the true signed value in your relation, precede the symbol with a dollar sign (for example, $d20 or $depth). You must do this regardless of the setting for the show_dim_sign configuration option.
Assignment
The assignment symbol = sets one item equal to another item.
Mathematical Functions
The following mathematical functions are available:
al
/ = Division ( ) = Parenthesis for grouping, d0 = (d1d2)*d3
U se
nl y
cos () = Cosine sqrt () = Square root atan () = Arc tangent
tan () = Tangent asin () = Arc sine sinh () = Hyperbolic sine log () = Base 10 logarithm abs () = Absolute value
sin () = Sine acos () = Arc cosine cosh () = Hyperbolic cosine ln () = Natural logarithm
tanh () = Hyperbolic tangent exp () = e to an expoential degree
ceil () = Smallest integer not less than the real value
floor () = Largest integer not greater than the real value
Mass Properties
mp_mass (path) mp_surf_area (path)
mp_cg_y (path1, coord_sys, path2) Where:
In
path = the path to the desired component if in an assembly. If the path is the current model, type (" "). The format is either assy_name.asm : part_name.prt or assy_id : part_id : session_id. path1 = the path format to the component for which the value is to be calculated. coord_sys = the reference coordinate system name. path2 = the path format to the component that contains the coord_sys.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
al
You can calculate mass properties for a given model in a relation. You must set a density value and calculate the mass properties before using these functions. Functions include: mp_volume (path) mp_cg_x (path1, coord_sys, path2)
mp_cg_z (path1, coord_sys, path2)
U se
O
Module 8 | Page 9
nl y
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions

You can also utilize comparison operators and conditional statements when writing a relation.
Comparison operators: ==, <, &, ! Conditional statements: IF, ENDIF, ELSE String functions: <>, itos(int), for example Specify the number of decimal places to ceil and floor.
Figure 1 Viewing Symbolic Dimensions
Fo r
Figure 2 Different Result of ENDIF Statement
PT
In
Understanding Advanced Relation Operators and Functions

You can utilize more advanced mathematical functions and operators when writing a relation, including comparison operators, conditional statements, and string functions.
Using Comparison Operators

Comparison operators are used when a TRUE/FALSE value can be returned. For example, the following relation returns TRUE whenever d1 is greater than or equal to 3.5, and FALSE whenever d1 is less than 3.5: d1 >= 3.5 The following comparison operators are available:
Module 8 | Page 10
te rn
Figure 3 Different Result ENDIF Statement
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
== Equal to
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to <= Less than or equal to ! Not
!=, <>, ~= Not equal to | Or
< Less than
& And
Using Conditional Statements
IF d1 > d2 dia = 25 ENDIF IF d1 <= d2 dia = 60 ENDIF
By adding the ELSE statements in the branches, you can create more complex conditional constructions. With these statements, the previous relation may be modified as follows: IF d1 > d2 dia = 25 ELSE dia = 60 ENDIF
Fo r
There can be several features listed between the IF, ELSE, and the ENDIF statements. In addition, the IF/ELSE/ENDIF constructions can also be nested within feature sequences. Consider the following rules: ENDIF is spelled as one word. ELSE is added on a separate line. Equal to in conditional statements is entered as two equal signs (==). Assignment is entered as a single equal sign (=).
Using String Functions

The following operators and functions are supported for strings: == Compares strings as equal. !=, <>, ~= Compares strings as unequal. + Concatenates strings.
PT
In
te rn
In Figure 2 and Figure 3, this IF statement was used to determine the diameter value. In Figure 2, because d1 is greater than d2, the resulting diameter is 25. In Figure 3, d1 is less than d2, so the resulting diameter is 60.
al
U se
nl y
You can add IF statements to relations to create conditional statements. For example:
itos(int) Converts integers to strings. Here, int can be a number or an expression. Nonintegers are rounded off. search(string, substring) Searches for substrings. The resulting value is the position of the substring in the string (0 if not found). extract(string, position, length) Extracts pieces of strings. The following functions enable you to pass strings as arguments: string_length() Returns the number of characters in a parameter. rel_model_name() Returns the current model name. rel_model_type() Returns the current model type. exists() Evaluates whether an item, such as a parameter or dimension, exists.
Specifying the Number of Decimal Places
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 12
PT
In
ceil (10.2) evaluates to 11 floor (10.2) evaluates to 11 ceil (10.255, 2) evaluates to 10.26 floor (10.255, 1) evaluates to 10.2
te rn
Examples include the following:
al
ceil (parameter_name or a value, number_of_dec_places) floor (parameter_name or a value, number_of_dec_places) where number_of_dec_places is an optional value.
U se
You can add an optional argument to both the ceil and the floor functions that enables you to specify the number of decimal places for rounding. The syntax for functions with the rounding parameter is as follows:
nl y
2012 PTC
Exact Relation
Exact relations prevent rounding errors.
Uses exact value for repeating decimals. No rounding/truncation. Uses parenthesis. Example: OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH.
Exact Relation
The syntax notation to use this option is = (x/y).
Fo r
In the example in Figure 1 and Figure 2, the hole offset from the left edge of the model is desired to be exactly 1/7 of the total length. In this case, the syntax would be: OFFSET = (1/7) * LENGTH
2012 PTC
PT
In earlier versions of the software, the system would round, or truncate, repeating decimals, making exact modeling difficult. Now, you can use exact values in relations; the repeating decimal is not rounded or truncated, and is carried out to a maximum of 14 decimal places. This is particularly useful when you pattern or space features using a fraction that results in a repeating decimal, such as 1/3, 1/6, and 1/7.
In
te rn
al
Figure 1 Exact Relation Result
U se
Module 8 | Page 13
nl y
Creating Parameters
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric information to a model.
Parameter types: Integer Real Number String Yes/No Parameter categories: Local External User-defined System Display parameters in the model tree. Create parameter rules.
Figure 1 Parameters Dialog Box
You can create the following types of parameters: Integer A whole number numerical value, for example, 1, 3, 100, and 267. Real Number Any numerical value, for example, 1.25, 25, 75, and PI. String A series of alphanumeric values (numbers or letters), for example, STEEL, JOHN SMITH, and PTC. Yes/No A parameter whose value is either YES or NO. You can create parameters associated with the following object types: Assembly Part Quilt Curve Material
Fo r
PT
Parameter Types
Parameters enable you to add additional text or numeric information to a model. Example uses for parameters include: capturing non-geometry types of information such as COST or VENDOR, using a numeric parameter to drive dimension values through relations, and defining a parameter value based on other dimension or parameter values. Parameters can also be used with family tables to define different information for each instance, drawings to report information in tables or formats, and data management tools, such as Windchill.
In
Skeleton Feature Surface Composite Curve
te rn
al
Creating Parameters
U se
Edge
Component Inherited
Annotation Element
nl y
Parameter Categories
The following categories of parameters are available: Local parameters Parameters that are created in the current model. You can edit local parameters in the model. External parameters Parameters created outside the current model and used to control some aspects of the model. External parameters cannot be modified in the model. For example, you can add parameters in Layout mode to define certain part dimensions. When you open that part, these part dimensions are controlled from Layout mode and are read-only in the part. Similarly, you can create parameters in the PDM system and apply them to the part. User-defined parameters Additional information that you can attach to geometry. You can add user-defined parameters to an assembly, part, feature, or entity. For example, you can create a COST parameter for each part in the assembly. Then, you can include the COST parameter in your Bill of Materials to calculate the total cost of the assembly. System parameters Parameters defined by the system, for example, the Mass Properties parameter. These parameters are generally read-only. You can use them in relations, but you cannot control their value.
Fo r
Parameter Naming Rules

Consider the following rules for naming user parameters: User parameter names must begin with a letter if they are to be used in relations. You cannot use d#, kd#, rd#, tm#, tp#, or tpm# as user parameter names because they are reserved for use with dimensions. User parameter names cannot contain non-alphanumeric characters such as !, @, #, and $. You cannot change the name of a user parameter once it has been created.
2012 PTC
PT
You can display parameter values in the model tree as a column by using the Model Tree Columns dialog box to add the columns. This enables you to add columns for Feature parameters in a part model and Component parameters in an assembly model. Once the column is added, you can click an empty cell in the column to add the parameter to that feature or component.
In
Displaying and Creating Parameter Values in the Model Tree
te rn
You can create several parameters at once for multiple objects. To do this, press CTRL and select multiple features or components from the model tree. Then, right-click and select Edit Parameters and use the Parameters dialog box to create or edit parameters for all of the selected objects.
al
Creating Multiple Parameters
U se
nl y
Module 8 | Page 15
PROCEDURE - Creating Parameters

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PARAMETERS.PRT
Feature_Tools\Parameters Task 1:
Create parameters in a part model.
Parameters
3. In the Parameters dialog box, notice the default parameters created by the model template. 4. Drag the column widths as necessary to resize them and notice that the existing parameters are of String Type. 5. Select the Value field for the DESCRIPTION parameter. Type Hex Socket Screw.
6. Select the Value field for the MODELED_BY parameter. Type your first initial and last name.
Fo r
7. In the Parameters dialog box, click New Parameter . Edit the Name to COST. Edit the Type to Real Number and type 0.075 as the Value.
and 8. Click New Parameter edit the Name to LOT_QTY. Edit the Type to Integer. Type 100 as the Value.
Module 8 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
9. Click New Parameter and edit the Name to VENDOR. Edit the Type to String and type FASTENERS_123 as the Value. and 10. Click New Parameter edit the Name to PURCHASED. Edit the Type to Yes No. Edit the Value to YES and click OK. 11. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Parameters . 12. In the Parameters dialog box, edit the Look In from Part to Feature. Select feature HEX. 13. Click New Parameter and edit the Name to TOOL_CLEARANCE. Edit the Type to String and type .002 .005 as the Value. Click OK.
Fo r
15. In the Parameters dialog box, edit the Look In from Part to Surface. Select the large cylindrical surface of the bolt head.
16. Click New Parameter and edit the Name to KNURLING. Edit the Type to Yes No and type YES as the Value. Click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
Parameters
14. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select .
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 17
U se
nl y
17. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns. 18. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, edit the Type to Feat Params. Type TOOL_CLEARANCE as the Name and press ENTER. Click OK. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options

The Parameters dialog box enables you to perform additional, more advanced, operations to parameters.
Operations include: Set units Designate Set access Full Limited Locked Source Description Restricted Reordering parameters
Figure 1 Parameters Dialog Box
Understanding Advanced Parameter Options
Units The Unit column defines the units for a parameter from the available list of units. You can only define units for parameters of Real Number type and only while creating a parameter. Designate You can designate selected system and user parameters for use as attributes in Pro/INTRALINK or another PDM system. Access Defines access to the parameter as follows: Full Parameters with full access are user-defined parameters. You can modify these parameters from any application. Limited You can set full access parameters to limited access. You cannot modify parameters with Limited access by a relation. Limited access parameters are modified only through Family Tables and Program. Locked Parameters with locked access are parameters that can be locked either by a user, or by an external application such as a Data Management System, Analysis features, Relations, or Program. You can modify parameters locked by an external application only from within an external application. You cannot modify user-defined locked parameters from within any external application. Source Indicates where the parameter was created or from where it is driven. Description Provides a description for the parameter. Restricted Indicates a restricted value parameter whose properties are defined by an external file. Reordering parameters You can reorder parameters within the Parameters dialog box using the up and down arrows on the right side of
2012 PTC
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
The following advanced parameter options are available within the Parameters dialog box:
al
U se
O
Module 8 | Page 19
nl y
the dialog box. The order is preserved when exiting the Parameters dialog box and when saving the model.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Relations
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols and write relations. It also contains various relation tools.
View dimension symbols: Switch Dimensions Write relation using relation tools. Examples: Equality Constraint Logical Specify regeneration position. Use parameters/create parameters in relations.
Creating Relations
Viewing Dimension Symbols
PT
You can view dimension symbols from the Relations dialog box. The dimension symbols display by default as you select features while in the Relations dialog box. You can also click Switch Dimensions between dimension symbols and values. to switch
Fo r
From the part model, you can view dimension symbols by editing a feature, which displays its dimensions. You can then click the Model Intent group
. You can select a drop-down menu and select Switch Symbols dimension, right-click and select Properties, and then view the symbol in the Name field of the Dimension Text tab.
Writing Relations
You should begin every relation with a comment line (a line starting with /*). You can type the complete relation, or select dimension symbols in the graphics window to insert them into the relation. You can type in math operators and parenthesis directly, or use the icons. The following are examples of relations:
2012 PTC
In
You use the Relations dialog box to view dimension symbols and write relations. It also contains various relation tools.
te rn
al
U se
Module 8 | Page 21
nl y
Equality
d3 = 2.5*d2
d1 = DEPTH
d3 = sin(d1+1) + d2 d1 < (d2*d3) -1 IF MATL == "STEEL" d2 = 10 ENDIF
Constraints Logical
d3 >= 10 IF d1 == 6 d2 = 15 ENDIF
d2 != 100 d1 = d1 + 10 IF d1 > 350 d1 = 5 ENDIF
Editing dimensions such that a constraint is violated, simply creates a warning message, which you can override.
Relation Tools
The following tools are available within the Relations dialog box: Provide Value Enables you to type a dimension symbol, parameter, or a portion of a relation to compute the result.
Select Units Enables you to select a unit to insert. You can also set relations to take units into consideration when computing. Insert Function Insert Parameter
The sort function sorts relations in order of Sort Relations precedence, based on how they are evaluated by the system. If one relation depends on the value of another relation, it is reordered accordingly. Sorting relations helps you detect undesired circular relations. Relations with comment lines can also be sorted. The comment line is attached to the relation below it, and moves with that relation during a sorting. If multiple comment lines precede a relation, they are all attached to that relation. For example, if you type the relations d0=d1+3*d2 and d2=d3+d4, then when you sort them, the system reorders them based on the order in which they are evaluated. Since the first relation needs the value from the second relation, the order is reversed when sorted. Verify Relations
Fo r
Regeneration Position
You can specify the regeneration position as either Initial, where relations are calculated before the first feature, or Post Regeneration, where relations are calculated after the last feature. Initial is the default option.
Module 8 | Page 22
PT
In
Display a complete list of functions for relations. Select a parameter to insert into the relation.
Computes the relations and verifies they are valid.
te rn
Display Dimension it on the model.
Type a dimension symbol or name to highlight
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Using Parameters in Relations

You can access a parameter from a relation, or create a parameter as the result of a relation. For example, you can create a real number parameter named LENGTH, equal to 15. You can then add a relation of d5=LENGTH. When you regenerate the model, the d5 dimension updates to new values as the LENGTH parameter is updated. Note that you can type string values for parameters by enclosing them within quotation marks in relations. You can expand the Relations dialog box to display the Parameters dialog box.
Creating Parameters in Relations

You can create or edit a parameter directly from a relation. For example, you can type LENGTH = d5. If the parameter LENGTH did exist previously, the system would modify its value. If the parameter LENGTH did not exist previously, the system would create it as a Real Number parameter.
Best Practices
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Sort relations and verify them often to avoid errors, especially when writing multi-line relations. Test the relation by modifying dimensions and parameters on the model to ensure it works as expected.
U se
nl y
Module 8 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Creating Relations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed RELATIONS.PRT
Feature_Tools\Relations Task 1:
Create relations in a part model.
3. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch Symbols . 4. Notice the dimension symbols are generic in name.
Relations
Fo r
9. Select BOLT_HEAD and BOLT_SHAFT.
10. In the Relations dialog box, type the following comment and press ENTER: /* Adjust HEAD size based on BOLT diameter 11. Type the following logical relations, pressing ENTER after each line: IF BOLT_DIA == 8 HEAD_DIA = 14 HEAD_THK = 7 ENDIF
Module 8 | Page 24
PT
7. Repeat the procedure to edit the name of dimension d2 to HEX_DEPTH.
In
te rn
6. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, edit the Name from d1 to HEX_SIZE. Click OK.
al
2012 PTC
5. Select d1, then right-click and select Properties.
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, right-click HEX and select Edit.
12. Type the comment: /* Adjust HEX size relative to HEAD size 13. Type the relations, pressing ENTER after each line: HEX_SIZE = HEAD_DIA / 2 HEX_DEPTH = HEAD_THK / 1.5
16. Type the comment: /* Constrain the overall model length 17. Type the relation: OVERALL_LENGTH <= 40 18. Click Verify Relations
20. Right-click BOLT_SHAFT and select Edit.
Fo r
21. Edit the BOLT_DIA to 8. 22. Edit the bolt length from 15 to 25 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
2012 PTC
PT
19. Expand the Local Parameters pane and notice the OVERALL_LENGTH parameter and its value of 21. Click OK.
In
te rn
and click OK.
al
Module 8 | Page 25
U se
15. Type the relation: OVERALL_LENGTH = HEAD_THK + BOLT_LENGTH
nl y
14. Type the comment: /* Create a parameter value
23. Edit the bolt length from 25 to 35 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 24. Notice the warning message. 25. Click No in the Confirmation dialog box to stop regeneration. 26. Click Close in the Information Window.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
27. Select the BOLT_LENGTH check box from the menu manager and click Done Sel > Done/Return.
Creating Relations for Patterns

You can use relations to control pattern increments and quantities.
Pattern increments: d# Pattern quantities: p# Relations with linear patterns Control linear pattern spacing: d1 = 100 / p1 Control the quantity: p1 = 100 / d1 Relations with angular patterns Control angular pattern spacing: d1 = 360 / p1 Control the quantity: p1 = 360 / d1
Figure 1 Controlling Linear Spacing
Creating Relations for Patterns
Fo r
You can use relations to control pattern increments and quantities. Pattern increments display like a standard dimension with symbol d#. Pattern quantities display with symbol p#. If you have a pattern in two directions, you will see p# displayed twice.
Using Relations with Linear Patterns

You can use relations with various linear patterns, including Direction and Dimension patterns. For example, given spacing dimension d1 and pattern quantity p1, you could: Control the linear pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example d1 = 100 / p1. Control the quantity based on a given linear pattern spacing, for example p1 = 100 / d1.
PT
In
Figure 2 Controlling Angular Spacing
te rn
al
U se
nl y
In Figure 1, a relation has been created that controls the linear spacing based on the pattern quantity. When the number of pattern members is decreased, they remain equally spaced due to the relation.
Using Relations with Rotational Patterns

You can also use relations with rotational patterns, including Axis and Dimension patterns. For example, given angle d1 and pattern quantity p1, you could: Control the angular pattern spacing based on a given quantity, for example d1 = 360 / p1. Control the quantity based on a given angular pattern spacing, for example p1 = 360 / d1. In Figure 2, a relation has been created that controls the quantity of pattern members based on the angular spacing value. In the left image of Figure 2, the relation has not yet been created. In the middle image, the relation has been applied and the quantity has increased based on the spacing value to maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees. In the right image, the spacing value has been increased. To maintain equal spacing about 360 degrees, the quantity has been automatically reduced. When using a Dimension pattern, it is necessary to use these types of relations to maintain equal pattern spacing around a given angle. However with the Axis pattern, you can use the Set Angular Extent option to achieve the same result without a relation.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Relations for Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed RELATION_PATTERN.PRT
Feature_Tools\Relation_Patterns Task 1:
Create relations to control the spacing of features in a part model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Right-click DIR_PATTERN and select Edit. Select the 5 EXTRUDES dimension, then right-click and select Properties. Edit the Name to VERT_QTY and click OK. Repeat the process to edit the 10 spacing dimension name to SPACING. 3. De-select all geometry.
Relations
6. Select the front-left, oval extrude, and select the base protrusion.
Fo r
7. Notice that the other dimensions have already been renamed.
2012 PTC
PT
5. Type the comment and press ENTER: /* Adjust spacing and offset based on vertical pattern quantity and length
In
te rn
4. Click the Model Intent group drop-down list and select
al
Module 8 | Page 29
U se
nl y
8. Type the following relations, pressing ENTER after each line: OFFSET = LENGTH / (VERT_QTY+1) SPACING = OFFSET 9. Click OK. and notice 10. Click Regenerate that the pattern spacing is equal to the spacing from both ends.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
11. Right-click DIR_PATTERN and select Edit. Edit the quantity from 5 EXTRUDES to 4 and click . Regenerate
nl y
Creating Section Relations

Section Relations are relations typically created in Sketcher mode involving dimensions of the current section.
Symbolic section dimension symbols: sd# Sketcher dimension rsd# Reference Sketcher dimension kd# Known Sketcher dimension Advantages of Section relations: Real time dimension updates. Relation is regenerated with the feature in which it resides.
Fo r
Figure 2 Showing Numeric Sketcher Dimensions
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Showing Updated Sketcher Dimensions
Creating Section Relations

Section Relations (also referred to as Sketcher relations) are relations typically created in Sketcher mode and involve dimensions of the current section. However, you can also create a section relation from the part level by selecting the Section option in the Relations dialog box, and then selecting a feature. When writing relations between section dimensions, you must use the symbolic section dimension symbols: sd# Dimensions in Sketcher mode. rsd# Reference dimensions in Sketcher. kd# Known dimensions in Sketcher. This symbol is given to a dimension created between existing geometry (not between section entities). The top and right dimensions in Figure 1 are known dimensions in the Sketch.
al
U se
Figure 1 Showing Symbolic Sketcher Dimensions
nl y
Advantages of Writing Section Relations

The advantages of writing a section relation as opposed to a part relation are: The relation is active in Sketcher mode, so you can change Sketcher dimensions and view the relations take effect. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, a relation was written that centered the cut feature in the middle of the main base protrusion. When the relation was applied, the driven rectangle dimensions automatically updated in real time. The relation is regenerated along with the feature in which it resides.
Tips for Writing Section Relations

Relations that define dimensions other than section dimensions are best defined at the feature or part level. You cannot reference a parameter in another feature as a driving variable. For example, if dia is a dimension in another feature with fid_20, the system does not accept the following section relationship: sd3 = dia:fid_20 However, you can establish the same relationship at the feature level or model level by using the model-level equivalent (d#) of the section dimension (sd#). Alternatively, you can create an intermediate user parameter in the parent model, and then reference it from the section. If you try to assign a relation outside of the section to a parameter that is already driven by another relation in the section, the system issues an error message upon regeneration. The same applies if you try to assign relations to a parameter in a section that is already being driven by a relation outside the section. Remove one of the relations and regenerate again.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Keep the following in mind when writing relations within Sketched sections:
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Section Relations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SECTION_REL.PRT
Feature_Tools\Section_Relations Task 1:
Create section relations in a part model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient to the FRONT view. 3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. Notice the dimensions, and notice that there are no overall width or height dimensions to use in a relation.
4. Edit the definition of Extrude 2. 5. Right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:
Fo r
8. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, then click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations . 9. In the Relations dialog box, type the comment: /* Change width based on height
10. Type the relation: sd1 = 2.25 * sd7 11. Click OK to update the dimensions.
2012 PTC
PT
In
7. Review the dimension scheme.
te rn
.
al
Module 8 | Page 33
U se
nl y
12. Edit the height from 0.5 to 1. 13. Notice that the dimensions update in Sketcher because of the relation. If this relation was written as a part relation, you would not be able to view the dimension update in Sketcher.
14. In the ribbon, select the Sketch and tab, then click Normal dimension the overall height and width of the model. Dimensioning existing geometry to existing geometry creates a known dimension (kd#).
15. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, then click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations
Fo r
17. Type the relations: sd12 = kd13 / 2 sd10 = kd14 / 2
18. Click OK to update the dimensions.
19. In the ribbon, select the Sketch tab, then click OK . 20. Click Complete Feature .
Module 8 | Page 34
PT
16. In the Relations dialog box, type the comment: /* Center sketch on model
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Using the Evalgraph Function

The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph features to drive dimensions through relations.
Relation syntax: y = evalgraph(graph_name, x) graph_name = name of graph feature. x = value along X-axis of graph for which the y value is returned. x can be the value specified by a dimension.
In
te rn
Figure 2 Feature with Width of 8
Fo r
Using the Evalgraph Function

The Datum Graph evaluation function enables you to use graph features to drive dimensions through relations. The dimensions can be section, part, or assembly dimensions. The syntax for using Evalgraph in a relation is: evalgraph("graph_name", x) where: graph_name The name of a graph feature. x The value along the X-axis of the graph for which the y value is returned. A relation was written that uses the graph feature shown in Figure 1. The relation controls the feature height using feature width based on the graph. In Figure 2, the feature width is 8; using the graph in Figure 1, you can determine that the associated height is 4. In Figure 3, the feature width is 12.5; using the graph in Figure 1, you can determine that the associated height is slightly more than 2 (it is 2.33).
PT
al
Figure 3 Feature with Width of 12.5
U se
Figure 1 Graph Feature Controlling Feature Height
nl y
For variable section sweep features, you can also specify the trajectory parameter trajpar in the function. The following is an example of using Evalgraph in a relation: d1 = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" , d2) In this case, you control dimension d1 throughout the relation. When d2 is modified on the model, the system evaluates this value as the x-value using the specified graph, and returns with the corresponding y-value for d1. You can also involve Evalgraph in more complex relations, for example: d1 = 1.5* EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1", d2+d3*sin(d4) ) A graph feature is usually evaluated for its defined X-axis values. When it is evaluated beyond the defined range, the Y-axis values are extrapolated. The system calculates the extrapolated y value for values of x that are less than the initial value by extending a tangent line back from the initial point. Similarly, the system calculates the extrapolated y value for values of x that are greater than the final value, by extending a tangent line out from the final point. When you create a section relation of a graph feature, for example, sd1=evalgraph("CONIC", trajapar*5), this relation becomes a feature relation. Feature relations are evaluated after part relations and are solved when the feature to which they belong is regenerated. Therefore, if a relation performs geometry evaluation (for example, the distance between two points), it can provide different results if used as a section relation as opposed to being used as a part relation.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Using the Evalgraph Function

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EVALGRAPH.PRT
Feature_Tools\Evalgraph Task 1:
Use the Evalgraph function in a relation to control a features height.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. Edit the 2 dimension name to WIDTH. Edit the 10 dimension name to HEIGHT.
6. Click OK
Fo r
7. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations . 8. Type the comment /* Control HEIGHT by changing WIDTH, based on GRAPH1 and press ENTER. 9. Select the feature and select dimension HEIGHT.
10. In the Relations dialog box, type =EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1" , WIDTH) and click OK. 11. Click Regenerate .
2012 PTC
PT
5. Notice that the graph is an x-y function. .
In
te rn
3. Edit the definition of GRAPH1, click Done from the menu manager, and press ENTER to accept the default name.
al
Module 8 | Page 37
U se
nl y
12. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 13. Notice that the height dimension updated for the current width. 14. Double-click the 6.67 height dimension to edit it. 15. Notice the message in the message window.
18. Click Line Chain and sketch a new diagonal line on the end. 19. Click Normal and create the horizontal and vertical endpoint dimensions, editing as shown. 20. Click OK .
Fo r
23. Notice that the height has updated for the new width based on the graph.
Module 8 | Page 38
PT
22. Edit the 8 width dimension to 12.5 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
17. Edit the definition of GRAPH1, click Done from the menu manager, and press ENTER to accept the default name.
nl y
16. Edit the 2 width dimension to 8 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
Using Simultaneous Equations

Simultaneous equations are relations in which several variables or dimensions must be solved simultaneously.
Procedure: Define known values. Place SOLVE on a line. Type simultaneous equations. Type FOR and variables to be computed. Rules: Must declare variables used in beginning of equation. System returns only one result, even if more than one is possible. You can intermix simultaneous equations with single variable relations.
Figure 1 Relation and Variable Definition
Fo r
Figure 2 Solution with Depth of 16
PT
In
Using Simultaneous Equations

In some cases, it may not be possible or convenient to arrange the desired relation so that only the driven dimension is on the left side of the equation. In such cases, the relation can be set up so that the system can solve a set of simultaneous equations for the desired variables. Simultaneous equations are relations in which several variables or dimensions must be solved simultaneously.
Setting Up Simultaneous Equations

To set up a set of equations to be solved, use the following procedure: Define the known values. Place SOLVE on a line of the relation. Type the equations to be solved simultaneously.
te rn
Figure 3 Solution with Depth of 10
al
U se
nl y
Type FOR and then indicate the variables to be computed, separated with commas.
Rules for Creating Simultaneous Equations

Consider these rules for creating simultaneous equations: You must declare variables used in simultaneous equations in the beginning of the equations. When solving the simultaneous equation, the system returns only one set of results, even if more than one solution for the system of equations is possible. You can intermix simultaneous equations with single variable relations.
Simultaneous Equation Examples
You can type the following simultaneous equations: SOLVE
LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT = 320 WIDTH=2*HEIGHT
FOR HEIGHT WIDTH ...or... FOR HEIGHT,WIDTH All lines between the SOLVE and FOR statements become part of the simultaneous equations. The FOR line lists the variables to be solved (note that there are two possible variations). Any variables that appear in the simultaneous equations, but do not appear in the FOR list, are interpreted as constants. Alternatively, you can set the same conditions by typing the following simultaneous equations: VOLUME = 320 SOLVE VOLUME=LENGTH*WIDTH*HEIGHT WIDTH=2*HEIGHT FOR HEIGHT WIDTH Figure 2 and Figure 3 display variations of the model where the DEPTH was edited to different values.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
The volume remains constant at 320. The width is twice the height. The length is variable.
U se
For example, you have a box with dimension defined by the parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, and DEPTH, and you want to specify the following conditions:
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using Simultaneous Equations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SIMULTANEOUS.PRT
Feature_Tools\Simultaneous_Eq Task 1:
Use simultaneous equations in a relation.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 3. Notice the 16 depth dimension, 20 height dimension, and 40 width dimension.
4. Edit the 16 dimension name to DEPTH.
7. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Relations
Fo r
8. In the Relations dialog box, type the comment /* solve simultaneous equations for height and width and press ENTER. Select the feature to display the dimensions, if necessary. Type volume = 320 and press ENTER. Type SOLVE and press ENTER. Type volume =, select dimension HEIGHT, and click x. Select dimension WIDTH and click x. Select dimension DEPTH and press ENTER. Type width = 2*height and press ENTER. Type FOR height, width.
2012 PTC
PT
6. Edit the 40 dimension name to WIDTH.
In
5. Edit the 20 dimension name to HEIGHT.
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 41
U se
nl y
In this example, the volume of a rectangular solid is to remain constant. The width is to be twice the height. The depth value must be variable. The system should solve the necessary equations and return the dimensions for height and width.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Regenerate and notice the geometry update.
13. Notice the new 3.16 height dimension.
16. Notice the message in the message window.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 42
PT
15. Double-click the 3.16 height dimension and try to edit it.
14. Notice the new 6.32 width dimension, which is twice the height.
In
te rn
12. Notice that the 16 depth dimension stayed the same.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
17. Edit the depth from 16 to 10 and . click Regenerate 18. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 19. Notice the 10 depth dimension, the 4 height dimension, and the 8 width dimension. 20. Notice that the width is still twice the height.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 43
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 44
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
9
U se O te rn al
Module 9 | Page 1
Advanced Blends
Module Overview
Beyond creating Parallel Blends, you can create Rotational Blends to create advanced geometry efficiently. This blend type enables you to create more advanced geometry, and have additional control over the blend sections and resulting blend shape. In this module, you learn how to create Rotational Blends and change their attributes.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create blends by selecting non-parallel sections. Analyze blend section tools. Analyze blend tangency. Create rotational blends by selecting and sketching sections. Define rotational blend tangency. Define rotational blend options.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel Sections

You can create a blend feature by selecting existing sketches or sections, or chains or loops of a models existing feature edges.
A blend feature must contain two or more sections. Selected sections can be non-parallel. Selected sections are connected using a smooth curve. Sections are blended based on selection order. You can reorder or remove sections.
Figure 1 Viewing Existing Geometry
Fo r
Figure 2 Blending Between Two Non-Parallel Sections
PT
In
Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel Sections

You create blend features when you need to create models that contain different transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables you to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but then changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the feature. Blend features can add or remove material.
Selecting the Sections

A blend feature must contain two or more sections. You can select existing sketches or sections, or chains or loops of a models existing feature edges. You can use any of the following chain selection techniques: One-by-one Enables you to select adjacent edges one at a time along a continuous path.
te rn
Figure 3 Blending Between Three Non-Parallel Sections
al
U se
nl y
Tangent chain Enables you to select all the edges that are tangent to an anchor edge. Surface loop Enables you to select a loop of edges on a surface. Surface loop from to Enables you to select a range of edges from the surface loop. Boundary Enables you to select the outermost boundaries of a quilt. From-to Boundary loop Enables you to select a range of edges from the boundary. The sections you select can be parallel or non-parallel. By default, the system connects the selected sections together using a smooth curve. The geometry updates as you change the angles between the sections. Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two exceptions to this rule: The blend can start or end as a single point. You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.
Consider the following regarding manipulating selected blend sections: By default, sections are blended together in the order of selection. However, you can always move sections up or down in the blend order. You can remove sections. The offset, or depth, between sections is based on the selected sections depth with respect to the other selected sections. You cannot specify a different depth. When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To make a given section the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes color, and all right-mouse click options pertain to this active section. In Figure 3, Section 3 is the active section.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Manipulating Selected Sections
In
The start point arrow direction can be flipped, but this does not affect blending.
te rn
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can individually drag the start point for each section to a different vertex in that section.
al
Section Start Points
U se
nl y
Module 9 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Creating Blends by Selecting Non-Parallel Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed
Blend\Select-Sections_Non-Parallel_Solid BLEND_SELECT_2.PRT Task 1: Create a blend between existing model edges.
4. Select the left, vertical edge. 5. Press SHIFT and query-select the surface loop from to over the upper, short edge.
7. Select the left, vertical edge.
Fo r
8. Press SHIFT and query-select the loop over the upper, short edge.
Module 9 | Page 4
PT
6. On the Sections tab, click Insert.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select Selected sections.
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend .
nl y
9. Notice the blending between the model edges. 10. Notice that the sections are non-parallel.
from
Fo r
2. Edit the definition of Blend 1. 3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab to view the progress. 4. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert.
5. Select the middle section. 6. Notice this section is #3 in the blending sequence.
2012 PTC
PT
In
1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Unhide.
te rn
Task 2:
Add a section and edit its angle.
al
Module 9 | Page 5
U se
12. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
nl y
7. Right-click over the #3 Section 3 leader note and select Reorder Up. 8. Notice that Section 3 is now #2 in the blending sequence.
Fo r
14. Drag the handle to the left approximately 15 degrees, as shown. 15. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to de-select all geometry.
Module 9 | Page 6
PT
13. Right-click datum plane ANGLE2, and select Edit.
12. In the model tree, expand Sketch 1.
In
11. Orient to view orientation RIGHT.
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
9. Drag the start point to the upper-left.
nl y
Analyzing Blend Section Tools

Blend section tools enable you to achieve the desired blend result.
Tools include: Blend vertex Blending to a point
PT
Figure 2 Added Blend Vertices Create Equal Entities
In
te rn
Figure 3 Blending to a Point
Analyzing Blend Section Tools
Fo r
The blend feature includes two helpful tools to achieve the desired blend result: blend vertices and blending to a point.
Blend Vertices
Each section of a blend must always contain an equal number of entities. For sections that do not have enough geometric entities, you can add blend vertices. Blend vertices enable a sections vertices to converge or diverge. In Figure 1, the first blend section has six vertices, while the second blend section has only four vertices. Consequently, two blend vertices have been added to the section with only four vertices, as shown in Figure 2. When creating blends by sketching sections, you add the blend vertices within the section you are sketching. Select the desired vertex, right-click, and select Blend Vertex. When creating blends by selecting sections, you add blend vertices by clicking Add Blend Vertex from within the Sections tab in the blend tools
al
U se
Figure 1 Sections Have Different Number of Entities
nl y
dashboard. By default, the blend vertex is created at the next vertex from the start point direction. You can then drag it to the desired location. The Blend tool keeps track of the number of entities per section. Each added blend vertex counts as an entity. Figure 4 displays the number of entities per section for the feature in Figure 1. The number of entities between sections is not equal, therefore the feature cannot be created.
Blending to a Point
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 8
PT
In
A blend can start or end as a single point, as shown in Figure 3. This is the one exception to the rule that blend sections must contain the same number of entities.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
Figure 5 displays the number of entities per section for the feature in Figure 2. There is now an equal number of entities between sections because blend vertices have been added at the two upper corners. The feature can now be created.
Figure 5 Equal Numbers of Entities
U se
nl y
Figure 4 Different Numbers of Entities
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blend Section Tools

Close Window Erase Not Displayed BLEND_SECTION-TOOLS.PRT
Blend\Section-Tools_Solid Task 1:
Create a blend vertex on a selected section.
3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab.
5. Select a front edge of the model. 6. Press SHIFT and select the front surface loop. 7. Drag the start point to the lower-left vertex.
10. Notice that the blend preview does not display. This is because the entity count per section does not match.
Fo r
11. On the Sections tab, click Add Blend Vertex.
12. The blend vertex appears at the lower-right. 13. Drag the blend vertex to the upper-left.
2012 PTC
PT
9. Select the rectangle sketch as the section.
In
8. Right-click in the graphics window and select Insert.
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 9
U se
4. In the graphics window, right-click and select Selected sections.
nl y
14. Click Add Blend Vertex again. 15. The blend vertex appears at the lower-right. 16. Drag the blend vertex to the upper-right. 17. Notice that the blend preview now displays successfully. This is because the entity count per section now matches.
Task 2:
Create a blend vertex on a sketched section.
2. Right-click and select Sketched sections. 3. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 4. Select the front surface and click Sketch.
In
te rn
al
U se
.
2012 PTC
20. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 6. Click Project from the Sketching group. 7. Select Loop as the Type and select the front model surface. Click Close.
Fo r
8. Select the lower-left vertex, right-click, and select Start Point. 9. Right-click and select OK.
Module 9 | Page 10
PT
19. In the model, right-click Sketch 2 and select Hide.
nl y
from
10. Edit the offset value to 150. 11. Right-click and select Sketch. 12. Select Corner Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 13. Sketch and dimension a rectangle symmetric about the vertical reference, with the bottom edge on the horizontal reference. 14. If necessary, set the start point to the lower-left vertex. 15. Select the upper-left vertex, right-click, and select Blend Vertex. 16. Select the upper-right vertex, right-click, and select Blend Vertex. 17. Right-click and select OK. 18. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
Task 3:
1. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend . 2. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 3. Select the front surface and click Sketch.
2012 PTC
PT
Create a blend feature that blends to a point.
In
te rn
.
al
Module 9 | Page 11
U se
nl y
4. Click Project , select Loop as the Type, and select the front model surface. Click Close. 5. Select the lower-left vertex, right-click, and select Start Point, if necessary. 6. Right-click and select OK.
8. Right-click and select Sketch. 9. Click Point from the Sketching group. 10. Place a point at the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references.
11. Right-click and select OK.
Fo r
PT
Module 9 | Page 12
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Edit the offset value to 75.
Analyzing Blend Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent feature geometry.
For Smooth blend option only. Specify tangency for Start and End sections independently. You must select a tangent surface for each blend section segment. Blend to a point cap type: Sharp Smooth
Fo r
Figure 2 Blend Feature, Tangency Applied at Start and End Sections
PT
In
Analyzing Blend Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent feature geometry. You can define tangency only for blends created using the Smooth blend option, and you can define it at both the Start Section and End Section independently. The following types of tangency options are available: Free No tangency is applied. The system blends as if there are no adjacent surfaces. Normal Enables you to blend the features surfaces normal to the blend section plane. Whether sketching or selecting sections, the Blend tool computes a planar section, and the blend is normal to that blend section plane.
te rn
Figure 3 Sharp Versus Smooth Tangency for Blend to Point
al
U se
Figure 1 Blend Feature, No Tangency Applied
nl y
Tangent Enables you to blend the features surfaces tangent to the adjacent features surfaces. You must select the corresponding adjacent surface of each blend segment. For cases where you blend to a point, there are two different cap types available: Sharp No tangency is applied at the point. This results in the blend ending at a sharp point, as shown in the left image of Figure 3. Smooth Blends to the point with lines tangent at the point, as shown in the right image of Figure 3.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Blend Tangency

Close Window Erase Not Displayed BLEND_TANGENT_1.PRT
Blend\Tangency_Solid Task 1:
Define tangency for a blend with selected sections.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Blend 1.
Fo r
The system is setting blend surfaces normal to the section plane. Because the adjacent purple geometry is an extrude feature, its surfaces are also normal to the section plane. Thus, the surfaces are 180 degrees from each other, and therefore essentially tangent. from
4. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. 5. In the model tree, expand Extrude 2. 6. Right-click datum plane ANGLE3, and select Edit.
7. Edit the angle to 30 degrees. 8. Notice that the blend tangency updates. 9. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to de-select all geometry.
2012 PTC
PT
In
3. In the dashboard, select the Tangency tab. For the Start Section boundary, select Normal from the Condition drop-down list. For the End Section boundary, select Normal from the Condition drop-down list.
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Experiment with tangency for a blend with sketched sections.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar. 2. Select BLEND_TANGENT_2. PRT and click Open. 3. Edit the definition of Blend 2. 4. Orient to the TOP view orientation. 5. In the dashboard, select the Tangency tab. For the Start Section boundary, select Normal from the Condition drop-down list. For the End Section boundary, select Normal from the Condition drop-down list. 6. Click Complete Feature .
8. Edit the angle to 20 and click twice in the background. 9. Edit the definition of Blend 2 again.
Fo r
11. Press CTRL+D.
12. Select the Tangency tab. For the Start Section boundary, select Tangent from the Condition drop-down list. Select the corresponding surface adjacent to the highlighted edge.
13. Select the corresponding adjacent surface for the next five highlighted edges.
Module 9 | Page 16
PT
10. Notice that the feature surfaces are normal to the blend section plane but not tangent to the purple surfaces.
In
te rn
7. In the model tree, right-click Draft 1 and select Edit.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
14. Orient to the TOP view orientation. 15. Notice that the feature surfaces are now tangent to the purple surfaces. 16. Click Complete Feature Task 3: .
Define tangency for a blend with an endpoint.
2. Select the Tangency tab. Notice that the Start Section boundary is currently set at Free.
5. Press CTRL+D.
Fo r
6. For the End Section boundary, select Smooth from the Condition drop-down list. 7. Click Complete Feature .

PT
4. Notice that the End Section boundary is currently set at Sharp.
In
te rn
al
3. For the Start Section boundary, select Normal from the Condition drop-down list.
U se
nl y
1. Edit the definition of Blend 3.
Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections

You can create a rotational blend feature by selecting existing sections that are organized radially about a common axis.
Sections organized radially about a common axis. Sections must be less than 180 degrees apart.
Figure 1 Completed Blend
Figure 2 Radial Section Locations
PT
In
Fo r
Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections

The rotational blend feature enables the blending of non-planar sections, as shown in Figure 1. In addition to sketching sections, you can also select geometry for the sections of rotational blend features. The sections must be organized around a common axis of rotation. Selecting geometry for blend sections is similar to using the Project functionality because it enables you to pick geometry from existing curves or edges.
Selecting the Sections

You can select existing model geometry or sketched curves for use as the sections of a rotational blend. The sections must be organized radially
te rn
Figure 3 Selected Sections
al
U se
nl y
around a common axis as shown in Figure 2, and must be less than 180 degrees apart. The selection options for the sections are: One-by-One Chain Enables you to select geometry edges one at a time. Surface Chain Enables you to select a loop of edges or entities. You can select an edge, press SHIFT, and select a surface or face, then the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the desired one. Additional options available when selecting geometry for blend sections include: Add Blend Vertex Enables you to specify a blend vertex to add blend vertices where needed. Move Up/Move Down Enables you to change the order in which the system attempts to connect the sections. Details Enables you to get information for selected entities. Remove Enables you to delete selected entities from the section. Insert Enables you to add an additional section. The section is added after the currently selected section.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 shows the preview of a rotational blend, after the sections have been selected.
U se
nl y
Module 9 | Page 19
PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Blends by Selecting Sections

Blend_Rotational\Select-Sections_Solid ROT-BLEND_SELECT_SOLID.PRT Task 1: Create a Rotational Blend by selecting multiple sections.
Display types: Notice that all sections are created radially about the same axis.
2. Disable Plane Display
Rotational Blend
5. Select the lower edge, as shown.
Fo r
6. Press SHIFT and select the flat right surface to select the loop.
Module 9 | Page 20
PT
4. Click the Sections tab in the dashboard and select Selected sections.
In
3. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select .
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Enable only the following Datum
7. Click Insert on the Sections tab. 8. Select Sketch 3 as the second section. Notice the twisting effect.
11. Click Insert on the Sections tab. 12. Select Sketch 2 as the third section. Notice that the blend is following the order of selection, and so the system is unable to connect the sections.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 21
U se
10. Drag the start point to the position shown to remove the twist.
9. Select the Section 1 note on the screen.
nl y
13. With Section 3 still highlighted, click Move Up. Notice that Section 3 is now ordered as the second section in the list.
15. With Section 2 still highlighted, right-click over the Section 2 note and select Remove Section. 16. Right-click, select Insert, and select Sketch 2 as the second section. 17. Right-click, select Insert, and select Sketch 3 as the third section. 18. Right-click, select Insert, and select Sketch 4 as the fourth section.
Notice the # column on the Sections tab. Each section has two entities.
Fo r
PT
20. Select Sketch 2 in the model tree, then press CTRL and select Sketch 3 and Sketch 4. 21. Right-click and select Hide.
Module 9 | Page 22
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
14. With Section 3 still highlighted, click Remove on the Sections tab.
nl y
Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create a rotational blend feature by sketching sections which are sketched radially about a common axis.
A blend feature must contain two or more sections. Sketched sections are connected using a smooth curve. Section sketches require: Offset angle Axis of Revolution Maximum offset angle of 120 degrees.
Fo r
Figure 2 Sketching a Section
PT
In
Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create a rotational blend feature by sketching sections that are oriented around a common axis of revolution. The axis is defined in the sketch, as shown in Figure 2, or selected using the reference collector in the dashboard.
Sketching the Sections

A rotational blend feature must contain two or more sections. Each section must contain the same number of entities (or vertices). There are two exceptions to this rule: The blend can start or end as a single point.
te rn
Figure 3 Connecting the Sections
al
U se
Figure 1 Rotational Blend with Sketched Sections
nl y
You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.
Specifying the Angle of Sketched Sections

By default, the system connects the sketched sections together using a smooth curve. After Section 1, a rotation angle is required. The rotation angle, shown in Figure 3, must not exceed 120 degrees. The angle can be defined in one of two ways. Offset dimension Enables you to specify the sketch plane offset angle. By default, the section is offset this specified angle from the previously created section. However, you can select any other section in the blend feature from which to offset a new section. Reference Enables you to define the sections sketch plane location by selecting a reference. For example, you can select a datum plane.
Section Start Points
Manipulating Sketched Sections
Consider the following regarding manipulating sketched rotational blend sections: By default, sections are blended together in the order they are inserted. You can switch the blending order using the Move Up or Move Down options on the Sections tab of the dashboard. You can remove sections. When defining a rotational blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To make a given section the active section, you can either select it on the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes color, and all right-mouse click options pertain to this active section.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can manage start points within each sketched section.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Blends by Sketching Sections

Blend_Rotational\Sketch-Sections_Solid ROT-BLEND_SKETCH_SOLID.PRT Task 1: Sketch sections for a Rotational Blend around an internal axis.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: Blend .
2. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Rotational 3. Select the Sections tab and verify that Sketched sections is selected. 4. Click Define. 6. Disable Plane Display 7. Click Corner Rectangle the Sketching group. . 5. Select FRONT from the model tree and select Sketch.
8. Sketch and dimension the rectangle shown. Select the lower-left corner first to set the start point location. Right-click and select Construction Centerline, then sketch the centerline on the vertical axis. Select the centerline, right-click, and select Designate Axis of Revolution. to complete the Click OK section.
Fo r
9. Select the Sections tab and notice that you are now defining Section 2 and that the default offset dimension is from Section 1. 10. Edit the Offset from angle to 80.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
from
al
Module 9 | Page 25
U se
nl y
11. Click Sketch. 12. Click Corner Rectangle and sketch the rectangle shown. Select the lower-left corner first.
Fo r
15. Edit the Offset from angle to 80. 16. Click Sketch. 17. Click Corner Rectangle and sketch the rectangle shown, selecting the lower left corner first.
Module 9 | Page 26
PT
14. Select the Sections tab and click Insert. Notice that you are creating Section 3 and that the default offset is from Section 2.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
13. Click OK
nl y
18. Click OK . Notice the twisting between Section 2 and Section 3.
20. Drag the section to 90 degrees. 21. Select the Section 3 leader note and drag the section to 80 degrees.
Fo r
24. Click OK
PT
23. Select the lower-right vertex, right-click and select Start Point.
In
22. With Section 3 still selected, right-click and select Sketch.
. .
2012 PTC
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 27
U se
19. Select the Section 2 leader note to activate the section.
nl y
Task 2:
Insert another rotational blend section, which blends to a point.
1. Right-click and select Edit Definition. 2. Select the Sections tab, click Insert. 3. Edit the default offset from Section 3 to Section 2. 4. Edit the Offset angle to 130. 6. Edit the Offset angle to 120. 7. Click Sketch and sketch point as shown. 8. Click OK . . 5. Read the note and click OK.
Task 3:
1. Click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Rotational
Fo r
Blend
2. Right-click and select Sketched sections. 3. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 4. Select the front surface and click Sketch.
Module 9 | Page 28
PT
Sketch a section for a Rotational Blend around a selected axis and utilize a blend vertex.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. Click Project from the Sketching group. 6. Click Loop. 7. Select the surface shown and click Close. 8. Click OK section. to complete the
10. Enable Axis Display 11. Select axis A_1.
13. Right-click and select Sketch.
14. Sketch the triangle as shown, constraining it to the construction geometry. 15. Select the upper vertex, right-click, and select Blend Vertex.
PT
16. Click OK
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 9 | Page 29
12. Right-click and select Insert.
U se
9. Select the Sections tab and notice that the Axis collector is active.
nl y
Analyzing Rotational Blend Options

You can use multiple options for a solid rotational blend to achieve different geometry results.
Options Tab Smooth Straight Connect end and start sections
Analyzing Rotational Blend Options
Fo r
When the sections of a solid rotational blend are rotated about the axis of revolution, you can edit the following options to achieve different geometry results. Smooth The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as shown in Figure 2. This is the default option. Straight The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown in Figure 3. Connect end and start sections The start section and end section of the blend are joined together, as shown in the right image of Figure 2 and Figure 3.
Module 9 | Page 30
PT
Figure 2 Smooth Blend with Unconnected and Connected Start and End Sections
In
te rn
Figure 3 Straight Blend with Unconnected and Connected Start and End Sections
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Original Blend
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Rotational Blend Options

Blend_Rotational\Options_Solid ROT-BLEND_OPTIONS_SOLID.PRT Task 1: Edit the shape of a rotational blend.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the rotational blend feature, right-click, and select Edit Definition. Notice that the model has a smooth transition between the sections.
4. Enable Connect end and start sections.
Fo r
5. In the Options tab, select Straight.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
3. Select the Options tab.
al
Module 9 | Page 31
U se
nl y
6. In the options tab, disable Connect end and start sections.
8. Drag the section to 90 degrees. 9. Select the Section 3 note. 10. Drag the section to 60 degrees.
11. In the Options tab, select Smooth. 12. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
7. Select the Section 2 note.
nl y
Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent feature geometry.
For Smooth blend option only. Specify tangency for Start and End sections independently. You must select a tangent surface for each blend section segment. Blend to a point cap type: Smooth Sharp
Fo r
Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency

The tangency option creates a tangent transition between the surfaces of the blend feature and the surfaces of adjacent feature geometry. You can define tangency only for blends created using the Smooth blend option, and you can define it at both the Start Section and End Section independently. The following types of tangency options are available: Free No tangency is applied. The system blends as if there are no adjacent surfaces, as shown in the left image of Figure 1. Normal Enables you to blend the features surfaces normal to the blend section plane. Whether you sketch or select sections, the Blend tool computes a planar section, and the blend is normal to that blend section plane, as shown in the middle image of Figure 1.
PT
Figure 1 Blend Feature with Free, Normal, and Tangent Conditions at Start Section
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Blend Feature with Smooth and Sharp End Conditions
U se
nl y
Tangent Enables you to blend the features surfaces tangent to the adjacent features surfaces. You must select the corresponding adjacent surface of each blend segment, as shown in the right image of Figure 1. For cases where you blend to a point, there are two different cap types available: Smooth Blends to the point with lines tangent at the point, as shown in the top image of Figure 2. Sharp No tangency is applied at the point. This results in the blend ending at a sharp point, as shown in the bottom image of Figure 2.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Rotational Blend Tangency

Blend_Rotational\Tangency_Solid ROT-BLEND_TANGENT_SOLID.PRT Task 1: Experiment with tangency for a Rotational Blend.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Named Views select TOP. and
Fo r
6. Press CTRL+D to return to standard orientation. 7. On the Tangency tab, edit the Start Section boundary condition from Normal to Tangent. 8. Select the surface corresponding to the highlighted edge. 9. Continue selecting surfaces for the next three edges.
2012 PTC
PT
In
5. Edit the Start Section boundary condition from Free to Normal. Notice that the blend surfaces are normal to the section plane.
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 35
U se
3. Select the Tangency tab.
nl y
2. Right-click Rotational Blend 2 in the model tree and select Edit Definition.
10. From the In Graphics toolbar, and click Named Views select TOP. Notice that the surface is now tangent to the adjacent surfaces. 11. Click Complete Feature . 12. With Rotational Blend 2 still selected, right-click and select Suppress and OK in the Suppress dialog box. Task 2: Define tangency for a blend with an endpoint.
4. Select the Tangency tab.
Fo r
5. Edit the End Section boundary condition from Sharp to Smooth. 6. Click Preview Feature . .
Module 9 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
.
2. Select the Tangency tab. Notice that the End Section boundary condition is set to Sharp. . Click Preview Feature
al
2012 PTC
U se
1. Right-click Rotational Blend 1 in the model tree and select Edit Definition.
nl y
Module
10
U se O te rn al
Module 10 | Page 1
Sweeps with Variable Sections

Module Overview
A sweep with a variable section is one of the most powerful features in Creo Parametric, considering the variety and complexity of geometry it can be used to create. A sweep utilizes a single section, which can be constant or variable, and that is swept along one or more trajectories. The section can vary its shape and orientation as it is pulled in different directions along different trajectories. In addition, section dimensions can be varied along the length of the sweep by using relations and a datum graph if desired. In this module, you learn how to use sweeps with variable sections to create solid geometry, as well as how to use the many options that control the section orientation and tangency.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the theory behind sweeps with variable sections. Create sweeps using a constant section. Create sweeps with variable sections using normal to trajectory section plane control. Create sweeps with variable sections using constant normal direction section plane control. Create sweeps with variable sections using normal to projection section plane control. Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a sweep with a variable section. Create sweeps with variable sections using multiple trajectories. Create sweeps with variable sections using tangent trajectories. Analyze the different options and rules for a sweep with a variable section. Use trajpar and evalgraph in the creation of sweeps with variable sections.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Objectives
In
nl y
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory

A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change shape and orientation along the feature.
Create a solid or a surface feature. Add or remove material. Main components: Section Constant or variable. Sits on an x-y-z frame. Trajectories Use one or more. Section attached to Origin trajectory. Section sweeps along Origin trajectory length.
Figure 1 Creating a Sweep with a Variable Section
PT
In
Fo r
Understanding Sweeps with Variable Sections Theory

A sweep uses one or more trajectories and a single section that can change shape and orientation along the feature. With the Variable Section Sweep feature, you can create a solid or surface feature. You add or remove material while sweeping a section along one or more selected trajectories, by controlling the sections orientation, rotation, and geometry. You can create a sweep using a constant section or a variable section. The main components of the sweep tool are the section and trajectories. The sketched section sits on an x-y-z frame that is attached to the Origin trajectory and moves along its length to create geometry. The Origin trajectory is the first selected trajectory. The Origin trajectory, along with the other trajectories and other references such as the planes, axes, edges, or an axis of the coordinate system, define the orientation of the section along the sweep. In
te rn
Figure 2 Completed Feature
al
U se
nl y
Figure 1 and Figure 2, the curved datum curve is the Origin trajectory that the rectangular section sweeps along. The frame is essentially a coordinate system that slides along the origin trajectory and carries with itself the section to be swept. Axes of the coordinate system are defined by auxiliary trajectories and other references. The frame is important because it determines the orientation of the sketch as it is being moved along the origin trajectory. The frame is oriented by additional constraints and references. The system places the sketched section in a specified orientation with respect to these references and attaches it to a frame that moves along the origin trajectory and sweeps the section.
Best Practices
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 3
U se
A good way to understand sweeps with variable sections is to think of yourself on a roller coaster holding a picture frame. The Origin trajectory is the track of the roller coaster. The frame you are holding is the frame referred to in this topic. While you ride the roller coaster, you are moving along on the track, but you can point and reorient the frame to a different direction while doing so.
nl y
Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section

A sweep with a constant section does not change its shape as it is swept along the trajectories.
The orientation of the frame can change. Merge ends: Constant sections only. Must be a solid surface at the ends. Sketch placement point: Specify a different point on Origin trajectory. Does not affect the start point of sweep.
Fo r
Creating Sweeps using a Constant Section

When a sketched section sweeps along the Origin trajectory, the section geometry can vary and change shape based on how the sketch is constrained, dimensioned, and so on. The references to which the sketch is constrained can even change the shape of the section. The section shape can be variable because the sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory and updates its shape accordingly. You can, however, create a sweep that uses a constant section. A sweep with a constant section does not change its shape as it is being swept along the trajectories. Only the orientation of the frame on which the section lies changes. If the Origin trajectory contains entities that are non-tangent, you must use a constant section. Figure 1 displays a sweep with a constant section along an origin trajectory with non-tangent entities. When creating a sweep protrusion or cut, you can decide whether to merge the ends of the sweep using the Merge ends option. The Merge ends option
PT
Figure 2 Constant Section without Ends Merged
In
te rn
Figure 3 Constant Section with Ends Merged
al
U se
Figure 1 Constant Section Sketch
nl y
merges the ends of the sweep. There must be a solid surface at the ends of the sweep to perform a merge. Figure 2 displays the sweep without the merged ends option selected. Notice how the sweep feature does not fully join to the surfaces of the solid walls. Figure 3 displays the sweep with the merged ends option selected. Notice that the sweep feature extends to fully intersect the inside surfaces of the solid walls. You can also specify a different Sketch placement point. The Sketch placement point option enables you to specify the point on the Origin trajectory at which you want to sketch the section. The start point of the sweep is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default location where you sketch the section if the Sketch placement point is empty.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 5
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Using a Constant Section

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CONSTANT_SECTION.PRT
Sweep\Constant-Section_Solid Task 1:
Create a variable section sweep protrusion using a constant section.
3. Select the curve.
click Sketch View
7. Click One-by-One and edit the circle diameter to 2.
Fo r
8. Click OK
9. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. .
11. Notice that the ends are not merged with the existing geometry.
Module 10 | Page 6
PT
6. Click Center and Point and sketch a circle at the references intersection.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
4. Click Create Section
then
U se
2. Start the Sweep Shapes group.
from the
nl y
12. Click Resume Feature 13. Select the Options tab.
14. Select the Merge ends check box. 15. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

The moving frame of a sweep is always normal to a specified trajectory when the Normal To Trajectory option is specified.
Normal To Trajectory: Frame is normal to the Origin trajectory by default. Frame can be normal to any additional trajectory. Select N check box for that trajectory. X direction reference at start: Sets initial X-orientation of frame.
Figure 2 Section Normal to Chain 1 Trajectory
PT
In
Fo r
Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

When the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, the moving frame is always normal to the specified trajectory. By default, the frame is created normal to the Origin trajectory, but it can be normal to any additional trajectory. To switch the trajectory the frame is normal to, simply select the N check box in the dashboard for that trajectory. In Figure 1, the frame is normal to the Origin trajectory. In the Figure 2, the frame is normal to the Chain 1 trajectory, and the geometry changes as a result.
Specifying the X Direction Reference at Start

Specifying the X direction reference at start sets the initial X-orientation of the frame on which the sketch is created. The reference specifies the positive X
te rn
Figure 3 Section Normal to Origin Trajectory, Different X Direction
al
U se
Figure 1 Section Normal to Origin Trajectory
nl y
for the sketch view. Specifying the X direction reference at start is similar to specifying the Sketch Orientation Reference for a Sketch Orientation direction that is always set to Right. In Figure 1, the X direction reference is the right model surface. In Figure 3, the X direction reference has been changed to the right chamfer surface. As a result, the frame has rotated slightly to face the new reference and the sketched geometry has as well. Note that if you do not assign an X direction reference at start, the system assigns a default direction.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 9
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Normal to Trajectory

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NORM_TRAJ.PRT
Sweep\Normal-Trajectory_Solid Task 1:
Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to trajectory.
3. Select the left curve as the origin trajectory. 4. Notice that the highlighted trajectory with an arrow indicates the start.
5. Click Create Section click Sketch View . 6. Notice the default sketch orientation.
then
and click Yes 7. Click Cancel to quit Sketcher. 8. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
Fo r
9. Select the References tab from the Sweep tab in the ribbon. Click in the X direction reference at start collector and select the right side of the model.
PT
10. Click Create Section click Sketch View .
11. Notice both the orientation and the crosshairs at the sweep origin.
Module 10 | Page 10
In
te rn
then
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Start the Sweep Shapes group.
from the
12. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . and 13. Click Corner Rectangle sketch the rectangle so that it is symmetrical about the horizontal reference and offset more to the right side of the vertical reference.
16. Notice the sweep shape. 17. Select the References tab, press CTRL, and select the curve on the right as a second trajectory. Select the N check box to set Chain 1 to normal.
Fo r
click Sketch View and notice that the Sketch is the same except that the Sketch plane is reoriented.
19. Click Cancel , click Yes, and orient to the Standard Orientation.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
, then
Module 10 | Page 11
al
U se
15. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation.
nl y
14. Click One-by-One and edit the overall width to 40, the height to 25, and the offset 15 to the left side.
20. Select the References tab and select the N check box to set Origin back to normal. Click in the X direction reference at start collector and select the right side chamfer surface. 21. Notice the sweep shape and click Complete Feature .
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction

When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the Z-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction.
The section becomes parallel to the specified reference. Geometry updates if the reference is modified.
Figure 1 Section Normal to Origin Trajectory
Fo r
Figure 2 Constant Normal Direction Set to Datum Plane
PT
In
Creating Sweeps using Constant Normal Direction

When the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control is used, the Z-axis, or section normal, of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction. This means the section becomes parallel to the specified reference. The direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references. In Figure 1, the Normal to Trajectory Section plane control is used, so the geometry and sketch plane are normal to the Origin trajectory. In Figure 2, the Constant Normal Direction Section plane control has been specified, and the datum plane has been specified as the reference. Consequently, the Z-axis of the frame has become normal to the datum plane, and the geometry has updated. In Figure 3, the datum plane angle has been flipped, and the variable section sweep geometry has updated as well.
te rn
Figure 3 Constant Normal Direction Reference Modified
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps Using Constant Normal Direction

Sweep\Contant-Normal-Direction_Solid CONSTANT_NORMAL.PRT Task 1: Create a variable section sweep protrusion using constant normal direction section plane control.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. 3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
6. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation.
Fo r
7. Select the References tab from the Sweep tab of the ribbon. Edit the Section plane control to Constant Normal Direction and select datum plane NORM. 8. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. 9. Notice that the geometry has updated.
Module 10 | Page 14
PT
5. Click Refit from the In Graphics Toolbar.
In
click Sketch View and notice the sketch orientation.
te rn
, then
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
, then
click Sketch View and notice the new sketch orientation. 11. Click Refit from the In Graphics Toolbar. 12. Click OK . 13. Click Complete Feature and orient to the Standard Orientation. 14. Select datum plane NORM, then right-click and select Edit. Edit the angle value to -35 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 15. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 16. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.
17. Notice that the geometry has updated. 18. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection

When the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used, there are two levels of control provided for the moving frame.
The Y-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction. The Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the origin trajectory along the specified direction. You must specify the direction.
Figure 1 Normal to Projection Diagram
Fo r
Figure 2 Y-Axis of Moving Frame Parallel to Direction Reference
PT
In
Creating Sweeps Normal to Projection

As illustrated in Figure 1, when the Normal to Projection Section plane control is used, the Y-axis of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction, and the Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory along the specified direction. The direction reference collector enables you to add or delete references. In Figure 2, the Direction reference specified is datum plane DTM1. The Y-axis of the frame is parallel to the datum plane normal. If the datum plane were rotated, the Y-axis of the frame would also rotate to remain parallel to the datum plane normal. The resulting geometry would rotate as well.
te rn
Figure 3 Z-Axis Tangent to Projection of Origin Trajectory
al
U se
nl y
In Figure 3, the Direction reference is still datum plane DTM1. In this particular view, the projection of the Origin trajectory onto this datum plane is directly on top of the Origin trajectory. Notice that the Z-axis of the frame remains tangent to this projection along the entire sweep length.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Normal to Projection

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NORM_PROJ.PRT
Sweep\Normal-Projection_Solid Task 1:
Create a variable section sweep protrusion normal to projection.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. In the model tree, select ORIGIN_TRAJ to view it. 3. Right-click PROJECT_SAMPLE and select Unhide. Curve PROJECT_SAMPLE is shown in the plane for visual reference only. 4. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
Fo r
7. Notice the sweep curves in this view. 8. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation. 9. Notice that the sweep's Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the origin trajectory in this view.
Module 10 | Page 18
PT
5. Select the References tab from the Sweep tab in the ribbon. Notice the available options. Edit the Section plane control drop-down list to Normal To Projection and select datum plane DTM1.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Display types:
, then
click Sketch View and notice the sketch orientation. 11. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation.
12. Select the References tab and click Flip to flip the direction. 13. Click Create Section , then
click Sketch View and notice the sketch orientation.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
14. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation. .
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the sweep.
Automatic: Section plane automatically oriented in XY direction. Normal To Surface: Y-axis of section plane normal to surface on which Origin trajectory lies. X-Trajectory: X-axis of section plane points to specified X-Trajectory
Figure 2 Normal to Surface Control
PT
In
Fo r
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the frame rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the sweep. There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control: Automatic The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation at the start of the sweep. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that have a straight segment at the start. In Figure 1, the X direction referenced at start is the right surface of the base feature. Consequently, the X-axis of the frame faces this X direction reference at start along the entire sweep.
te rn
Figure 3 X-Trajectory Control
al
U se
Figure 1 Automatic Control
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 21
al
U se
Normal To Surface The Y-axis of the section plane is normal to the surface on which the Origin trajectory lies. This is the default option when the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on a surface, one-sided edge of a surface, two-sided edge of a surface or solid edge, a curve created though an intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. The Next option enables you to move to the next normal surface. In Figure 2, the Next option is toggled to display the different possible solutions. In the upper-left image of Figure 2, the normal surface is the back surface, while in the upper-right image the right surface is the normal surface. X-Trajectory The X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep. In Figure 3, the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as X-Trajectory. The X-axis of the section plane passes through the specified X-Trajectory, where the Chain 1 trajectory is the X-Trajectory, along the entire sweep. Notice that the geometry twists according to the Chain 1 trajectory.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in Sweeps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed HORIZ_VERT.PRT
Sweep\Horizontal-Vertical-Control_Solid Task 1:
Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a variable section sweep protrusion.
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 3. Select the References tab and view the current settings. 4. Notice the two trajectories selected.
Fo r
6. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation. 7. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
Module 10 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
8. In the References tab, right-click the X direction reference at start and select Remove.
9. Edit the Horizontal/Vertical control to Normal To Surface. 10. Click Next four times to view the possibilities.
11. In the References tab, select the X check box for Chain 1.
Fo r
13. Select START from the model tree, press CTRL, and select END. 14. Notice that the X-direction of the Sketch follows the X-trajectory to reorient the sketch.

PT
In
te rn
.
al
U se
nl y
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories

You can create sweeps with variable sections using multiple trajectories.
Each additional trajectory creates a reference point in Sketcher. Reference points move along the trajectories. Different geometry effects are possible depending on dimensioning scheme.
Figure 1 Section Dimensioned to One Trajectory
PT
In
Fo r
Figure 2 Section Dimensioned to Two Trajectories
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories

You can create sweeps using multiple trajectories. Each additional trajectory defined creates a reference point in Sketcher for the section. The reference points move along each of the trajectories as the sweep is created. If the sketch is constrained or dimensioned to these trajectory reference points, the section gets stretched or pulled by these trajectories to change its shape. Depending on exactly how the section is constrained or dimensioned to the reference points, different geometry effects are possible from the same section and trajectory. In Figure 1, the section is constrained and dimensioned only to one of the two trajectories and results in the geometry shown. In Figure 2, the section is constrained and dimensioned to both
te rn
Figure 3 Section Dimensioned and Constrained Differently
al
U se
nl y
trajectories. The right line of the rectangle is dimensioned along the X-axis to the additional trajectory reference. The resulting geometry is pulled only in the X-axis by the additional trajectory. In Figure 3, the midpoint of the right rectangle line is constrained to the additional trajectory reference. Hence the resulting geometry is pulled in both the X and Y axes.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 25
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections Utilizing Multiple Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MULT_TRAJ.PRT
Sweep\Multiple_Traj Task 1:
Create variable section sweeps using multiple trajectories.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 3. Notice that there are two trajectories selected. 4. Click Create Section 5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 6. Click Normal and dimension the right line to the additional trajectory point. Type 5 as the value and press ENTER. 7. Click OK and orient to the RIGHT view. Notice that the additional trajectory does not pull the Sketch to the right. 8. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and notice that the additional trajectory does pull the Sketch. then click Sketch View
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
O
.
nl y
then
10. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar. 11. Press CTRL, select the right side midpoint and the additional trajectory point, then right-click and select Coincident.
click Sketch View
17. Select the top line's Horizontal constraint and delete it.
Fo r
18. Select the new weak dimension, right-click and select Strong, then press ENTER. 19. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation.
20. Notice that only the right side is affected by the additional trajectory. 21. Click Complete Feature . 22. Right-click Sweep 1 and select Suppress. Click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
16. Click Refit Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.
In
te rn
then .
Module 10 | Page 27
14. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and notice that the additional trajectory also pulls the Sketch.
al
U se
13. Click OK and orient to the RIGHT view. Notice that the additional trajectory pulls the Sketch to the right.
nl y
12. Click Delete in the Resolve Sketch dialog box to delete the 5.00 dimension.
23. Right-click TRAJ_1 and select Hide. 24. Press CTRL, select TRAJ_2 and TRAJ_3, and then right-click and select Unhide. 25. De-select all geometry. 26. Start the Sweep and select the middle curve as the Origin.
then
29. Click Corner Rectangle and sketch a rectangle using the reference points as three of four vertices.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 28
PT
In
30. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation. .
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
27. Press CTRL and select the left and right curves.
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent Trajectories

You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories.
Enable tangency for a trajectory: Select the T check box. Use the Tangency tab. Centerline appears in Sketcher for each tangent trajectory. Available options: None Side 1/Side 2 Selected
Fo r
Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent Trajectories

You can specify trajectories to be tangent trajectories, which is useful when you want the surfaces of the variable section sweep to be tangent with existing geometry. You can specify a trajectory to be tangent either by selecting the T check box in the References tab, or by using the Tangency tab as shown in Figure 1. For each tangent trajectory specified, a centerline appears in Sketcher. This centerline pivots as necessary on the trajectory to maintain the tangency. Therefore, any geometry constrained to the centerline remains tangent as well along the sweep. In Figure 2, there is a tangent centerline at each tangent trajectory. The resulting completed geometry is shown in Figure 3. You can specify a tangent trajectory to be tangent to a surface or to the surfaces of solid geometry. If you specify a solid geometry edge as the tangent trajectory, the system enables you to specify to which of the adjacent
PT
Figure 2 Viewing Tangent Centerlines
In
te rn
Figure 3 Resultant Tangent Geometry
al
U se
Figure 1 References and Tangency Tabs
nl y
surfaces the resulting geometry will be tangent. The following tangent options are available in the dashboard's Tangency tab: None Removes the tangency from the trajectory. Side 1 Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on side 1 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within the Tangency tab. Side 2 Sweep section contains a centerline tangent to surfaces on side 2 of the trajectory. The resulting tangent surface is specified within the Tangency tab. Selected Enables you to manually specify surfaces for the tangent centerlines in the sweep section.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
In the References tab, there are two different T check boxes for each tangent trajectory. Toggling the selected check box switches the tangency from Side 1 to Side 2, and vice versa. De-selecting the T check box in the References tab is the same as selecting None from the References drop-down list in the Tangency tab.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Sweeps with Variable Sections using Tangent Trajectories

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TANGENT_TRAJ.PRT
Sweep\Tangent-Trajectory_Solid Task 1:
Create a variable section sweep protrusion with tangent trajectories.
2. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 3. Notice the Origin trajectory and two additional trajectories. 4. Click Complete Feature .
6. Select the curve as the Origin.
Fo r
8. Select the References tab. Select the left T check box for both Chain 1 and Chain 2.
2012 PTC
PT
You are selecting edges, not curves, so that you can set up tangency to the adjacent surfaces.
In
7. Press CTRL and select the upper-right and upper-left surface edges.
te rn
Module 10 | Page 31
5. Start the Sweep
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
.
10. Select the References tab. Notice that the T check marks have updated. Edit the Section plane control drop-down list to Constant Normal Direction, close the References tab, and select datum plane FRONT.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
9. Select the Tangency tab and select Chain 1. Notice that it is set to be tangent to TOP_SURF. Edit the References drop-down list to Default 2, which should specify RIGHT_SURF as the tangent surface. Select Chain 2 and ensure that it is set to be tangent to LEFT_SURF.
12. Click Conic and sketch the conic, tangent to both the left and right edges. 13. Click One-by-One RHO to 0.35. 14. Click OK . and edit
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 33
al
U se
nl y
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and Rules

A variable section sweep has several trajectory options and rules.
Trajectory options: Flip trajectory direction Trajectory handles: Dragging Extend To Trim At Rules: Tangency Trajectory requirements
Fo r
Figure 2 Trajectory Start Point on Right
PT
In
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options

The following trajectory options are available when creating a variable section sweep: Flip trajectory direction You can click the arrow on the trajectory to flip the sweep to the opposite end. The section is sketched at the indicated start point on the trajectory. In Figure 1, the start point is located on the left end of the trajectory. Consequently, the section is sketched from the left side. Conversely, in Figure 2, the start point is located on the right end of the trajectory, resulting in the section being sketched from the right side.
te rn
Figure 3 Trajectory Both Trimmed and Extended
al
U se
Figure 1 Trajectory Start Point on Left
nl y
Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Rules
An X-Trajectory cannot intersect the origin trajectory, except at the endpoints. All trajectories must intersect the moving frame of the sweep, at least for the desired length of the sweep. When using trajectories of different lengths, the shortest trajectory sets the length of the sweep.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
The following are rules regarding trajectory requirements for variable section sweeps:
In
When using the Variable section option, all entities within the trajectory must be tangent. You can use the Constant section option for non-tangent trajectories. When using the Normal To Projection Section plane control, the projection of entities on the reference must be tangent as viewed in the reference direction.
te rn
al
The following are rules regarding tangency for variable section sweeps:
U se
To reset the trajectory to the original curve length, you can simply re-select the curve.
nl y
Trajectory handles You can perform several operations on the trajectory handles to cause different resultant geometry. The following three options are available: Dragging You can drag the trajectory end handles to shorten or lengthen the trajectory. When you shorten the trajectory, the T value at the end becomes a negative value; if you lengthen the trajectory, the T value at the end becomes positive. Extend To Extends the sweep along the current trajectory to a selected reference. In Figure 3, the right endpoint of the trajectory has been extended to datum plane OFFSET. Trim At Trims the trajectory at a selected reference location. In Figure 3, the left endpoint of the trajectory has been trimmed at datum point PNT0.
Module 10 | Page 35
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Sweeps with Variable Sections Trajectory Options and Rules
Close Window Erase Not Displayed OPTIONS_RULES.PRT
Sweep\Options-Rules_Solid Task 1:
Experiment with the various trajectory options and rules for a variable section sweep.
Display types: 2. Start the Sweep .
4. Notice that the start point is on the left. 5. Click the arrow to flip the start point to the right. 6. Right-click and select Sketch. 7. Notice the crosshairs on the right.
8. Click Center and Point and sketch a circle with center at the crosshairs.
Fo r
PT
9. Click One-by-One diameter to 40. .
10. Click OK
11. In the graphics window, click the arrow to flip the start point to the left. 12. Right-click and select Sketch. 13. Notice that the Sketch and crosshairs are now on the left. 14. Click OK .
Module 10 | Page 36
In
and edit the
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. Select the center curve as the Origin.
nl y
15. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. 16. Drag the left handle to -15.
18. Select datum point PNT0.
19. Right-click the right handle and select Extend To. 20. Select datum plane OFFSET.
23. Press CTRL and select the upper curve.
Fo r
24. Select the References tab and select the N check box for Chain 1. 25. Notice that the section is normal to this Chain 1 trajectory. 26. Press CTRL and select the lower curve as an additional trajectory. 27. Notice that the sweep is limited to the shortest trajectory. 28. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
22. Notice that it returns to the default length.
In
21. Re-select the center curve as the Origin.
te rn
Module 10 | Page 37
al
U se
nl y
17. Right-click the left handle and select Trim At.
Using Trajpar with Solid Features

Trajpar stands for trajectory parameter.
Value ranges from 0 to 1. Used in Sketcher relations. Make dimensions increase/ decrease along a length according to a formula.
Figure 2 Using Trajpar to Vary Slope
Figure 3 Using Trajpar for a Sine Wave
Using Trajpar with Solid Features
Trajpar stands for trajectory parameter. Its value ranges from 0 to 1 and can be used with variable section sweeps, helical sweeps, and composite curves. In the context of a sweep, trajpar is a percentage along the sweep. At the start point of the sweep, its value is 0. At the midpoint of the sweep, its value is 0.5, and at the end of the sweep its value is 1. You can reference the trajpar variable in section relations for a variable section sweep to control section dimensions along the sweep length. For example, you can make dimensions increase or decrease along the length according to a formula. Dimensions can even be driven to zero.
Fo r
Figure 1 displays a standard variable section sweep feature that contains no relations. The section is constant along the entire sweep length. Figure 2 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher relation for slope using trajpar in the following equation: sd3 = trajpar * 20 + 10, where sd3 is the section's width Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the section's width varies from 0 to 20, plus 10 (therefore, varies from 10 to 30) along the sweep length. Figure 3 displays a variable section sweep feature that contains a Sketcher relation for a sine wave using trajpar in the following equation: sd3 = 20 + (5 * sin(trajpar * 360 * 4)), where sd3 is the section's width. Because trajpar varies from 0 to 1, the sine wave starts at 0 and has a magnitude of 5 with four cycles, plus 20.
Module 10 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Figure 1 Variable Section Sweep, No Relations
PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar with Solid Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TRAJPAR.PRT
Sweep\Using_Trajpar Task 1:
Use trajpar to vary the section of a variable section sweep protrusion.
5. Right-click and select Sketch. 6. Select the Tools tab, then click Relations from the Model Intent group. Notice that dimensions display in an sd# syntax. Identify the length dimension number as sd3. Type /* Relation for Slope and press ENTER. Type sd3=trajpar*20+10.
Fo r
7. Click OK in the Relations dialog box, then select the Sketch tab and click OK . 8. Click Variable Section if necessary, then click Complete Feature . 9. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
2012 PTC
PT
The length dimension varies from 020, plus 10 (therefore, 1030).
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 39
al
U se
4. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
3. There are currently no relations in this model.
nl y
2. Notice the sweep section does not vary.
Task 2:
Use trajpar to make a sine wave section for a variable section sweep protrusion.
1. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select Relations . 2. In the Relations dialog box, edit the Look In drop-down menu from Part to Section. Select the sweep feature. Comment out the previous relation by preceding the equation with /*. Create a new line and type /* Relation for Sine wave and press ENTER. Type sd3=20+(5*sin(trajpar* 360*4)). 3. Click OK in the Relations dialog . box and click Regenerate
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features

The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum graph, given the graph name and an x-value.
EVALGRAPH returns Y-value. Trajpar provides the X-value. Syntax example: sd# = EVALGRAPH("GRAPH1", trajpar*360)/10
Figure 1 Sketched Section Swept Along Trajectory
In addition to the trajpar variable, you can also use the EVALGRAPH function in a relation. The EVALGRAPH function returns the Y-value of the datum graph, given the graph name and an X-value. You can combine usage of the EVALGRAPH function with the trajpar percentage variable to effectively move along the X-axis of the graph, and return the associated Y values. In Figure 1, a section is swept along a circular trajectory to produce the result in the left image of Figure 2. The section height location is then governed by a relation that uses trajpar and the graph in Figure 3 to produce the result in the right image of Figure 2. The following syntax should be used in a relation when you want to use the EVALGRAPH function: sd# = EVALGRAPH ("graphname", trajpar*width_of_graph)*vert_scale where the variables are defined as follows: sd# The Sketcher dimension you wish to vary based on the graph. graphname The name of the graph feature as it displays in the model tree.
Fo r
PT
Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features
Figure 2 Before and After using Trajpar with EVALGRAPH
In
te rn
Figure 3 Datum Graph
al
U se
nl y
width_of_graph The total X-distance in the graph feature. In Figure 3, the width of the graph is 360, as the feature is being swept 360 degrees. vert_scale An additional scaling factor that can be applied to increase the Y-value of the graph feature. The following are examples of relations created using trajpar with EVALGRAPH: sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar * 100) / 2 In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width of the graph is 100 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the graph is such that it halves the resultant value. sd# = EVALGRAPH ("GRAPH1", trajpar *360) / 10 In this example, the graph feature in the model tree is GRAPH1, the width of the graph is 360 degrees, and the scaling factor for the Y-axis of the graph is such that it divides the resultant value by 10.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 42
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using Trajpar and Datum Graphs with Solid Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TRAJPAR_GRAPH.PRT
Sweep\Using_Trajpar_Graphs Task 1:
Use datum graphs and trajpar to modify the geometry of a variable section sweep cut.
4. Observe the sketch. 5. Click OK .
6. Edit the definition of Sweep 1.
8. Right-click and select Sketch.
9. Notice that the section is controlled by three dimensions only.
10. Select the 4 dimension, then right-click and select Modify. 11. In the Modify Dimensions dialog box, drag the Sensitivity handle all the way to the right. Drag the dimension from approximately 4 to 12. This range is what the trajpar relation will be doing. Click Quit Modification .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 43
7. Notice the section is swept along a single trajectory.
al
U se
3. Press ENTER to accept the name for the feature.
2. Edit the definition of GRAPH1 and click Done from the menu manager.
nl y
14. Also notice the message in the message window.
Fo r
17. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. 18. Notice that the relation has driven surfaces to zero.
19. Edit the definition of GRAPH1 and click Done from the menu manager. 20. Press ENTER to accept the name for the feature. 21. Modify the vertical dimensions to 40 and 120 as shown. 22. Click OK .
Module 10 | Page 44
PT
16. Click Variable Section if necessary, then click Complete Feature .
In
15. Select the Sketch tab, then click OK .
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
13. Click OK in the Relations dialog box and notice that the Sketch updates.
nl y
12. Select the Tools tab then click from the Model Relations Intent group. Notice that the height dimension number is sd7. Type /* Adjust the height dimension for the section based on GRAPH1 and press ENTER. Type sd7 = EVALGRAPH ( "GRAPH1" , trajpar * 360 ) / 10.
23. Notice that the geometry has updated.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 45
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 46
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
11
U se O te rn al
Module 11 | Page 1
Helical Sweeps
Module Overview
The helical sweep feature enables you to create geometry by sweeping a section along a helix, which is based on a pitch value. These sweeps are commonly used to create solid springs or threads. However, they can also be used to create helical swept surfaces, which may be used as construction or reference geometry for other surfaces, or be used in the creation of datum curves.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the theory behind helical sweeps. Create helical sweeps for springs. Create helical sweeps for threads. Analyze the profile and pitch variations available for helical sweeps. Utilize variable sections in helical sweeps.
In
nl y
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory

Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical geometry.
Can be protrusions, cuts, or surfaces. Helical sweep components: Sketch profile Sketch section Pitch values Helical sweep options: Pitch points Section orientation Variable section Helix direction
In
Fo r
Understanding Helical Sweeps Theory

Helical sweeps can be used to create springs, threads, or other helical geometry. The dashboard interface enables helical sweeps to be created by adding or removing material, or as surfaces. In Figure 1, the threads were created by removing material, in Figure 2, the spring was created by adding material, and in Figure 3, the helical geometry was created with surfaces.
Components of a Helical Sweep

The helical sweep feature uses each of the following components to generate a helical shape: Sketch profile Defines the shape and diameter of the helix. For example, the sketched profile for a typical spring is a straight line parallel to the center axis. Sketch section Defines the shape to be swept along the helix. For example, the section for a typical spring is a circular section.
PT
Figure 2 Spring
te rn
Figure 3 Helical Surface Geometry
al
U se
Figure 1 Threads Cut Into a Part Model
nl y
Pitch values The distance between the spring coils. The pitch value can also be defined by a relation, for example, the profile length divided by the number of coils.
Helical Sweep Options

The following options are available in the dashboard when defining a helical sweep feature: Pitch points Adding a single pitch value causes the pitch to remain constant along the entire sweep profile, whereas adding multiple pitch values enables you to define a graph that specifies the pitch values at specific points. Section orientation Defines how the cross-section is oriented as it sweeps along the trajectory. For Normal to trajectory, the cross-section is oriented normal to the trajectory, as shown in the upper image of Figure 4. For Through axis of revolution, the cross-section lies in a plane that passes through the axis of revolution, as shown in the lower image of Figure 4.
te rn
Fo r
Helix direction Defines which direction the trajectory is wrapped about the helix. For Use Right Handed, the trajectory is defined using the right-hand rule, and for Use Left Handed the trajectory is defined using the left-hand rule.
Using Trajpar with a Helical Sweep

Helical Sweeps, like variable section sweeps, can utilize the trajpar parameter. Trajpar can reference a datum graph using the EVALGRAPH function if desired. Trajpar can also be used in section relations to control dimensions as the section is swept along the helix. For example, trajpar enables you to vary the spring section size along the swept helix length, or it enables you to taper the end of a worm gear helix to blend into the shaft.
2012 PTC
PT
Variable section Defines the behavior of the cross-section as it travels along the trajectory of the sweep. Vary section enables the cross-section to change size and shape, based on its position along the sweep trajectory.
In
al
Figure 4 - Cross-section Angle
Module 11 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

You can create springs using helical sweep features.
Spring characteristics: Typically normal to the trajectory. Typically a round or rectangular section. Tips: Create hooked ends or extensions using an additional sweep. Use a relation to control pitch based on length.
In
Figure 2 Spring Section
Fo r
Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

You can create springs using helical sweep features. Typically, the helical sweep feature maintains the following characteristics for solid spring models: The section is usually normal to the trajectory. The sketched section is usually round or rectangular in shape. Figure 3 depicts two completed springs, one right-handed, the other left-handed. Consider these tips for further enhancing the spring: You can create an additional sweep feature from the ends of the spring to create hooked ends or extensions. You can write a relation to control the spring's pitch based on its length, while maintaining an equal number of coils. This enables both natural, as well as stretched or compressed, versions of the spring by simply modifying its length.
Module 11 | Page 4
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Completed Right and Left Hand Springs
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Spring Profile
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Springs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NO FILES OPEN
Sweep\Helical_Springs Task 1: Create a spring.
1. Click New
, select Part, edit the Name to SPRING, and click OK.
3. From the Shapes group, select Helical Sweep types drop-down list. 4. Select the References tab. 5. Click Define to create the Helix sweep profile.
6. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree, as the Sketch plane. Click Sketch. Disable Plane Display .
7. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 8. Click Sketch View
al
U se
O
.
Module 11 | Page 5
Fo r
Click One-by-One . Right-click and select Designate Axis of Revolution.
and sketch 10. Click Line Chain a vertical line to the left of the centerline, starting on the horizontal reference. Click One-by-One . 11. Edit the revolved diameter to 4. Notice that the system created the revolved diameter automatically.
12. Edit the height to 10. 13. Click OK .
2012 PTC
PT
9. Click Centerline from the Sketching group and sketch a centerline on the vertical reference.
In
te rn
from the Setup group in the ribbon.
nl y
2. Enable only the following Datum Display types:
from the Sweep
14. Click Create Section the dashboard.
from
from 15. Click Center and Point the Sketching group and sketch a circle as shown. 16. Click One-by-One diameter to 1. 17. Click OK . and edit the
18. Select the Pitch tab. 19. Edit the Pitch value from 1.00 to 2.00. 20. Click Left Handed dashboard. 21. Click OK . from the
1. Right-click Helical Sweep 1 and select Edit. 2. Right-click again and enable Display Sketch Dimensions.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
Task 2:
Create a relation to control the spring pitch.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
3. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the 4. Click Relations Model Intent group. 5. Select pitch dimension d2. 6. In the Relations dialog box, type =. 7. Select length dimension d1. 8. Type /6, where 6 is the desired number of coils. 9. The final equation should read d2=d1/6. 10. Click OK from the Relations dialog box and press CTRL+G. 11. Right-click Helical Sweep 1 and select Edit. 12. Right-click again and enable Display Sketch Dimensions.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
15. Notice the new compressed spring shape, with the same number of coils.
14. Click in the background of the graphics window to regenerate the model.
In
te rn
13. Select the upper endpoint of the profile and drag to approximately 12.00, then to approximately 8.00.
al
Module 11 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

You can create threads using helical sweep features.
Create protrusions or cuts. Protrusions add material to the model. Cuts remove material the from model. Usually use the Through axis of revolution option.
Figure 1 Completed Threads
Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

You can create threads using helical sweep features. You can create threads as both protrusions and cuts. Protrusions are created for adding material to the model, while cuts are created to remove material from the model. You typically use the Through axis of revolution option when using helical sweeps to create threads.
Fo r
Best Practices
Typically, you do not create threads for fasteners, threaded holes, and so on, because the threads would be for purely cosmetic purposes. You typically create helical sweeps for major helical model geometry that needs to be visualized, or in cases where clearances are close and must be measured or where tolerances are of importance.
Module 11 | Page 8
PT
Figure 2 Viewing the Sketched Profile
In
te rn
Figure 3 Viewing the Sketched Section
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Helical Sweeps for Threads

Close Window Erase Not Displayed THREADS.PRT
Sweep\Helical_Threads Task 1:
Create a helical sweep cut. .
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Helical Sweep the Shapes group. 3. Click Left Handed from the Sweep and Remove Material
5. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane. Click Sketch.
Fo r
from the 9. Click Centerline Sketching group and sketch a centerline on the center horizontal reference. Click One-by-One . Right-click and select Designate Axis of Revolution.
2012 PTC
PT
. 8. Click References Select the left and right edges, and the top silhouette edge. Click Close.
In
te rn
al
Module 11 | Page 9
U se
4. Select the References tab. Select Through axis of revolution, if necessary. Click Define to define the Helix sweep profile.
from the dashboard.
nl y
types drop-down list in
10. Click Line Chain and sketch a horizontal line from left to right, on top of the horizontal silhouette edge reference, overhanging at both ends. 11. Click Normal and dimension each overhanging end to the closest vertical edge, editing each dimension to 3. 12. Click OK .
13. Edit the Pitch value to 20. 14. Right-click in the graphics window and select Axis of Revolution and select axis A_1. 15. Click Create Section 16. Click Sketch View . .
Fo r
17. Click Palette and drag the thread sketch into the graphics window, then click Close from the dialog box. Drag the rotation handle to rotate the sketch 180 degrees. Right-click the location handle and drag it to the midpoint of the left, vertical line. Locate the sketch at the intersection of the bottom horizontal and left vertical references. Edit the Scale to 1 and click . Accept Changes 18. Click OK
19. Click Complete Feature 20. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
PT
. .
Module 11 | Page 10
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Copy the helical sweep to make two sets of threads.
1. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the model tree, click Copy and
then click Paste Special from the Paste types drop-down list. 2. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box, and click OK. 3. In the dashboard, click Rotate . Select the axis running through the part. Edit the rotation angle to 180. Click Complete Feature . This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations

You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and you can control the profile shape.
Controlling pitch values along length: Added via Pitch tab in dashboard First added value is the endpoint pitch. Additional points are added along length. Locate pitch value drag handles using: By value By Ratio By Reference Controlling profile shape: Profile must be tangent to use Normal to trajectory option. Example shapes: Straight line = Cylinder Angled line = Cone
Figure 1 Constant Profile, Constant and Variable Pitch
In
Fo r
Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations

You can control pitch values along the length of the profile and you can control the profile shape. Both of these options are valuable when you want to create a nontraditional spring.
Controlling Pitch Values Along the Profile Length

You control the pitch along the profile by adding pitch points at the locations you want the pitch to be different. The first value added is the endpoint pitch. If no others are specified, then the pitch is constant as shown in the left image of Figure 1 and Figure 2. Additional pitch points are added along the sweep axis either through the Pitch tab in the dashboard, or by right-clicking and selecting Add Pitch Point. When a point is added, a drag handle is available for it. The location of each point can be defined by the following options: By value Distance along sweep axis measured from the start point.
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Variable Profile, Constant and Variable Pitch
al
U se
nl y
By reference Point can snap to a datum point, datum plane, geometry reference, and so on. By ratio Measured as a length ratio along sweep axis. As you specify the pitch at the various points, the system displays them on the sweep axis so that you can view the pitch specified at each point. In the right image of Figure 1 and Figure 2, the pitch begins at a value of 1, increases to 4, and then decreases back to 1. This is in contrast to the left image of Figure 1 and Figure 2, where the pitch is a constant value of 1 along the entire profile.
Controlling Profile Shape
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 13
al
To use the Normal to trajectory option, the profile entities must be tangent to each other.
U se
Straight line Creates a cylindrical shaped spring, as shown in Figure 1. Angled line Creates a cone-shaped spring. Multiple lines/arcs Enables you to create a custom profile. For example, in Figure 2 the profile was created with three vertical lines and two diagonal lines connecting them. The resulting spring bows out in the center. You can even use splines and conics.
nl y
You can control the profile shape based on how you sketch it. The following are examples of the resulting spring shape for a given sketched section:
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Helical Sweep Profile and Pitch Variations

Sweep\Helical_Profile-Pitch_Solid PROFILE-PITCH_SOLID.PRT Task 1: Edit the shape of a spring by modifying its profile and pitch.
Display types:
Fo r
5. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar.
Module 11 | Page 14
PT
4. Drag or edit the center dimension to 6. Click in the background to regenerate the model. Notice the changed profile of the spring.
In
te rn
3. Select Sketch 1, then right-click and select Edit. Notice the profile sketch consists of multiple line segments. Notice the vertical centerline and datum points on the sweep axis (the centerline).
al
2012 PTC
U se
2. In the model tree, expand Helical Sweep 1.
nl y
6. Select Helical Sweep 1 in the model tree, then right-click and select Edit Definition. 7. Select the Pitch tab. Edit the existing pitch point to 1.00 and press ENTER. Click Add Pitch to create a pitch value at the end point, edit it to 1 and press ENTER. Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the first datum point from the bottom. Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the second datum point from the bottom. Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the third datum point from the bottom. Click Add Pitch, specify By reference and select the fourth datum point from the bottom. 8. Edit the pitch values as shown. Press ENTER after typing each value.
Fo r
10. Select Sketch 1, right-click, select Edit and edit the center dimension to 6. Click in the background to regenerate the model. 11. Select the Sketch 1 feature in the model tree, then right-click and select Hide.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
Module 11 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps

You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along the length of the sweep.
Along Trajectory options include: Keep constant section Vary section Constrain the section to other geometry with Vary section. Figure 1 Viewing the Original Constant Section Helical Sweep
Figure 2 Redefining the Section
Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps
Keep constant section Vary section
By setting the Vary section option, you are able to constrain the section to other geometry, as long as the system can regenerate the section along the entire helical path. For example, a surface that followed the range of the helical sweep can be utilized as a reference, whereas a datum plane referenced in the sketch plane is not valid.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 16
PT
You can define a section for a helical sweep to be variable along the length of the sweep. This is accomplished by selecting the desired Along Trajectory option in the dashboard. Along trajectory can be set to either of the following:
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Viewing the Variable Section Helical Sweep
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Utilizing Variable Sections in Helical Sweeps

Sweep\Helical_Variable-Section_Solid HELICAL_VAR-SOLID.PRT Task 1: Redefine a helical sweep to use the Vary section option.
2. Notice the constant section in the helical sweep feature.
Fo r
6. Notice the current sweep profile raises the center of the circular section.
7. In the dashboard, click Create Section .
8. Click Tangent from the Constrain group in the ribbon, and constrain the circle to be tangent to the cylindrical surface. Click Delete from the Resolve Sketch dialog box to delete the dimension. 9. Click OK .
2012 PTC
PT
Views
5. From the In Graphics toolbar, select FRONT from the Named drop-down list.
In
4. In the model tree, right-click Helical Sweep 1 and select Edit Definition.
te rn
Module 11 | Page 17
3. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Unhide. Edit the definition of Extrude 1 and notice it is a surface. Click Complete Feature .
al
U se
nl y
10. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select Vary section. 11. Click Complete Feature . 12. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Hide. 13. Notice that the current sweep profile still raises the center of the circular section, but the section is constrained to the cylinder, resulting in a smaller diameter. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
12
U se O te rn al
Module 12 | Page 1
Swept Blends
Module Overview
The swept blend feature utilizes multiple sections placed along a main trajectory. The system creates geometry by blending between the sections while sweeping along the trajectory path. The sections can vary in shape and size along the swept blend. An additional trajectory can also be used to orient the sections along the main trajectory. In this module, you learn how to use the swept blend to create solid geometry. You also learn about the many options provided to control the orientation and tangency of the sections.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the theory behind swept blends. Create swept blends by selecting sections. Create swept blends by sketching sections. Analyze the section options for a swept blend. Analyze swept blend section plane control. Analyze horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend. Analyze swept blend tangency. Analyze swept blend options. Analyze swept blend rules.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
Understanding Swept Blend Theory

A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple sections along a main trajectory.
Create a solid or surface feature. Add or remove material. Main components: Trajectories Use one or two Sections Two sections minimum Each must have same number of entities Select or sketch sections
Figure 1 Swept Blend Feature
Figure 2 Trajectories Highlighted in Green
Understanding Swept Blend Theory
Fo r
Trajectory Information
A swept blend can have two trajectories: an Origin trajectory (required) and a Secondary trajectory (optional). The swept blend in the figures uses both an Origin trajectory and a Secondary trajectory. To define a trajectory of the swept blend, you can select a sketched curve, a chain of datum curves, or edges. Each selected trajectory has end handles that you can dynamically drag if you want the feature to not follow the entire trajectory. You can specify a length from the end of the trajectory, or you can use the Trim At and Extend To options. Plus, you can use SHIFT to snap the trajectory endpoint onto other existing geometry.
Section Information
Each Swept Blend feature must have at least two sections, and additional sections may be added between these two sections. While the sections may change shape, they must each contain the same number of entities. The one exception to this rule is that you can blend sections to a point. You can also
PT
A swept blend enables you to simultaneously sweep and blend multiple sections along a main trajectory. With the Swept Blend feature, you can create a solid or surface feature. You can add or remove material, and the sections can be open or closed.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Sections Highlighted in Green
U se
nl y
add blend vertices to sections that need additional entities to equal those of other sections. Each blend vertex counts as one entity. You can sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices or datum points on the Origin Trajectory. To orient a section, you specify the direction of the sketch plane (the Z-axis) and the horizontal and vertical direction to that plane (the X or Y axis). You can use the Selected Sections option to select existing sketches, or edge and curve references and use them as sections for a swept blend.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 12 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections

You can select existing sketches to become sections for a swept blend feature.
Insert Enables you to select the next section Section inserted after currently selected section # entities in section displayed Remove Removes currently selected section Details Enables advanced selection
Figure 1 Selecting Sections
Figure 2 Inserting a Section
In
After selecting an Origin trajectory, you can select existing sketches or edge and curve references to become sections for the swept blend protrusion or cut.
Fo r
Options for selecting sections include: Insert Used to insert the next section after the currently selected section. If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert. In Figure 1, two sections are selected, one at the trajectory start and another at the trajectory end. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, a new section was inserted. Selected sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use the divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you can blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs. In the figures, a circle is blended into a rectangle. Remove Removes the currently selected section. Details Opens the Chain dialog box for advanced selection tools for selecting series of chains for sections.
PT
Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections
te rn
Figure 3 Start Point Moved
al
U se
nl y
Manipulating Selected Sections

The start point is displayed on the selected section. The system lines up the start points from each section. A twisting effect occurs if the start points for each of the sections are not in same relative position, as shown in Figure 2. You can select and drag the start points to a different vertex to remove or change the twisting effect, as shown in Figure 3.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 12 | Page 5
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Selecting Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SELECT_SECTIONS.PRT
Swept_Blend\Select_Sections Task 1:
Create a swept blend protrusion by selecting sections.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. Notice that the feature is a rectangle.
4. Edit the definition of SEC_2. 5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 6. Notice that this section is a circle divided into four entities. 7. Click OK .
Fo r
12. Click Swept Blend from the Shapes group in the ribbon.
from the 13. Click Solid dashboard, if necessary. 14. Select the trajectory. 15. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select the Selected Sections option. 16. Select the right circle as Section 1.
PT
10. Click OK
9. Notice that this section consists of four arcs. .
In
8. Edit the definition of SEC_3.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, select SEC_1.
17. In the Sections tab, click Insert and select the rectangle as Section 2.
18. In the graphics window, select the Section 1 tag, right-click, and select Insert Section.
22. Drag the start point up to the next entity endpoint to remove the twisting effect.
Fo r
24. In the model tree, right-click SEC_1 and select Edit. 25. Edit the angle from 0 to 20 and in the click Regenerate Operations group in the ribbon.
26. Spin the model, and notice that the sections do not have to be all the same angle. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
al
Module 12 | Page 7
U se
21. Notice the twisting effect in the geometry.
20. Select the left circle as Section 2.
nl y
19. Notice that a new section is inserted, making Section 2 now Section 3.
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature if desired.
Select trajectory You can flip the trajectory direction. Select section location Default locations Optional locations Sketch the section Start point Manage Sketched Sections # entities in section displayed Insert Remove
Fo r
Selecting the Trajectory

First, you must select the Origin trajectory. The direction of the sweep along the trajectory is displayed with an arrow. You can flip the direction of the arrow, which reverses the direction of the swept blend.
Selecting the Section Location

Next, you can select where to place a section along the trajectory. The default locations are the trajectory start and trajectory end, both denoted by a green X symbol, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Optionally, you can also select vertices or datum points as the location to place a section. In Figure 1, Section 2 is placed at the vertex of the arc and line. When you select the location of the section, it is specified in the Section Location collector. To relocate a section after sketching it with this option, select the section, activate the Section Location collector, and select a different chain
Module 12 | Page 8
PT
You can create all the sections within the swept blend feature if desired. Use the following procedure to create swept blend protrusions or cuts by sketching the sections.
Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections
In
te rn
Figure 2 Changed Section Location
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Sketching Sections
nl y
end, vertex, or datum point as the section location. In Figure 2, the section location for Section 2 has been relocated to the right trajectory endpoint. You cannot locate a section at a sharp corner of a trajectory, because the system is not able to determine the orientation of the section at that point.
Sketching the Sections

Once the location for a section is specified, you can sketch that section. When sketching the section in Sketcher, a start point appears on the first entity sketched. The system lines up the start points from each section when they are swept along the trajectory. A twisting effect occurs if the start points are not in the same relative position. You can change the location of the start point within Sketcher by selecting the desired vertex, right-clicking, and selecting Start Point. Unlike selecting sections for creating swept blends, you cannot move the start point except within Sketcher.
Within the Section tab of the dashboard, the following two options are available for managing sketched sections: Insert Used to insert the next section, after the currently selected section. If two sections are already selected, you can insert a new section between these existing sections by selecting the first section and clicking Insert. Remove Removes the currently selected section.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
The sketched sections are displayed in the Sections tab of the dashboard. The system lists the number of entities in the reference sketch next to each section. If the sections contain an unequal number of sides, you can use the divide tool to maintain an equal number of entities. For example, you can blend a triangle into a circle if the circle is divided, or broken, into three arcs.
U se
Managing Sketched Sections
nl y
Module 12 | Page 9
PROCEDURE - Creating Swept Blends by Sketching Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SKETCH_SECTIONS.PRT
Swept_Blend\Sketch_Sections Task 1:
Create a swept blend protrusion by sketching a section. .
2. Click Swept Blend 3. Click Solid
from the Shapes group in the ribbon.
4. Select the curve as the trajectory. 5. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. 6. Notice that the ends are available points for sketching sections. 7. Select the left endpoint and click Sketch. 8. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
Fo r
10. Click One-by-One and edit the width and height to 150 and 100, respectively. 11. Click OK .
12. In the Sections tab, click Insert. 13. Select the vertex between the line and arc and click Sketch.
Module 12 | Page 10
PT
and 9. Click Corner Rectangle starting in the upper-left corner, sketch a symmetrical rectangle.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
from the dashboard, if necessary.
nl y
14. Click Sketch View
from 15. Click Center and Point the Circle types drop-down list and sketch a 100 diameter circle. from the 16. Click Centerline Sketching group and sketch two centerlines at angles of 45.
18. Select the upper-left corner, then right-click and select Start Point. 19. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation. 20. Select the far right trajectory endpoint, and notice that the section relocates.
21. In the Sections tab, select Section 1 and click Insert.
22. Select datum point PNT0 from the model tree and click Sketch. 23. Click Sketch View
24. Click Corner Rectangle and, starting in the upper-left corner, sketch a symmetrical rectangle.
Fo r
25. Click One-by-One and edit both the width and height to 75. 26. Click OK .
27. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 28. Right-click and select Trajectory. 29. Click the trajectory direction arrow to flip the blend. 30. Notice that the sections maintain the same reference numbers. 31. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
17. Click Divide from the Editing group and divide the circle at each of the four centerline intersections.
32. Select datum point PNT0 in the model tree, then right-click and select Edit. 33. Edit the point ratio value from 0.5 to 0.7 and click Regenerate .
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

There are numerous section options available when creating a swept blend feature.
Z-Rotation Each section independent Range: +/-120 degrees Section X-axis directions Sets X-axis direction for active section Only available with Automatic Horizontal/Vertical control Blend vertices Sketched sections: Managed in section Selected sections: Managed using Sections tab and drag handles
Figure 2 Modified Section X-Axis Directions
In
te rn
Figure 3 Z-Rotation Modified
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options
Fo r
Consider the following section options that are available when creating a swept blend protrusion or cut.
Adding Blend Vertices

For a sketched section, blend vertices are created and managed in the section itself, within Sketcher. That is, you add blend vertices within Sketcher while sketching the section. For selected sections, blend vertices are added using the Add Blend Vertex option in the Sections tab of the dashboard. Each blend vertex displays in the graphics window as a drag handle. You can move the blend vertex locations by dragging their handles. In Figure 1, two blend vertices were added to the rear section and dragged to the top corners. You cannot add a blend vertex at the start point of a section. You can add blend vertices only to start and end sections that are located at trajectory vertices. You cannot add blend vertices to intermediate sections.
PT
al
U se
Figure 1 Blend Vertices
nl y
Modifying the Section X-Axis Directions

The Section X-axis directions option enables you to set the X-axis direction for the active section. When Horizontal/Vertical control in the References tab is specified as Automatic, the Section X-axis directions in the Sections tab is synchronized with the X direction reference at the start in the References tab. This option is available only when Automatic is specified as the Horizontal/Vertical control. In Figure 2, the X-axis direction was modified from one datum plane to another datum plane. Notice how the section reoriented.
Modifying the Z-Rotation
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
You can specify the sections rotation angle about the Z-axis for each location at which a sketched section is defined. Rotation angles can range in value between 120 and +120 degrees. In Figure 3, the Z-rotation was modified for each section individually to create different geometry.
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed OPTIONS.PRT
Swept_Blend\Section_Options Task 1:
Edit the swept blend Z rotation and section X-axis direction.
7. Notice the default X-direction in the Sketch view. 8. Press CTRL, select both construction lines, right-click, and select Geometry. 9. Click Delete Segment and delete all of the top, right, and bottom line segments.
Fo r
10. Click One-by-One , then select the right triangle point and right-click Blend Vertex. 11. Notice that the triangle faces in the X-direction.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 15
al
U se
4. Select Section 3 and click Sketch.
3. Select the Sections tab and select Section 2. Edit the Rotation angle to 20.
nl y
2. Edit the definition of Swept Blend 1.
12. Click OK and orient to the Standard Orientation. 13. In the Sections tab, click in the Section X-axis directions collector and select datum plane DTM1 from the model tree. 14. Notice the change in geometry orientation. 15. Click Complete Feature Task 2: .
Create a swept blend protrusion and add blend vertices to a section.
2. Click Solid from the dashboard, if necessary. 3. Select TRAJ_2 as the trajectory.
5. Select the rectangle as Section 1.
Fo r
6. In the Sections tab, click Insert and select the front sketch as Section 2. Notice that the # column in the Sections tab has 4 and 6 entities, respectively.
Module 12 | Page 16
PT
4. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select the Selected Sections option.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
1. Click Swept Blend from the shapes tab in the ribbon.
nl y
7. Select Section 1 and drag the start point to the lower-left. 8. Click Add Blend Vertex and drag it to the upper-right corner. 9. Click Add Blend Vertex again and drag it to the upper-left corner, if necessary. 10. Notice that the # column in the Sections tab now has 6 and 6 entities. 11. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

You can modify the swept blend's moving section frame orientation to create different geometry.
Section plane control options: Normal To Trajectory Normal to Origin trajectory by default Constant Normal Direction Section Z-axis parallel to specified reference direction Normal To Projection Origin trajectory projected onto specified reference
Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control
Fo r
Each sketched or selected section is placed on a moving section frame. You can adjust the orientation of this moving section frame using section plane control settings in the References tab of the dashboard. The following three section plane control options are available: Normal To Trajectory The moving section frame is always normal to a specified trajectory. By default, the section frame is normal to the Origin trajectory. If you have specified a Secondary trajectory, you can make the section frame normal to it by selecting the N check box in the References tab for the Secondary trajectory. In Figure 1, the section frame has been specified normal to the Secondary trajectory. Notice that the section is perpendicular to this Secondary trajectory. Constant Normal Direction The Z-axis (or section normal) of the moving frame is parallel to a specified direction. In the case of a datum plane, the Z-axis is parallel to the plane normal direction, so the section becomes parallel to the plane. The Direction reference collector enables you to add or delete the reference to which the Z-axis is parallel. In Figure 2, the
PT
Figure 2 Section Constant Normal Direction
In
te rn
Figure 3 Section Normal to Projection
al
U se
Figure 1 Section Normal to Trajectory
nl y
section plane control has been set to Constant Normal Direction, with the direction reference set to a datum plane. Notice that the section is parallel to the datum plane. Normal To Projection The section frame remains normal to the Origin trajectory as it is viewed along the projection direction. The Z-axis is tangent to the projection of the Origin trajectory at the direction specified. In Figure 3, the section plane control has been set to Normal To Projection. The Origin trajectory is projected onto Direction reference TOP. The resulting section frame is normal to this projected Origin trajectory.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Section Plane Control

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SECTION_PLANE.PRT
Swept_Blend\Section_Plane Task 1:
Analyze the section plane control options available for a swept blend protrusion.
2. Select TRAJ_1. 3. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation. 4. Notice that the trajectory is curved in this view, also. 5. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 6. Edit the definition of Swept Blend 1.
Fo r
9. In the References tab, select the N check box for the Secondary trajectory.
10. Notice that the section is normal to the Secondary trajectory.
11. In the References tab, select the N check box for the Origin trajectory. Right-click Secondary and select Remove. 12. Reorient the model and notice that the section is normal to the Origin trajectory.
Module 12 | Page 20
PT
8. Orient to the TOP view orientation.
7. In the dashboard, select the References tab. Notice that the Section plane control is Normal To Trajectory. Press CTRL and select the additional trajectory.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
13. Edit the Section plane control from Normal To Trajectory to Constant Normal Direction. 14. Enable Plane Display . 15. Select datum plane DTM1, orient to the TOP view orientation, and notice that the section is parallel to the datum plane.
17. Edit the Section plane control from Constant Normal Direction to Normal To Projection. Select the References tab to close it and select datum plane TOP from the model tree. Select the References tab and click Flip. 18. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.
19. Notice that the section is normal to datum plane TOP. 20. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 21
al
U se
nl y
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the swept blend feature.
Automatic Section plane automatically oriented in XY direction Normal To Surface Y-axis points normal to selected surface X-Trajectory Only available with two trajectories X-axis of section plane points to Secondary trajectory
Figure 1 Automatic Control
Fo r
Figure 2 Normal to Surface Control
PT
In
Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Horizontal and vertical control determines how the section frame rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the swept blend protrusion or cut. There are three types of Horizontal and Vertical control: Automatic The section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. Creo Parametric calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference collector enables you to define the initial section or frame X-axis orientation at the start of the swept blend. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that have a straight segment at the start. When the Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as Automatic, you can specify the X-Direction reference at start. The X-Direction reference at start
te rn
Figure 3 X-Trajectory Control
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 23
al
U se
sets the initial X-orientation of the section frame. The X-orientation is the positive X direction in the sketch view for the section. You can either specify this reference or leave it at Default, meaning that the system specifies a default orientation. In Figure 1, the Horizontal/Vertical control is set to Automatic. In turn, the X-Direction reference at the start is a datum plane. Normal To Surface The Y-axis of the section frame points in the direction of the surface selected, normal to any surface associated with the Origin trajectory. This is the default selection when the Origin trajectory has at least one associated surface. Click Next to toggle through possible surfaces, as shown in Figure 2. X-Trajectory This option becomes available when there is both an Origin and Secondary trajectory specified. The X-trajectory is the Secondary trajectory, and it must be at least as long as the Origin trajectory. For this option, the X-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep, as shown in Figure 3.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Horizontal and Vertical Control in a Swept Blend

Close Window Erase Not Displayed HORIZ-VERT.PRT
Swept_Blend\Horiz_Vert Task 1:
Specify the horizontal and vertical control in a swept blend.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. View the geometry: Orient to the TOP view orientation. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation. 3. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. 4. Edit the definition of Swept Blend 1.
5. In the dashboard, select the References tab and view the current settings.
Fo r
7. Select Automatic from the Horizontal/Vertical control drop-down list.
8. Notice that the sections have been reoriented.
9. Click in the X direction reference at start collector, select the References tab to close it, and select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree. Select the References tab to open it and click Flip.
Module 12 | Page 24
PT
6. Notice that the current Horizontal/Vertical control is specified as Normal To Surface in the drop-down list. Click Next four times to view the different possibilities.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Display types:
10. In the graphics window, select Section 2, then right-click and select Sketch. 11. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
from the 12. Click Sketch View Setup group in the ribbon. 13. Notice the current X direction. 14. Click OK .
17. Press CTRL and select the Secondary trajectory.
Fo r
20. Right-click and select Sketch. 21. Click Sketch View 23. Click OK . . .
22. Notice the new X-direction. 24. Click Complete Feature
2012 PTC
PT
19. Notice that the sections have been reoriented.
18. Select the References tab. Edit the Horizontal/Vertical control from Automatic to X-Trajectory. Notice that the X check box is now selected for the Secondary trajectory.
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 25
al
U se
16. Right-click and select Trajectory, if necessary.
nl y
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept blend feature.
Tangency conditions: Free Tangent
Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

You can manipulate the tangency of the geometry at either end of the swept blend protrusion or cut. You can change tangency condition settings either in the Tangency tab of the dashboard or by right-clicking the tangency condition icons in the graphics window and selecting the desired condition.
Fo r
There are three available tangency conditions: Free The start or end section is a free end; tangency is not defined.
Tangent The specified end is to be tangent to the selected adjacent surfaces. You must specify the adjacent surface to which each edge is to be tangent. The Entities collector advances automatically to the next entity. Normal The start or end of the swept blend is normal to the section plane. The Entities collectors are not available and references are not required.
If a Sketcher point is used at the start or end of the swept blend feature, you can define the condition for the geometry as Sharp or Smooth. You cannot define tangency for a thin protrusion.
Module 12 | Page 26
PT
In
Figure 2 Geometry After Tangency
te rn
al
Figure 3 Smooth and Sharp Conditions
2012 PTC
U se
Normal Sketcher point conditions: Sharp Smooth
Figure 1 Geometry Before Tangency
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Tangency

Close Window Erase Not Displayed TANGENCY.PRT
Swept_Blend\Tangency Task 1:
Add tangency constraints to the End Sections of a swept blend protrusion.
Fo r
6. Continue selecting the remaining three adjacent surfaces. 7. Notice the change in the geometry shape. 8. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
5. In the graphics window, right-click the icon for the End Section and select Tangent. Select the surface adjacent to the highlighted edge.
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 27
4. Continue selecting the remaining three adjacent surfaces. Notice that the first surface highlights after all four surfaces have been selected.
al
U se
3. In the dashboard, select the Tangency tab. Edit the Boundary Condition for the Start Section from Free to Tangent. Select the surface adjacent to the highlighted edge.
nl y
Task 2:
Edit the tangency for a Sketcher point condition of a swept blend protrusion.
2. Select Section 2, if necessary. 3. Right-click and select Sketch. 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 5. Drag a window around the existing rectangle sketch and delete it. 6. Click Point from the Sketching group and place a sketch point at the crosshairs. 7. Click OK . .
8. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 9. Click Preview Feature
Fo r
PT
10. Notice the sharp cap that has formed at the end.
12. In the dashboard, select the Tangency tab. Edit the Boundary Condition for the End Section from Sharp to Smooth. .
Module 12 | Page 28
In
te rn
. .
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
14. Right-click Draft 1 and select Edit. 15. Edit the draft angle from 10 to . -10 and click Regenerate
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 29
al
U se
nl y
Analyzing Swept Blend Options

You specify blend control for a swept blend feature.
Blend control No blend control Set perimeter control Create curve through center of blend. Set cross-section area control Predefined cross-sections cannot be edited.
Figure 1 No Blend Control
In
Analyzing Swept Blend Options
Fo r
You can control swept blend geometry by controlling the cross-sectional area between defined sections and by controlling how the perimeter varies between the sections. The following options are available: No blend control No blend control is specified for the swept blend. In Figure 1, no blend control is specified. Set perimeter control Forces the perimeter of the blend to vary linearly between sections. You can also have the system create a curve through the center of the blend. This curve becomes a part of the swept blend feature. Set cross-section area control Enables you to specify the cross-section area at designated locations of the swept blend. A table displays each specified location and the cross-sectional area at that location. The predefined cross-sections display in the table but the area cannot be edited in this table. To add additional locations, click in the table to activate it, then select points on the trajectory and edit the desired cross-section area. In Figure 2, the Options tab displays the four locations where the cross-section's area is controlled. For Sections 1 and 2, the Area cell is
PT
Figure 2 Options Tab
te rn
Figure 3 Cross-Section Area Control
al
U se
nl y
grayed out because these sections are predefined. The resulting geometry for the specified cross-section control is shown in Figure 3.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 31
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Swept Blend Options

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SWBL_OPTIONS.PRT
Swept_Blend\Swept_Blend_Options Task 1: Analyze swept blend options.
3. Select the Options tab. Select Set perimeter control. Notice that the preview geometry updated. Select the Create curve through center of blend check box. 4. Click Preview Feature . 5. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe from the Model Display types drop-down menu. 6. Notice the new center curves close to the original trajectory.
Fo r
PT
7. Select Shading from the Model Display types drop-down menu. . 9. Select the Options tab. Select Set cross-section area control. Notice the defined Area for Section 1 and Section 2. These areas are defined by the sketch or selected section and cannot be modified in this table.
Module 12 | Page 32
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. Select the vertex between the arc and line. 11. In the Options tab, edit the Area from approximately 9750 to 12000.
12. Press CTRL and select datum point PNT0. 14. Click Complete Feature .
15. Select datum point PNT0 in the model tree, then right-click and select Edit. 16. Edit the ratio from 0.3 to 0.7.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 33
al
U se
nl y
13. Edit the Area to 8500.
Analyzing Swept Blend Rules

There are rules and restrictions to consider when creating a swept blend feature.
Figure 1 A Swept Blend Cannot Intersect Itself
Figure 2 Creating a Swept Blend Over Non-Tangent Trajectory
Figure 3 Start Points Not Lining Up
PT
In
Fo r
Analyzing Swept Blend Rules

Consider the following rules and restrictions when creating a swept blend feature: For a closed trajectory profile, one section must be located at the start point and at least one other section at another location. A swept blend cannot intersect itself. Common causes of intersection are: The trajectory intersects itself. A section that is too wide is swept around too sharp of a corner, resulting in intersecting geometry. In Figure 1, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory, resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red cross-section lines in the front view display that the geometry does not overlap. In the right image, however, the section is too wide for the corner radius, resulting in intersection, and therefore failing, geometry.
te rn
Figure 4 Using Blend Vertices
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 35
al
U se
Creating a swept blend over a non-tangent trajectory results in a mitered effect in the geometry. In Figure 2, notice the sharp corner due to the non-tangent trajectory. Section references at the chain start and end points of the trajectory are dynamic and update if the trajectory is trimmed. When using the Normal To Trajectory section plane control option, the secondary trajectory must consist of entities that are tangent to one another. Section locations can be referenced to model geometry, but modifying the trajectory may invalidate the references and cause the swept blend to fail. If the start points do not line up between sections, a twisting effect is created, and this twisting effect can cause a feature to fail. In Figure 3, the swept blend start points are mismatched, resulting in the twisted geometry. You can also view the resulting geometry when the start points of the same sections are properly aligned. If there are unequal quantities of entities between sections, you must divide them or use blend vertices to create an equal number. In Figure 4, one section of the swept blend has four entities, while the other has six. It was necessary to add two blend vertices to the section containing fewer entities, and the resulting preview geometry can be seen.
nl y
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
13
U se O te rn al
Module 13 | Page 1
Advanced Layers
Module Overview
Layers provide a means of organizing model items, such as features, datum planes, parts in an assembly, and even other layers, so that you can perform operations on those items collectively. Layers enable you to simplify geometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model features or assembly components in the graphics window. Layers can also be used to perform actions, such as suppress all the items in a layer at once. You can create rules in a layer so that items that fulfill the rule are automatically added to the layer.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand layers. Create and manage layers. Create layer rules. Create layers in assemblies.
In
nl y
Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, components, and even other layers.
Managed in layer tree Uses include: Collectively perform operations Hide/Unhide Select Model management Layer types include: Default Automatic User-created
Fo r
Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, assembly parts, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you need and associate items with more than one layer.
Layer Uses
A layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer. Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to control the amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps you to more easily perform tasks. The two most common operations performed on items on a layer include: Hiding and Unhiding Layers You can hide and unhide layers in parts and assemblies. This hides or unhides the items on the layer. In Figure 1,
PT
Figure 1 Hiding Items using Layers
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Viewing the Layer Tree
U se
nl y
The Layer Tree
again toggles off the layer tree. You can also click Show from the top of the model tree and select Layer Tree. Figure 2 displays the layer tree.
There are three types of layers that you can create in a model: Default Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If your company uses part and assembly templates containing default layers, Creo Parametric automatically associates different features of a model to specific default layers. When using default layers, all parts have the same initial set of default layers. This enables you to use cascading layer control at the assembly level since each models layers are identically named. Automatic When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden items are automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer. User-Created You can create your own layers in a model and add items to them manually.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Layer Types
te rn
al
You use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on layers. You can access the layer tree by selecting the View tab and clicking Layers from the Visibility group. This toggles on the layer tree. Clicking the icon
U se
the datum axes layer has been hidden, preventing you from viewing any datum axes on the model. Hiding items on a layer seems similar to suppressing those same items. However, there are significant differences: When you suppress an item, it is removed from the regeneration cycle of the model, whereas hiding an item simply removes it from the graphics window. A hidden item is included in Creo Parametric calculations, such as mass properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in calculations. Selecting Items on the Layer Layers enable you to easily select multiple items, rather than selecting them individually. Mass selection is a beneficial, timesaving approach to follow in certain circumstances, such as needing to select 82 out of 100 part axes. Once the items in a layer are selected, you can perform operations on them. Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resuming them. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplified representation.
nl y
Module 13 | Page 3
Creating and Managing Layers

You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window.
Layer Properties: Name Contents Rules Different icons for layers with or without rules Set the Active Layer Status Save Reset Warning
Figure 1 Layer Properties Dialog Box
Figure 2 Layer with No Rule
In
Fo r
You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. This type of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, it is recommended that you name the layer to enable other designers to recognize the task. When you create a layer, the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 1. The dialog box displays the following information: Name This is the name of the layer. Contents The Contents tab displays which items are included or excluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayed with a green plus (+) symbol in the Status column, while items that are excluded from the layer are displayed with a red minus () symbol in the Status column. When selected, items are included on the layer if the Include button is turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the Exclude button is turned on. Rules The Rules tab displays any applicable rules that have been defined for the layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. To create a layer based on a rule, simply create a layer, name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In
PT
Creating and Managing Layers
te rn
Figure 3 Layer Created with Rule
al
U se
nl y
addition to its usefulness in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent when creating templates. Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than those layers that were created without rules. In Figure 2, the layer does not contain rules, while the layer in Figure 3 was created with a rule. The Layer Properties dialog box also displays when you view the layer properties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, and selecting Layer Properties. You may also decide to set a layer as the active layer. When a layer is set as the active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placed on the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as the active layer.
Understanding Layer Status
te rn
If you save a model and forget to save the layer status, the message log alerts you with a warning message, as shown here: .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by selecting the from the Status types drop-down View tab and selecting Reset Status menu in the Visibility group, or by right-clicking in the layer tree and selecting Reset Status.
In
al
by selecting the View tab and selecting Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. You can also right-click in the layer tree and select Save Status.
U se
Whenever you hide or unhide a layer, you are modifying the layer status for that model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when the model is saved. Thus, it is necessary to save the layer status if you wish to retain it for the next time the model is opened. You can save the layer status
nl y
Module 13 | Page 5
Creating Layer Rules

Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria.
Layer options: Associate Rules Enabled Independent Different icons for layers with/without rules. The Rule Editor: Look for Look in You can search for: Attributes History Status Geometry Query Builder
In
Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. The Rules tab of the Layer Properties dialog box displays the rules, if any, that are defined for the layer. To create a layer based on a rule, you simply need to create a layer, name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In addition to being useful in specific tasks, a ruled layer is beneficial when creating templates. There are three options for ruled layers: Associative Enables the rules to apply for existing model features. Layers are non-associative by default. Rules Enabled Enables the rules to apply for new features as they are created. Independent Enables the layer to be independent of the default layer model, therefore enabling customization. Layers are dependent by default. Layers that are created with rules are indicated by a different icon than those layers that were created without rules.
Fo r
PT
Creating Layer Rules
te rn
Figure 1 Rule Editor Dialog Box
al
U se
nl y
Using the Rule Editor

You can create rules using the Rule Editor dialog box, which is very similar to the Search Tool. The Rule Editor includes several options to search models by a variety of criteria including: Look For Specify the type of items for which you want to search. For example, you can search for features, components, or solid models. Look In Specifies against which model or models to conduct the search. You can have the rule look in a top-level assembly, a sub-assembly, or a part. If an assembly or sub-assembly is specified as the Look in object, you can select whether sub-models are included. You can set the Look in object either by selecting it from the drop-down list in the Search Tool and select the model from dialog box, or you can click Select Model the graphics window. The Rule Editor dialog box enables you to further narrow your criteria by using the following search options: Attributes Enables you to search for the following attributes: Name Feature or component name. Type Feature type (round or hole, for example). Size Solid model size. History Includes feature or component ID, and feature or component Number. Status Includes Regeneration status, Layer status, and Display status. Geometry Enables you to search for the following geometry parameters: Zone The component or solid model based on a defined zone. Distance Component or solid model based on a defined distance from a point. Exterior Comps Component or solid model based on a location towards the outside of an assembly.
Using the Query Builder
Fo r
The Rule Editor dialog box contains the Query Builder area. The Query Builder enables you to build a set of rules. Rules can be combined using AND and OR operators in the Query Builder. You can switch the operator from AND to OR and vice versa. The Query Builder enables you to add new rules and remove and update existing rules. You can also move selected rules up and down, as well as save the query for reuse.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 13 | Page 7
PROCEDURE - Creating Layer Rules

Close Window View\Rule_Layers Task 1: Erase Not Displayed RULES.PRT
Create a rule on a new part layer.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: Show Tree. .
and select Layer
4. Type HOLES as the Name. 5. Select the Rules tab and click Edit Rules. 6. In the Rule Editor dialog box, click Options and verify that Build Query is not selected. Edit the Look for drop-down list to Feature, if necessary. Select Type as the Rule. Select Hole as the Value. Click Preview Results. Click OK. By default, only new holes are added to the layer.
Fo r
7. Click Options > Associative in the Layer Properties dialog box and click OK. 8. Right-click the HOLES layer and select Hide. 9. Click Repaint Show Tree. .
10. In the top of the layer tree, click and select Model
Module 13 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer.
nl y
2. In the top of the model tree, click
11. Press CTRL, select Hole 2 and Hole 3, and click Mirror from the Editing group. 12. Select datum plane RIGHT and click Complete Feature . 13. In the top of the model tree, click Show Tree. and select Layer
16. Right-click HOLES and select Unhide. 17. Right-click HOLES and select Hide. 18. Click Repaint 19. Click Close Task 2: . .
2. In the top of the model tree, click
3. Right-click and select New Layer.
Fo r
4. Type HARDWARE as the Name.
2012 PTC
PT
Show Tree.
In
1. Click Open RULES.ASM.
and double-click
and select Layer
te rn
Create a rule on a new assembly layer.
al
U se
Module 13 | Page 9
15. Click Regenerate
to update the rule.
nl y
14. Expand the HOLES layer and notice the additional holes.
5. Select the Rules tab and click Edit Rules. 6. In the Rule Editor dialog box, click Options > Build Query. Edit the Look for drop-down list to Component. Select Name as the Rule. Type bolt* as the Value. Click Add New. 7. Edit the Look for drop-down list to Solid Model. Select Size as the Rule. Select Relative as the Criteria Type. Select is less than as the Criteria Comparison. Type 0.20 as the Value. Click Add New. Click Preview Results and click OK. 8. Click Options > Associative and click OK.
Fo r
10. Assemble BOLT_20DIA.PRT into the front hole and click to update the Regenerate rule. 11. The bolt is automatically hidden.
Module 13 | Page 10
PT
In
9. Right-click layer HARDWARE, select Hide, and click Repaint
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Layers in Assemblies

Options are available when you try to add an external item onto a layer.
Place External Item options: Place component on current layer Place item on all selected layers New layer Ignore item Ignore All Cascading layer control: Control a part level layer from an assembly. Both part and assembly must contain layer of the same name.
Figure 2 Placing an External Feature on a Layer
PT
In
Fo r
Creating Layers in Assemblies

You can place any assembly feature or assembled component onto an assembly layer the same as you can with a part layer in a part. However, if you try to place an external item onto an assembly layer, such as a part feature from an assembled component or a component belonging to an assembled sub-assembly, the Place External Item dialog box appears and requires that you make some decisions. Place component on current layer If you select a component to place on a layer that is found within a sub-assembly, you can select this option to place the component on the layer. The layer is only created at the assembly level, and not the sub-assembly. Note that, as shown in Figure 1, when a component is selected, the option Place item on all selected layers is grayed out in the Place External Item dialog box. Place item on all selected layers If you select a part level feature from a component, the dialog box displays all the layers found in the part. It automatically selects the layer or layers that the feature is already on.
te rn
Figure 3 Cascading Layer Control
al
U se
Figure 1 Placing an External Component on a Layer
nl y
Cascading Layer Control in Assemblies
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
The layer tree also displays a different layer icon for the common layer.
al
Layers in assemblies can provide you with cascading control. You can control a part level layer from an assembly if the part and assembly both contain a layer of the same name. When this circumstance occurs, you can edit the layer properties and layer display of each component individually, as shown in the Figure 3.
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
You then have the option of selecting additional layers to which you want the feature added. Remember that selecting this option causes the part feature item to be placed on a part level layer, not the assembly level layer. Note that, as shown in Figure 2, when a feature is selected, the option Place component on current layer is grayed out in the Place External Item dialog box. New layer Creates a new layer and places the selected component or feature on that layer. Again, note that the layer is created in the part from which the selected component or feature is selected. The new part layer name is the same as the one you are creating at the assembly level, and helps to facilitate cascading layer control. Ignore item Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers or add any features or components to existing layers. Ignore All Closes the dialog box and does not create any new layers or add any features or components to existing layers.
PROCEDURE - Creating Layers in Assemblies

Close Window View\Assy_Layers Task 1: Erase Not Displayed LAYER.ASM
Experiment with the active object drop-down list. .
2. Examine the model tree and expand HARDWARE.ASM. 3. Notice that some of the nuts and bolts are in the sub-assembly, and some are at the top level. 4. In the top of the model tree, click Show Tree. and select Layer
Fo r
9. Notice that the 01__PRT_DEF_ DTM_PLN layer is hidden at this level.
10. Select LAYER.ASM from the active object drop-down list.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Select LAYER_BASE.PRT from the active object drop-down list at the top of the layer tree.
In
and notice 7. Click Repaint the cascading effect from the assembly through the parts.
te rn
Module 13 | Page 13
6. Right-click 01__PRT_DEF_ DTM_PLN and select Hide.
al
5. Expand 01__PRT_DEF_DTM_ PLN and notice that this layer is found both in the assembly and in part models.
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Create layers in assemblies.
1. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. 2. Type BOLTS as the Name. 3. Select BOLT_12DIA.PRT. 4. Select BOLT_20DIA.PRT. The Place External Item dialog box displays. Click Place component on current layer. 5. Click OK. 6. Right-click the BOLTS layer, select Hide, and click Repaint .
8. Type NUTS as the Name. 9. Select NUT_12MM.PRT.
11. Click OK.
Fo r
12. Expand the BOLTS and NUTS layers. 13. Notice that the BOLTS layer is just at the assembly level. 14. Notice that the NUTS layer is in both the HARDWARE and LAYER assemblies. 15. Right-click the NUTS layer, select Hide, and click Repaint .
Module 13 | Page 14
PT
10. Select NUT_20MM.PRT. The Place External Item dialog box displays because the nut is in a sub-assembly. Click New Layer.
In
te rn
7. Right-click and select New Layer.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
16. Orient to the Standard Orientation and enable Axis Display .
17. Right-click and select New Layer. 18. Type HOLES as the Name. 19. Query-select the left rear hole. The Place External Item dialog box appears because the feature is in the part model. Click New Layer. 20. Query-select the right rear hole. In the Place External Item dialog box, select the HOLES layer and click Place item on all selected layers. 21. Click OK.
Fo r
22. Expand the HOLES layers in the part. 23. Notice that there are no items in the top-level assembly HOLES layer. 24. Right-click the HOLES layer, select Hide, and click Repaint .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 13 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
14
U se O te rn al
Module 14 | Page 1
Advanced Reference Management

Module Overview
Creo Parametric's advanced reference management tools enable you to efficiently manage parent/child relationships and design intent. You can edit and replace feature references without redefining those features. You can replace Sketcher geometry to reroute children to the new reference, and you can replace missing Sketcher references and solve the section with the new references.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Edit feature references. Replace feature references. Replace Sketcher references. Replace Sketcher geometry.
In
nl y
Editing Feature References

You can use Edit References to reroute feature references to alternate selections.
You can roll the model back. The system highlights each reference during reroute. Reroute options: Alternate Same Ref Ref Info
PT
In
Figure 2 Viewing the Rerouted Hole
Fo r
Editing Feature References

You can use Edit References to reroute feature references to alternate selections. When you edit the references of a feature, the system cycles through and highlights all the references used to create the feature, in the order originally selected. For each reference, you can then select to either maintain the same reference, or select or create a new one. When you initialize the Edit References functionality, you are prompted to decide whether to roll back the model. The options for this prompt are: No The feature Insert Indicator model tree. is left in its current position in the
Yes The feature Insert Indicator is automatically moved to the current feature, temporarily suppressing all subsequent features in the model tree and display. Rolling a model back is useful because it simplifies the display when several features follow the feature being rerouted.
te rn
Figure 3 Viewing Reference Information
al
U se
Figure 1 Selecting an Alternate Reference
nl y
Reroute Options
To handle each feature reference, you can select from the following three options: Alternate Enables you to select or create an alternate reference for the feature. You can use the datum features toolbar if necessary, while in the Reroute menu, to construct new references. Same Ref Causes the currently highlighted reference to remain the same. Ref Info Displays information about the highlighted reference in an information window. This option provides the reference identifier and the type of reference. This is important because you can only reroute to like reference types. You can create datum features on-the-fly while in Reroute mode. These features are placed before the current feature in the model tree, and are available for selection during Reroute. If you quit the Reroute operation, the datum features remain.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 14 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Editing Feature References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EDIT_REFERENCES.PRT
Edit\Edit_References Task 1:
Reroute feature references using Edit References functionality.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Select Hole 1 from the model tree. Notice this feature is midway in the model tree. 3. Right-click and select Edit References. 4. Click Yes to roll back the model. 5. Notice that the Insert Indicator is now beneath Extrude 2, and that all downstream features are temporarily suppressed. 6. Read the prompt in the message window and notice the highlighting.
Fo r
8. Read the prompt and notice the highlighting. 9. Select datum axis CYL.
10. Notice that the hole is rerouted, and the downstream features are restored.
Module 14 | Page 4
PT
7. Notice that Alternate is specified in the menu manager, and select the top of the cylinder.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Right-click Hole 3 and select Edit References. 12. Click No to keep the model from rolling back. 13. Notice that the Insert Indicator location is unchanged.
15. Notice that Alternate is specified in the menu manager, and select datum axis A_2.
18. Read the prompt in the message window, notice the highlighting, and click Same Ref. 19. Notice that the hole is rerouted. 20. Enable Plane Display
In
21. Right-click Extrude 3, select Edit References, and click No.
Fo r
22. Read the prompt in the message window and notice the highlighting on the hole surface. 23. Select the main model surface as the alternate reference.
24. Read the prompt in the message window and notice the highlighting. 25. Notice that Alternate is specified, and select datum plane RIGHT.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
17. Click Same Ref.
al
Module 14 | Page 5
16. Read the prompt in the message window and notice the highlighting.
U se
nl y
14. Read the prompt in the message window and notice the highlighting.
26. Read the prompt and click Ref Info. 27. Notice that the reference is datum plane, and click Close. 28. Click Same Ref from the menu manager. 29. Read the prompt and click Ref Info. 30. Notice that the reference is the round edge, and click Close.
32. Notice that the protrusion is taller. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
31. Click Alternate and select the front model surface.
Replacing Feature References

You can replace a reference with an alternate reference for all children of that reference.
You can replace: A feature. Individual entities. You can replace a reference for: A selected feature. All children of the reference.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Original Model Figure 3 Model with Replaced Sketch Feature
Fo r
Replacing Feature References

You can replace a reference with an alternate reference. You can select whether to replace the reference for a specified feature or for all children of that reference. The All Children option is a powerful function, because it can replace downstream usage of the reference for multiple features at once. To replace a reference, you simply select the entity you want to replace, then select the new, alternate entity. The following two types of entities can be replaced:
Feature Enables you to select a feature. Indiv Entity Enables you to select an individual entity, such as an edge, vertex, or plane. Once you have specified the entity to be replaced, you must specify how to handle the children of the replaced entity. You have two options from which to select:
al
U se
Figure 1 Replacing an Individual Entity
nl y
Sel Feat Replaces the reference in a selected feature. All Children Replaces the reference in all child features. In Figure 1, all three holes reference the left datum axis. When the left datum axis is replaced with the right datum axis for all children, all three holes move to the right datum axis. In Figure 2 and Figure 3, both the rib and variable section sweep features reference the sketch. When the sketch is replaced for all its children, the geometry for both the rib and variable section sweep updates. It does not matter which feature you select to initiate the Replace Ref command, unlike Reroute.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Feature References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REPLACE_REFS.PRT
Edit\Replace_References Task 1:
Replace an individual entity reference.
4. With Hole 3 still selected, right-click and select Edit References. 5. Click No to prevent the model from rolling back.
Fo r
7. Notice that all three holes update, even though each hole individually references the axis, not each other. Replace feature references.
Task 2:
1. Click the Operations group drop-down list and select Resume > Resume Last Set. 2. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation.
2012 PTC
PT
6. In the menu manager, click Replace Ref > Indiv Entity. Select the datum axis running through the hole as the reference to be replaced. Select the other datum axis as the alternate axis. Click All Children.
In
te rn
al
Module 14 | Page 9
U se
3. Select Hole 1, Hole 2, and Hole 3 from the model tree to review their locations.
nl y
2. Examine the model tree, and notice that the two datum axes are not individual axis features.
3. Select SKETCH_A, SKETCH_B, Profile Rib 1, and Sweep 1 to review their locations. SKETCH_A is currently referenced by Profile Rib 1 and the sweep as a sketch and trajectory, respectively. 4. With Sweep 1 still selected, right-click and select Edit References. 5. Click No to prevent the model from rolling back. 6. In the menu manager, click Replace Ref > Feature. Select SKETCH_A as the reference to be replaced. Select SKETCH_B as the alternate feature. Click All Children. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 7. Notice that both features have updated to the new reference. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Replacing Sketcher References

References can be replaced using the References dialog box.
Replace missing or valid references. Similar to Reroute, but in Sketcher. Reference status. Solve option.
Figure 1 Replacing a Missing Reference
Replacing Sketcher References

You can replace valid, invalid, and/or missing references in Sketcher. This is similar to using the Reroute option in Part mode, but is available from within Sketcher mode. The system preserves the original ID of the replaced reference for the best possible handling of any child features. The following options are found in the References dialog box: Replace Enables you to select a reference from the list and replace it with a new reference. Delete Deletes the currently selected reference. Reference status Indicates the current status of references. Unresolved References There are missing and/or unresolved references. References need to be replaced or additional references may be required. Unsolved Sketch Adequate references exist to place the sketch, but there still may be missing or invalid references. Fully Placed All references are valid and there are adequate references to place the sketch.
Fo r
PT
Figure 2 Solving with Replaced Reference
In
te rn
Figure 3 Viewing the Solved References
al
U se
nl y
Solve Attempts to solve the sketch based on the current references.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Sketcher References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REPLACE_SK_REFS.PRT
Edit\Replace_Sketch_Refs Task 1:
Resume a feature and replace a reference in Sketcher using the new option. .
4. Notice the missing references.
6. Select the next MISSING REFERENCE and click Replace. Select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree. Since the reference is now the same, it is removed from the list. Notice that the Reference status is currently "Unsolved sketch."
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
5. Select the first MISSING REFERENCE and click Replace. Select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree.
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 13
al
U se
3. Edit the definition of OVAL_SKETCH.
2. Click Resume > Resume All from the Operations group drop-down menu. Notice that some features failed to regenerate and that the features are highlighted in the model tree.
nl y
7. Click Solve. Notice that the Reference status is now "Fully Placed." 8. Notice that the remaining reference is not missing, but is to an edge of a round. Select the Edge:F12(ROUND_2) reference and click Replace. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree. Click Solve and then click Close. 9. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 10. Edit the dimensions as shown.
11. Click OK
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Replacing Sketcher Geometry

The Replace function helps mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches.
Select Replace from the Operations group drop-down menu: Select the original entity. Select the new entity. The children of the replaced entity are rerouted to the new entity.
PT
In
Figure 2 - Replacing an Entity
Fo r
Replacing Sketcher Geometry

When a change is made to a parent feature, it automatically updates any children. This is beneficial functionality and demonstrates the power of Creo Parametric. However, if a change to a parent feature results in a child not being able to find a particular parent's reference, a failure occurs. Creo Parametric reports this error in the message window and failure diagnostics window as, Feature references are missing. Editing a sketch can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces in a model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parents to other features, failures can occur. In Figure 1, the sketched entity is being deleted to modify the sketch. However, Creo Parametric indicates that this entity is referenced by other entities (a round feature). If you decide to continue and delete this entity, the child features fail due to this reference being removed. One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches is to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers references from an old entity to the new entity you have created. This means the children of
te rn
Figure 3 Part Model Before and After Replace
al
U se
Figure 1 Deleting an Entity without Replace
nl y
the replaced entity are automatically rerouted to the new entity. You can click the Operations group drop-down menu, then select Replace. You then select the original entity that contains the references, then select the new entity to which you want references transferred.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Sketcher Geometry

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REPLACE_SK_GEOM.PRT
Edit\Replace_Sketch_Geom Task 1:
Replace Sketcher geometry in a part model.
4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 5. Click Sketch View Setup group. . from the
7. Read the warning message and click Yes. 8. Click 3-Point / Tangent End from the Sketching group and sketch an arc in its place.
PT
9. Click OK
In
Fo r
11. Notice that SIDE_ROUND and its children fail.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 14 | Page 17
6. Select the right side angled line, then right-click and select Delete.
al
U se
3. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch.
nl y
2. Edit the definition of BASE_PROTRUSION.
12. Click OK in the caption to accept the changes. 13. In the model tree, right-click SIDE_ROUND and select Info > Feature. 14. Notice that SIDE_ROUND is failing because feature references are missing. 15. Close the Browser. 16. Edit the definition of SIDE_ROUND. 17. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab, select Set 2, and click in the Driving Surface collector. 18. Spin the model and select the surface to satisfy the missing reference. 19. Click Complete Feature Task 2: .
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from the
Fo r
4. Click Sketch View Setup group.
5. Select the right arc and click Mirror from the Editing group. Select the vertical centerline and de-select the mirrored arc.
Module 14 | Page 18
PT
2. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch.
In
1. Edit the definition of BASE_PROTRUSION.
te rn
Transfer references using Replace to avoid a missing references failure.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
6. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Replace. Select the left angled line. Select the newly mirrored arc. Click Yes in the Replace Entity dialog box. 7. Click OK . . 8. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 19
al
U se
Using the Replace functionality enables you to transfer references to the arc entity and avoid failures.
nl y
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
15
U se O te rn al
Module 15 | Page 1
Family Tables
Module Overview
When creating design models, you can vary existing models and quickly create multiple instances by using family tables. This is especially useful for common hardware items such as screws, bolts, and nuts. In this module, you learn how to create multiple design variations of models using family tables.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the theory behind family tables. Learn how to create a family table and multi-level family table. Pattern family table instances. Edit family table members.
In
nl y
Understanding Family Table Theory

Family tables enable you to create a large number of common parts quickly based upon an initial or "generic" design model.
Family tables: Collection of parts, assemblies, or features. Spreadsheets comprised of rows and columns. Promote use of standardized components. Family tables consist of: A generic model. Original model Items that can be varied. One or more instance models. Family members
Figure 2 Family Table Instances
PT
In
Understanding Family Table Theory
Fo r
Family tables are a collection of parts, assemblies, or features that are similar, but deviate slightly in some aspect, such as size or which detail features are included. For example, bolts of a certain type, though different in size, all look alike and perform the same function. Thus, it is useful to think of them as a family of part models. Parts in family tables are also known as table-driven parts. Family tables promote the use of standardized components.
Family Table Structure

Family tables are essentially spreadsheets, comprised of columns and rows. A family table consists of the following three components: The generic object, or base object All members of the family table are based on the generic object. The items specified in the generic that can be varied in the instances. Instances The family members created in the table based on the generic model.
te rn
Figure 3 Selecting the Instance
al
U se
Figure 1 Family Table
nl y
The family table rows contain the generic model and instances of parts and their corresponding values. The generic model is the first row in the family table. The family table columns are used to specify the items in the generic model that can be varied in the instances. The family table also contains a header that specifies the column names. It is important to note that when creating a family table, the system is not actually creating additional *.prt files for each instance; the instances are virtual. When a particular instance is opened, the system actually opens the generic model first, and then regenerates it according to the information in the family table row for that instance.
Family Tables Uses
You can use family tables for any of the following reasons:
Family Table Instance Identification and Facts

Instances are identified in the following ways: You can set the config.pro option menu_show_instances to yes to display all instances in the File Open dialog box and Browser. Instances display as instance_name<generic_name>.prt. When you open a generic model, the system prompts you to specify which file to open in the Select Instance dialog box. You may select to open the generic file or an instance associated with it. You can open a file By Name or By Column. The By Column option enables you to filter which instance to open based on the values defined for the variable items in the family table. When a family table model is opened in Creo Parametric, the lower-left corner of the graphics window indicates whether it is a generic or instance. You use the config.pro option modeltree_show_gen_of_instance to control the display of the name of the generic instance in the model tree. The default setting displays the generic name. For example, if the generic model is called BOLT_FAM.PRT and you open instance BOLT_6-15.PRT from it, the instance displays in the model tree as BOLT_6-15<BOLT_FAM>.PRT. You can right-click an instance and select Open Generic to open the generic model. This option is available from the top node in a part model, or from a component in an assembly model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Create and store large numbers of objects simply and compactly within a single model. Save time and effort by standardizing part generation. Generate variations of a part from one part file instead of having to model each one. Create slight variations in parts without having to use relations to change the model. Create a table of parts that can be included in part catalogs or on a drawing.
al
U se
nl y
Module 15 | Page 3
Creating a Family Table

You can create variations of design models using family tables.
To create a family table: Create the generic Create the table and specify items to be varied Insert and configure new instances Verify instances Other family table operations: Cut/Copy/Paste Find Instance Preview Instance Lock/Unlock Instance Edit With Excel
Figure 2 Family Table Instances
Creating a Family Table
Adhere to the following steps to create a family table:
Fo r
Dimensions Components Groups
PT
in the model that can be varied in the instances using Add Columns Family Table dialog box. Each item specified in the generic is added as a new column to the table, in the order in which the items were specified. The following items can be added to the family table:
In
Create the model that is to be used as the generic model in the family table. Create the new family table in the model. Specify the items in the generic
te rn
Features Parameters Pattern Tables
al
All aspects of the generic model that are not included in the family table as items to be varied, automatically occur in each instance. For example, if the generic model contains a 2 hole, all instances contain the same 2 hole in the same location. , and Add rows with the names of instances using Insert Instance configure each instance based on the items available to be varied in the table. For each instance, depending upon the item type, you can specify a value of Y or N (Yes or No) or type a numerical value. For example, you can specify a different value for a dimension or parameter. All dimension table cells must have a value specified. If the value is specified as an asterisk (*), that item uses the generic's value. If a value is specified as N,
U se
Merge Parts Ref Models Other
nl y
the feature is suppressed in the regeneration cycle for that instance. If the value is specified as Y, the feature is included in the regeneration cycle for that instance. In Figure 1, the 6-POINT feature is included in only the 1/4 socket, while the 12-POINT feature is included in only the 3/8 and 1/2 sockets. In Figure 2, the left image displays the 1/4 socket and notice that only the 6-POINT feature is visible. Verify the family table instances using Verify Instances in the Family Table dialog box. The Verify function attempts to regenerate each instance in the table utilizing the values specified for that instance. If the values enable the instance to properly regenerate, its verification status is listed as Success. If the values cause a geometry failure or some other type of failure, the verification status is listed as Failure. Any time a change is made to the family table you must reverify all instances.
Other Family Table Operations
Within the Family Table dialog box, the following additional operations can be performed: /Paste Cells Operations You can cut, Cut Cells /Copy Cells copy, and paste cell values. You can also use CTRL+C, CTRL+X, and CTRL+V, or right-click and select Delete Rows to remove any unwanted instances. Find Instance Enables you to find a particular instance or group of instances based on Type and the Type's value. Enables you to preview an instance in a separate Preview Instance window. Lock Unlock Instance cannot be modified.
Edit With Excel Enables you to use Microsoft Excel (if it is installed) to populate the family table.
Fo r
Best Practices
To make identification easier, rename dimensions that are to be used in family tables. The column header name for dimensions displays as the name of the dimension. Thus, in the family table it is easier to identify the dimension as DRIVE_SIZE, rather than d3, as shown in Figure 1.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Enables you to lock an instance so its values
al
U se
O
Module 15 | Page 5
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Family Table

Close Window Erase Not Displayed FAMILY_TABLE.PRT
Feature-Tools\Create_Fam-Tab Task 1:
Create a family table for a socket set.
5. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family
6. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns 7. In the Family Items dialog box, select Dimension if necessary, and select the DRIVE_SIZE dimension. Select Parameter, select the Description parameter, and click Insert Selected > Close in the Select Parameter dialog box. Select Feature, select the 6-POINT and 12-POINT features, and click Done > OK. 8. In the Family Table dialog box, click Insert Instance .
te rn
Table
al
Fo r
two Click Insert Instance more times to add a total of three instances. Edit the three Instance Names to 1-4_SOCKET, 3-8_SOCKET, and 1-2_SOCKET.
Module 15 | Page 6
PT
In
U se
.
2012 PTC
4. Notice the dimensions defining the socket drive.
3. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Switch Symbols.
nl y
2. In the model tree, right-click DRIVE and select Edit.
9. In the DRIVE_SIZE column, type 6.35, 9.55, and 12.70 for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively. 10. In the DESCRIPTION column, type 1/4 SOCKET, 3/8 SOCKET, and 1/2 SOCKET for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively.
13. In the Family Table dialog box, . click Verify Instances 14. In the Family Tree dialog box, click Verify > Close.
Fo r
17. In the Family Table dialog box, right-click 1-2_SOCKET and select Open.
18. Notice that the instance opens in a new window and that the graphics window displays its name. 19. Notice that 6-POINT is absent from the model tree.
2012 PTC
PT
16. In the Family Table dialog box, select the 1-4_SOCKET and click Preview Instance . Click Close.
In
te rn
15. Notice that the graphics window now displays the original model as the GENERIC Instance.
al
Module 15 | Page 7
U se
12. In the 12-POINT column, type N, Y, and Y for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively.
nl y
11. In the 6-POINT column, type Y, N, and N for the 1-4, 3-8, and 1-2 sockets, respectively.
20. Click Open , select FAMILY_TABLE.PRT, and click Open. 21. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 3-8_SOCKET, and click Open. 22. Notice the model tree displays the instance name with the generic name in brackets. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 15 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Patternizing Family Table Instances

You can use the Copy with Increments tool to automatically generate a large number of instances by incrementing dimensions.
Direction Quantity Items Increment value Figure 1 Patternizing Instances
In
te rn
Figure 3 Patternized Models
Fo r
You can use the Copy With Increments tool to automatically generate a large number of instances by incrementing dimensions. This tool works well for family tables of parts whose family items are consistently incremented, such as nuts, bolts, socket sets, and so on. When you start the Copy with Increments tool, the Patternize Instances dialog box appears, enabling you to configure the patternizing options. The following options are available for patternizing instances: Direction Defines the group of items that are to be patternized. Quantity Specifies the quantity of instances that are patternized in a given direction. Items Specifies which Family Items are to be patternized. Any Family Item that requires a value can be patternized. Features that are defined as Y or N in the family table cannot be patternized. Increment value Defines the value that the Item is patternized for each instance. If you define multiple directions to be patternized, the system creates a matrix of instance results. In Figure 2, the socket size is incremented in the first direction for a total quantity of 6, and the socket depth is incremented in the
PT
Patternizing Family Table Instances
al
U se
nl y
second direction for a total quantity of 2. Therefore, a total of 12 instances are created, 6 for all socket sizes at one depth, and 6 for all socket sizes at the second depth.
Fo r
Module 15 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Patternizing Family Table Instances

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PATTERNIZE.PRT
Feature-Tools\Patternize Task 1:
Patternize a part model to create multiple instances.
Parameters
3. Notice that there is a parameter named SOCKET_SIZE. Click OK.
Switch Symbols
Relations
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
7. Notice that the DIA dimension is controlled by the SOCKET_SIZE parameter. Click OK.
In
te rn
.
Module 15 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
8. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family Table . . 9. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns 10. In the Family Items dialog box, select Parameter, select the SOCKET_SIZE parameter, and click Insert Selected > Close in the Select Parameter dialog box. In the Family Items dialog box, select Dimension, select the DEPTH dimension, and click OK > OK. 11. In the Family Table dialog box, click Insert Instance .
12. Click Copy With Increments . 13. In the Patternize Instance dialog box, edit the Quantity for Direction1 to 6. Select SOCKET_SIZE and . click Add Item Edit the Increment to 1. and Select Add Direction edit its quantity to 2. Select d1, DEPTH and click . Add Item Edit the Increment to 30.
Fo r
Module 15 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
14. Click OK in the Patternize Instance dialog box. 15. In the Family Table dialog box, right-click PATTERNIZE_INST and select Delete Rows. 16. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box. 17. Edit the Instance Names for the 25.4 depth to XXmm_SHALLOW, where XX is the socket size. 18. Edit the six * values to 25.4. 19. Edit the Instance Names for the 55.4 depth to XXmm_DEEP, where XX is the socket size. 20. In the Family Table dialog box, . click Verify Instances 21. In the Family Tree dialog box, click Verify > Close.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
23. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.
22. In the Family Table dialog box, select 15MM_SHALLOW and click Preview Instance . Click Close. Select 15MM_DEEP and click . Preview Instance Click Close.
In
te rn
Module 15 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

You can use an instance from a family table as the generic for a different family table.
Creation Instance from one family table is the generic for another family table. Recognition Folder icon in original generic table's Type column. Select Instance dialog box displays twice.
Figure 1 The 1/4 Inch Drive 12mm Socket
PT
Figure 2 Opening a Multi-Level Instance
In
Fo r
Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

A family table is not restricted to a single level of a table. You can create instances of instances by opening an instance and creating a new family table for it. In other words, the instance of the first family table is now the generic for a second family table. This is known as a nested family table. Another way to create a nested family table is to open a generic model's family table, select the desired instance that is to become the generic of the new family table, and click Insert > Instance-Level Table in the Family Table dialog box main menu.
Recognizing a Multi-Level Family Table

When you open a generic model, the Select Instance dialog box enables you to select any instance in the family table. If you select an instance that is the generic for another family table, the Select Instance dialog box opens again and displays the instances for this second family table, enabling you to select any instance in the second family table.
te rn
Figure 3 Multi-Level Family Table
al
U se
nl y
If you open the family table of the original generic model, the instances that contain family tables of their own display a folder icon in the Type column of the Family Table dialog box, as shown in Figure 3. You can also switch from the generic family table into the instance's family table within the Look In drop-down list, as shown in Figure 3. Because the nested instances are children of the original family table, they must also be reverified any time a change is made to the generic model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 15 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Multi-Level Family Table

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MULTI_FAM-TAB.PRT
Feature-Tools\Multi-Level Task 1:
Create a multi-level family table.
1. In the Select Instance dialog box, select The generic and click Open. 2. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select Family Table . 4. Notice that the family table consists of three different drive sizes. 5. In the Family Table dialog box, select the 1-4_DRIVE instance. Click Insert > Instance-Level Table from the top menu. 6. A new family table is created for the 1-4_DRIVE instance.
8. In the Family Items dialog box, select Parameter, select SOCKET_SIZE, and click Insert Selected > Close. In the Family Items dialog box, select Feature, select Revolve 1, and click Done > OK.
Fo r
9. In the Family Table dialog box, click Insert Instance six times to insert six instances. Increment the cells in the SOCKET_SIZE column from 8 to 13, one millimeter at a time. Type Y for REVOLVE_1 for the 8 and 9 SOCKET_SIZE. Type N for REVOLVE_1 for the 1013 SOCKET_SIZE. Type XXmm_SOCKET for the Instance Name, where XX is the SOCKET_SIZE.
Module 15 | Page 16
PT
7. In the Family Table dialog box, click Add Columns
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. In the Family Table dialog box, . click Verify Instances 11. Notice that these instances are sub-instances to the 1-4_DRIVE instance. 12. In the Family Tree dialog box, click Verify > Close.
13. In the Family Table dialog box, edit the Look In drop-down to MULTI_FAM-TAB. 14. Notice that the 1-4_DRIVE instance now displays a folder icon in the Type field. 15. Right-click 1-4_DRIVE and select Open.
Fo r
18. Click Open , select MULTI_FAM-TAB.PRT, and click Open.
19. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 1-4_DRIVE and click Open. 20. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 12MM_SOCKET and click Open.
2012 PTC
PT
17. Notice the family table and click OK.
Family Table
In
16. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select .
te rn
Module 15 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
21. In the model tree, right-click 12MM_SOCKET<MULTI_FAM-TAB>.PRT and select Open Generic. 22. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 1-2_DRIVE and click Open. 23. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select Family Table click Add Columns , and add the SOCKET_SIZE parameter. six times to insert six instances. ,
Click Insert Instance
25. Type XXmm_SOCKET for the Instance Name, where XX is the SOCKET_SIZE.
27. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box. 28. Select the View tab, click Windows , and select MULTI_FAM-TAB.PRT.
29. Click the Model Intent drop-down menu and select
30. Edit the Look In drop-down list to 1-2_DRIVE.
Fo r
31. Click OK in the Family Table dialog box.
Module 15 | Page 18
PT
Family Table and notice that 1-2_DRIVE is now a multi-level family table.
In
te rn
al
26. In the Family Table dialog box, click Verify Instances Click Verify > Close.
U se
O
.
2012 PTC
nl y
24. Increment the cells in the SOCKET_SIZE column from 14 to 19, one millimeter at a time.
Editing Family Table Members

The resulting geometry and behavior of models varies depending upon whether you edit a family table generic or instance.
Editing feature dimensions in the generic model. Editing feature dimensions in an instance. Adding or editing features in the generic model. Adding or editing features in an instance.
Figure 1 Creating a Feature in the Generic
Editing Family Table Members
Fo r
The behavior of Creo Parametric models and the resulting geometry can be different depending upon whether you edit a generic model or an instance. Consider the following scenarios and what happens to the generic model and family table instances.
Editing Feature Dimensions in the Generic Model

If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is not a dimension able to be varied in the family table, the geometry updates in both the generic model and all instances. If you edit a dimension in the generic model that is a dimension able to be varied in the family table, only the geometry in the generic model updates unless an instance's dimension value in the family table is set to *. The instance geometry remains at the dimension value set in the family table column.
2012 PTC
PT
Figure 2 Creating a Feature in the Instance
In
te rn
Module 15 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
Editing Feature Dimensions in an Instance

If you edit a dimension in an instance that is not a dimension able to be varied in the family table, the geometry updates in both the generic model and all instances. If you edit a dimension in an instance that is a dimension able to be varied in the generic's family table, the system informs you that the dimension is table-driven. Upon confirming the family table modification, you can edit the value and update the geometry in the instance. The family table in the generic is updated for that particular instance row, but no other instance.
Adding or Editing Features in the Generic Model

If you suppress or delete a feature in the generic model that is not a feature able to be varied in the family table, the feature is automatically suppressed or deleted in all instances.
If you add a feature to the generic model, the feature is added to all instances, as shown in Figure 1.
Fo r
If you suppress a feature in an instance that is not a feature able to be varied in the generic's family table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular instance. You are warned that suppressing instance features has only a temporary effect. If you delete a feature, it is deleted only in that particular instance. The generic's family table is modified by adding the deleted feature as an item that can be varied. This then enables you to suppress the feature in other instances. If you suppress a feature in an instance that is a feature able to be varied in the generic's family table, the feature is suppressed only in that particular instance. You are warned that suppressing instance features has only a temporary effect. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or resumed according to the value set in the family table column. The value in the family table for the feature that was suppressed does not change. If you delete a feature from an instance, the feature is deleted only in that particular instance. The feature in the other instances is suppressed or resumed according to the value set in the family table column. The value in the family table for the feature that was deleted changes to N for that particular instance. If you add a feature to an instance, the feature is added as an item to be varied in the generic's family table. The column value is set to Y for the instance to which the feature was added, and N for the generic and all other instances. In Figure 2, the round was added to the instance. Consequently, the round was added to the generic's family table as an item to be varied.
PT
In
Adding or Editing Features in an Instance
te rn
If you delete a feature in the generic model that is a feature able to be varied in the family table, the column is removed from the family table, and the feature is deleted from all instances.
al
U se
If you suppress a feature in the generic model that is able to be varied in the family table, only the feature in the generic model updates unless the variable value in the family table is set to a value of *. The instance feature remains at the value set in the family table column. That is, if the value is set to Y, then the feature is displayed; if the value is set to N then the feature is suppressed.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Editing Family Table Members

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EDIT-MEMBERS.PRT
Feature-Tools\Edit_Members Task 1:
Edit the members of a family table.
1. In the Select Instance dialog box, double-click The generic. 3. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family Table . 4. Notice that the family table drives the socket's depth, but not its diameter. 5. Click OK.
Click Regenerate
Fo r
10. Notice the diameter updated, but not the depth.
2012 PTC
PT
8. In the Select Instance dialog box, select 3-8_SOCKET and click Open.
In
7. Click Open and double-click EDIT-MEMBERS.PRT.
te rn
.
6. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. Edit the diameter from 27 to 30 and edit the depth from 31.86 to 40.
al
U se
Module 15 | Page 21
nl y
11. Edit the diameter from 30 to 35. 12. Double-click the 31.86 depth dimension and notice it is table driven. 13. Click Confirm from the menu manager, edit the depth to 45, . and click Regenerate 14. Click Close .
Task 2:
Create new features in family table members.
2. Spin the model and select the edge. 4. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
Family Table . Right-click 1-2_SOCKET and select Open.
6. Notice that the chamfer is found in the instance model.
7. Click Round from the Round types drop-down menu. 8. Right-click to select the four intent edges. 9. Edit the radius to 1. 10. Click Complete Feature 11. Click Close . .
Module 15 | Page 22
PT
In
3. Edit the D value to 2.
te rn
.
1. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down list.
al
2012 PTC
U se
Family Table , and notice that the 3/8 socket depth value updated to 45. Click OK.
nl y
12. Notice that the round is not found on the generic model in the graphics window.
> Tree Filters. 14. Enable Suppressed Objects in the Model Tree Items dialog box, and click OK. 15. Notice that the round is in the generic model's model tree, but it is suppressed. 16. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Family Table .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
18. Click OK.
In
17. Notice that the round has been added to the family table, and it is only turned on in the 1-2_SOCKET instance.
te rn
Module 15 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
13. In the model tree, click Settings
Fo r
Module 15 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
16
U se O te rn al
Module 16 | Page 1
Reusing Features
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to reuse existing geometry when creating new design models. You can create inheritance features that enable one-way associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a reference part to a target part within an assembly. You can vary dimensions and other data propagated from the reference part. You can also reuse geometry in a design model by creating user-defined features (UDFs). A UDF consists of selected features, all their associated dimensions, any relations between the selected features, and a list of references for placing the UDF on various design models.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create user-defined features (UDFs) to reuse geometry. Place user-defined features. Create user-defined features using on-surface coordinate systems. Create inheritance features to transfer geometry from existing design models. Use external merge to add and remove material.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a library of commonly used geometry.
Define a UDF from a template model. Standalone Reference Part option Subordinate Select features to include. Must be sequential Define prompts. Every reference requires a prompt. Define any variable items (optional). Variable elements or dimensions Family Table
Figure 1 Template Model
PT
In
Fo r
Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and dimensions that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.
Defining a UDF from a Template Model

To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the features that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number of references makes the most efficient UDFs. Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name. The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company,
te rn
Figure 2 Highlighted Surface While Defining Prompts
al
U se
nl y
and is defined by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate. Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options: Subordinate Creates a reference to the original template model and automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the UDF placement in the future. The original model must be present for the subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF. Standalone Does not reference the template model. It copies all the original model information into the UDF file. If you make any changes to the original model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part. If created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a _GP suffix.
Selecting Features to Include
Defining Prompts
You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the target model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should be descriptive. Each reference is highlighted in the graphics window as you define its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference was used to create more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple prompts for that reference. Single Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group that use the same reference. Multiple Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for each feature.
Fo r
Defining Variable Items

You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of the feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features, dimensions, and parameters.
Modifying a UDF
When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You can edit a defined UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features must be sequential in the model tree.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE_UDF.PRT
Feature-Tools\Create_udf
Task 1:
Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Right-click Extrude 2 in the model tree and select Info > Reference Viewer. 3. In the Reference Viewer dialog box, notice that Extrude 2 references datum plane RIGHT and Extrude 1. 4. Click the down arrow next to Extrude 1 and cursor over each of the surface references. 5. Notice that the top, flat surface and the circular surface are the two references on the model.
8. Click UDF Library Utilities group.
PT
7. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the
Fo r
9. Click Create from the menu manager.
10. Type keyway as the name and press ENTER. 11. In the menu manager, click Subordinate > Done > Add > Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature to add and click Done/Return.
Module 16 | Page 4
In
6. Click Close from the Reference Viewer.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
13. Notice the top surface highlighted in red. This is the first required reference. 14. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface. 15. Type sketching plane and press ENTER.
18. Type orientation reference plane and press ENTER.
19. Notice the cylindrical surface highlighted in red. This is the third required reference.
20. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface.
22. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
Fo r
23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define. 24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length) 2 dimensions. 25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.
2012 PTC
PT
21. Type cylinder surface and press ENTER.
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 5
U se
17. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface.
16. Notice datum plane highlighted in red. This is the second required reference.
nl y
26. Notice that the first dimension is highlighted. 27. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the dimension. 28. Type key width and press ENTER.
32. Click OK > Done/Return to complete the UDF creation. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
31. Type key length and press ENTER.
30. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the dimension.
nl y
29. Notice that the second dimension is highlighted.
Placing UDFs
To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your company's UDF library into your model.
Open existing UDF (*.gph) Select Placement references Prompts can aid you Edit Variable Dimensions and Annotations Elements Options Scaling Dimension display Redefine features on-the-fly Adjustments Flip orientation
Placing UDFs
If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design models, it can be more efficient to have the system create that geometry for you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be much faster than creating it new each time.
Fo r
Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)

When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a from the Get Data group in the UDF by clicking User-Defined Feature ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The original template model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place UDFs in multiple models. When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model. The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.
PT
Figure 2 Selecting References for UDF Placement
In
te rn
Figure 3 The Placed UDF
al
U se
Figure 1 Viewing References on the Original UDF
nl y
Selecting Placement References for the Prompts

Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that was defined during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references, you can view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement dynamically updates in the graphics window.
Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements

You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation. These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.
Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement

Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in one of two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation Item and flip its orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is successful, a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the UDF remain in their hidden status when placed into the model.
Fo r
You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.
Updating a Modified UDF

If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it results in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group without any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified, the copied group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the group. You must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking UDF Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu and then regenerating the model.
Module 16 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF on-the-fly. This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After selecting features to redefine, you must step the regeneration of the UDF back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them. After the selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears, enabling you to redefine it.
al
U se
Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement. You can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units. Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of the elements that are not specified as variables in the UDF.
nl y
Specifying Options
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PLACE_UDF.PRT
Feature_Tools\Place_UDF Task 1:
Place a UDF for a keyway in a model. .
4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog box. Notice that this reference is highlighted in the subwindow. Notice that the description prompt reads orientation reference plane. Select a corresponding plane, as shown.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
3. Notice that a reference model has been created for this UDF, and displays in a subwindow. Notice that the first required reference is highlighted in the subwindow, and placement preview of the feature is shown in the main graphics window. Notice that Reference 1 is highlighted in the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box and the description prompt reads sketching plane. Select a corresponding planar surface, as shown.
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 9
U se
from the Get Data group. 2. Click User-Defined Feature Select KEYWAY.GPH and click Open. Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration and click OK.
nl y
5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog box. Notice that this reference is highlighted in the subwindow. Also notice that the description prompt reads cylinder surface. Select a corresponding surface, as shown.
7. Edit the Value for the d5 dimension from 2.00 to 4.
For a more complex UDF, there may be multiple reference directions that can be flipped. The system lists each reference direction in the dialog box, enabling you to flip/preview each reference.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 10
PT
9. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, click Flip and then click Accept .
In
8. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, select the Adjustments tab.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
6. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, select the Variables tab.
nl y
Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems

UDFs gain capability when utilizing an on-surface Csys.
Set up UDF features to reference only an on-surface Csys. Quick and flexible placement. Drag location and angle. Include on-surface Csys in UDF. No UDF prompts required. Specify on-surface Csys references upon placement.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Locating UDF On-Surface Figure 3 Placing UDF on Alternate Surface
Fo r
Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems

The placement of a User-Defined Feature (UDF) gains some capabilities when the features used to create the UDF reference is an on-surface coordinate system. Upon placement, the UDF appears in a dynamic preview that can be dragged to locate the UDF. You can also specify an additional rotation angle for the UDF. Keep in mind the following regarding the on-surface Csys and UDFs:
The features comprising the UDF should reference ONLY the on-surface Csys. They should not have any parents other than the on-surface Csys in the model from which the UDF is created. To simplify this, create three orthogonal datum planes through the on-surface Csys to act as a set of default datum planes. If an on-surface Csys is included in the UDF features, the UDF setup requires prompt creation only for the references of the Csys.
al
U se
Figure 1 UDF Features Referencing On-Surface Csys
nl y
When placing the UDF in this case, you can select references to place the on-surface Csys in the destination model. If an on-surface Csys is NOT included in the UDF features, the UDF setup requires the creation of one prompt for the selection of a coordinate system. When placing the UDF in this case, you have the option to create an on-surface Csys on-the-fly.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs Using On-Surface Coordinate Systems

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CREATE_UDF.PRT
Feature_Tools\UDF_On-Surface Task 1:
Create and place a UDF using an on-surface coordinate system.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Select CS0 from the model tree. 3. Right-click and select Edit. This in an on-surface Csys, and is the only parent to the geometry for the UDF. 4. Select the Tools tab and click UDF Library . Click Create, type UDF1 as the name, and press ENTER. 6. Select CS0, press SHIFT, and select HOLE from the model tree.
5. Click Stand Alone > Done > No.
9. Click Done/Return and OK.
Fo r
10. Click Close 11. Click Open
PT
8. Press ENTER, if necessary, to accept the default prompts.
12. Disable Csys Display
7. Click Done > Done/Return.
In
from the Quick Access toolbar. . Select PLACE_UDF.PRT and click Open. .
2012 PTC
te rn
Module 16 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
13. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group, select UDF1, and click Open. 14. Click OK and select a surface to place the on-surface Csys. 15. Drag the placement handles to the front and right surfaces, then position the UDF as shown.
16. Drag the additional rotation handle to approximately 90. 17. Select the Options tab. Scroll down and select the HOLE check box. Disable Auto Regeneration. Click First Feature then Last Feature and .
18. Enable Countersink the dashboard.
Disable Counterbore . Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
20. Click User-Defined Feature from the Get Data group, select UDF1, and click Open. 21. Click OK and select a surface to place the UDF.
22. Right-click and select Offset References. Press CTRL and select the top and right surfaces, then position the UDF.
Module 16 | Page 14
PT
19. Click Complete Feature complete the UDF.
In
te rn
from to
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
23. Select the Options tab. Select the Pattern 1 check box. Disable Auto Regeneration. Click First Feature then Last Feature and .
24. Edit the 5 quantity to 3 in the dashboard.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 15
al
U se
26. Click Regenerate necessary.
, if
25. Click Complete Feature complete the UDF.
to
nl y
Click Set Angular Extent . Click Complete Feature .
Creating Inheritance Features

You can transfer geometry from existing design models by creating inheritance features.
Transfer features from one design model to another. Inheritance features can be dependent or independent of the original design model. Inheritance features can be edited without affecting the original design model. External inheritance features can be created.
te rn
Figure 1 Reference Part
Figure 2 Target Part
Fo r
Defining Inheritance Feature Dependency

You can control whether inheritance features are dependent on the reference part. By default, inheritance features are dependent on the reference part. Any design changes that you make in the reference part are associatively propagated to the dependent inheritance feature when both reference and target parts are in the same Creo Parametric session. Independent inheritance features do not update when the reference part is modified.
Defining Varied Items in an Inheritance Feature

By default, the geometry and data contained in the inheritance feature are identical to the reference part from which they are derived. However, you can define geometry items that can be varied in the inheritance features without changing the reference part, by selecting Varied Items from the Options tab of the dashboard. These items include dimensions, parameters, geometric tolerances, and a suppressed or resumed state of features. You can modify these items without having the reference part in the session.
PT
Inheritance features enable one-way associative propagation of geometry and feature data from a reference part (the original, existing model) to a target part (the new model). The created target part is fully functional, even when the reference part is not in session, and can contain one or more inheritance features. Inheritance features promote data reuse.
In
Creating Inheritance Features
al
Figure 3 Completed Inheritance Feature
U se
nl y
External Inheritance Features

External inheritance features are useful when representing the evolution of a design during manufacturing, or when creating standard design elements. You can externalize an inheritance feature, thus creating an external inheritance feature. The relative location of the target and reference part in the assembly is used for placement of inheritance features in the target part. The externalize operation removes reference to the assembly context and enables you to use placement constraints to define placement of the external inheritance feature in the target part. An inheritance feature created within a part model is automatically created as an external inheritance feature. A target part can contain one or more external inheritance features. Features propagated from the reference part are represented in the target part as sub-features of the external inheritance feature. You can create a reference pattern in the target part based on the pattern of external inheritance sub-features.
An external inheritance feature displays in the model tree as a single feature. Expanding its node displays the features that comprise the original reference part, as shown in Figure 4.
Editing the definition of an external inheritance feature enables you to view the varied items for that feature and modify them accordingly in the Varied Items dialog box. If you know the items that can be modified, you can simply edit them in the graphics window. You cannot edit any area of the inheritance feature that is not specified as a varied item. However, if you try to edit a dimension within the inheritance feature that is not a varied dimension, the system enables you to add it as a varied dimension, thus enabling you to edit the dimension. If you update the reference part, any dependent external inheritance feature must be updated to reflect those changes. You can do this by right-clicking the external inheritance feature in the model tree and selecting Update Inheritance. A warning dialog box appears, indicating that the inheritance will be recreated according to the current base model state and defined modifications. The base model is the reference part.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Figure 4 Inheritance Feature Model Tree
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 17
al
U se
Editing External Inheritance Features
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Inheritance Features

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SPROCKET.PRT
Feature_Operations\Inheritance Task 1:
Create an external inheritance feature in a part model.
2. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close SPROCKET.PRT. 3. Click Working Directory in the folder browser. Double-click INHERITANCE. PRT from the Browser to open it. 4. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and select Merge/Inheritance.
5. In the dashboard, click Open .
Fo r
8. Select coordinate system SPROCKET in the INHERITANCE.PRT window. 9. In the Component Placement dialog box, select the Preview check box.
Module 16 | Page 18
PT
7. Select coordinate system SPROCKET in the SPROCKET.PRT window.
6. In the Open dialog box, select SPROCKET.PRT and click Open.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. Click Apply-Save Changes in the Component Placement dialog box. 11. In the dashboard, click Toggle Inheritance . Click Complete Feature 12. Disable Csys Display . .
13. Spin the model to observe it.
Task 2:
Add a varied item to the inheritance feature, and update the reference model SPROCKET.PRT.
1. Edit the definition of External Inheritance. 2. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Click Varied Items.
PT
4. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit the New Value to 12. Click OK.
In
3. In the SPROCKET.PRT model tree, select the Protrusion id 5388 feature. Select the 8 dimension.
Fo r
6. Notice that the sprocket depth has increased.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 16 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
7. In the model tree, right-click External Inheritance and select Open Base. The SPROCKET.PRT model opens. 8. In the model tree, right-click Pattern (CUT_1) and select Edit. Edit the number of cuts from 57 to 43.
12. Notice that the teeth have updated. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
11. In the model tree, right-click External Inheritance and select Update Inheritance. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
al
2012 PTC
U se
10. Click Close to return to INHERITANCE.PRT. Notice that the teeth have not updated.
nl y
9. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
Using External Merge to Add Material

Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry from another model into the current model.
Process Insert merge into target model. Open source model. Assemble source model into target model. References: Annotations Copy Datums Options: Dependent Refit Datums
PT
Figure 2 Target Model
In
te rn
Figure 3 Source Model
Fo r
Using External Merge to Add Material

Using the merge feature to add material, you can add geometry from another model into the current model. You can use the external merge feature to add solid geometry into a part model that already contains solid geometry, or you can use the external merge feature to add solid geometry into a part with no current solid geometry. To use a merge feature to add material, insert the merge from the current model to which you wish to add material (the target model), then open or select the source model. Next, assemble the source model into the target model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove Material icon, if necessary, to disable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of the following from the source model: Annotations
al
U se
Figure 1 Completed External Merge
nl y
Copy Datums If the datums are copied into the target model from the source model, the copied datums have a _1 suffix appended to their names. There are also two different options available when creating the merge feature: Dependent Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the source model. Refit Datums Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from the source model.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
There is also a Merge component operation in Assembly mode, used to add component geometry in the current assembly.
PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Add Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CASTING.PRT
Feature_Operations\Merge_Add-Mtl Task 1:
Use external merge to create a machined part from its casting.
3. Click Close
5. Notice that there is no geometry.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
7. In the dashboard, click Open and double-click CASTING.PRT.
In
6. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and select Merge/Inheritance.
te rn
Module 16 | Page 23
4. Click Open and double-click ADD_MATL.PRT.
al
U se
nl y
2. Notice the model geometry.
8. Resize and reposition the accessory window, if necessary. 9. In the Component Placement dialog box, select the Preview check box. Edit the Constraint Type and click to Default Apply-Save Changes .
13. In the model tree, notice the External Merge feature. 14. Click File > Options.
15. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, click Model Display and select Show silhouette edges to enable it. 16. Click Entity Display and select Show smooth lines, if necessary. 17. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box. 18. Select one surface of the model, then right-click and select Solid Surfaces. 19. Select the View tab and click the Appearance Gallery drop-down menu. 20. From the Library section, select the ptc-std-steel appearance.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
12. Notice that the target model seems identical to the source model.
nl y
10. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Notice that the Dependent check box is selected.
21. Select the Model tab. 22. Click Revolve from the Shapes group, then right-click and select Remove Material. 23. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree as the Sketch plane. 24. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar. from the Model
25. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line Display types drop-down menu. 26. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from the 27. Click References Setup group and select the three additional vertical references. from the 28. Click Centerline Datum group and sketch the centerline. 30. Click OK .
Fo r
33. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. 34. Click File > Options. 35. Click Entity Display and disable Show smooth lines. 36. Click OK and then No in the warning dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
32. Click Complete Feature and spin the model to view the underside.
31. Select Shading from the Model Display types drop-down menu and click Change Material . Direction
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 25
29. Sketch and dimension as shown.
al
U se
nl y
37. Click Hole from the Engineering group and select the flange surface.
38. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT and FRONT from the model tree. 39. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the Offset for datum plane RIGHT to 22. Edit the Offset for datum plane FRONT to Align. 40. Edit the diameter to 4 and the . depth to Through All 41. Click Complete Feature .
43. Edit the pattern type to Axis and select the datum axis running through the model.
Fo r
44. Accept the default options and click Complete Feature . and
45. Disable Plane Display Axis Display .
Module 16 | Page 26
PT
42. With the hole still selected, click from the Editing Pattern group.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
46. Right-click the External Merge feature and select Open Base. 47. Right-click Hole 1 and select Edit. 48. Edit the diameter from 10 to 20 . and click Regenerate 49. Click Close .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 27
al
U se
50. Click Regenerate . Notice that the hole diameter updated.
nl y
Using External Merge to Remove Material

Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract geometry in another model from the current model.
Process: Insert merge into target model. Open source model. Assemble source model into target model. Toggle on Remove Material icon. References: Annotations Copy Datums Options: Dependent Refit Datums
Figure 1 Completed External Merge
Figure 2 Target Model
In
Using External Merge to Remove Material
Fo r
Using the merge feature to remove material, you can subtract geometry in another model from the current model. You can use the external merge feature to remove solid geometry from a part model that already contains solid geometry. To use a merge feature to remove material, insert the merge from the current model to which you wish to remove material (the target model), then open or select the source model. Next, assemble the source model into the target model using assembly-type constraints. Finally, toggle the Remove Material icon, if necessary, to enable it before completing the feature.
When creating the merge feature, you must select whether to copy each of the following from the source model: Annotations Copy Datums If the datums are copied into the target model from the source model, the copied datums have a _1 suffix appended to their names.
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Source Model
al
U se
nl y
There are also two different options available when creating the merge feature: Dependent Controls whether the merge feature is dependent on the source model. Refit Datums Enables you to adjust the size of the copied datums. This option is only available when you decide to copy the datums from the source model. There is also a Cutout component operation in Assembly mode, used to subtract component geometry in the current assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 29
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using External Merge to Remove Material

Close Window Erase Not Displayed LATCH.PRT
Feature_Operations\Merge_Remove-Mtl Task 1:
Use external merge to remove material from a part model.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the model geometry. 3. Click Close .
4. Click Open
, select REMOVE_MATL.PRT, and click Open.
5. Click the Get Data group drop-down menu and select Merge/Inheritance. 6. In the dashboard, click Open
7. Resize and reposition the accessory window, if necessary. 8. In the Component Placement dialog box, select the Preview check box. Edit the Constraint Type to . Default Click Apply-Save Changes .
Fo r
9. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Notice that the Dependent check box is selected. . .
10. Click Remove Material 11. Click Complete Feature
Module 16 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
, select LATCH.PRT, and click Open.
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
12. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and select the Sections tab. Right-click Xsec0001 and select Show Section. Click Close. 13. De-select all geometry. 14. In the model tree, right-click the External Cut Out feature and select Open Base. 15. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 16. Edit the thickness from 1.5 to 3.5 . and click Regenerate 17. Click Close twice.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
19. Click Regenerate and notice that the cut out geometry has been updated.
te rn
Module 16 | Page 31
18. Click Open , select SEAT_BELT.ASM, and click Open.
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
17
U se O te rn al
Module 17 | Page 1
Advanced Copy
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to create copies of features and groups using various advanced options. You can copy features so that they are still dependent on the original, but alter certain aspects of the copied feature to make it different than the original. You can also copy features and replace their references to move them to different locations.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Configure the independency of dimensions and sections. Perform advanced reference configuration on features. Copy features fully dependent with options to vary.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Configuring Independency
You can edit the dependency of specific areas of a dependently copied feature.
Make a dimension independent All other aspects still dependent. Make a section independent Depth still dependent.
Configuring Independency
Fo r
There are two different methods you can use to edit the dependency of a dependently copied feature:
Make Dimension Independent You can break the dependence of any of the copied feature's dimensions by selecting the dimension, then right-clicking and selecting Make Dim Indep. All other aspects of the copied feature remain dependent on the original feature. For example, in Figure 2, the dependently copied feature's height dimension has been made independent of the original. Consequently, when the height of the original feature is modified, the copied feature's height remains unchanged. However, notice that when the width of the original feature is modified, the copied feature's width increases also. Make Section Independent You can break the dependence of the copied feature section by selecting the copied feature, then right-clicking and selecting Make Sec Indep. This enables you to edit any dimension in the copied feature's section independently of the original feature. However, the copied feature's depth is still dependent on the original value. For example, in Figure 3, the section of the highlighted dependently copied feature has
PT
Figure 2 Dimension Independent Height
In
te rn
Figure 3 Section Independent
al
U se
Figure 1 Creating Dependent Copies
nl y
been made independent. Consequently, if the original feature's section width is modified, the copied feature's section width remains unchanged. However, notice that when the height of the original feature is modified, the copied feature's height increases also.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 17 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Configuring Independency

Close Window Erase Not Displayed INDEPENDENCY.PRT
Feature_Operations\Config_Indep Task 1:
Move and rotate copied features, then configure independency on those copied features.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. Select Extrude 2. 3. Click Copy from the Operations group. from the 4. Click Paste Special Paste types drop-down menu. 5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box and click OK.
6. Select datum plane DTM1 from the model tree and edit the offset value to 3.
Fo r
9. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box, and click OK.
10. Select datum plane DTM1 from the model tree and edit the offset value to 3. 11. Right-click and select New Move.
12. Right-click and select Rotate. 13. Select the datum axis in the original feature, and edit the offset angle to 90. 14. Click Complete Feature .
Module 17 | Page 4
PT
8. Click Paste Special from the Paste types drop-down menu.
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Display types:
15. Disable Plane Display
and Axis Display
16. Right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit. Edit the feature height to 3. Edit the feature width to 1.5. 17. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. The feature width and height of all three features updates. 18. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 (3) and select Edit. 19. Select the 3 height dimension, then right-click and select Make Dim Indep. Select feature Extrude 2 (2). Click OK in the Select dialog box.
22. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit. Edit the feature width to 1. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. Notice that the width of Extrude 2 (3) remains unchanged.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
21. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 (3) and select Make Sec Indep.
In
20. Edit the feature height of Extrude 2 (2) to 2 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. Only that feature's height updates.
te rn
al
Module 17 | Page 5
U se
nl y
23. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit. Edit the feature height to 4. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate. 24. Notice that the height of Extrude 2 (2) remains unchanged because its height dimension was made independent. 25. Notice that the height of Extrude 2 (3) updates even though its section was made independent. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration

You can utilize advanced reference configuration to copy features by changing the placement references of the original feature.
Map references from original feature to copied feature. Select a replacement reference Use original reference Used By Define alternate orientation.
Fo r
Figure 2 Selecting a Replacement Reference
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Copied Group
Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration

You can utilize advanced reference configuration to copy features by changing the placement references of the original feature. This is done by mapping references of the original feature to new references for the copied feature. When you enable advanced reference configuration in the Paste Special dialog box, the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box opens and displays all the original feature's placement references in a list. You can now replace the original placement references with new ones for the copied feature, or keep some of the original references. When you select any of the original feature's placement references from the list, the reference highlights in the graphics window. Also, the Used By field in the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box displays which other features use this reference. You can either replace that reference by
al
U se
Figure 1 Advanced Reference Configuration Dialog Box
nl y
selecting a different reference, or you can select the Use Original Reference check box, which forces the system to use the reference from the original feature for the copied feature. If there are alternate orientation options for placing the copied feature, the Preview dialog box opens. The Preview dialog box displays which items can have more than one orientation. You can select the desired item and flip its orientation. Advanced reference configuration settings do not enable you to edit dimension values associated with the references. For example, if the offset to a given datum plane is 10 in the original feature, you cannot edit the copied feature's offset during the advanced reference configuration procedure. Depending on the dependency you specified for the copied feature, you can edit the offset value after the copy has been created.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
When you perform advanced reference configuration, you cannot apply move or rotate transformations to the copies.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Analyzing Advanced Reference Configuration

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ADV_REF_CONFIG.PRT
Feature_Operations\Adv_Ref_Config Task 1:
Use advanced reference configuration to copy a group. .
2. Select Group TAB1 from the model tree. 3. Click Copy from the Operations group.
4. Select Paste Special
from the Paste types drop-down menu.
5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference configuration check box and click OK. 6. In the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box, select each of the four references to highlight the corresponding geometry. Click Apply Changes . 7. In the Preview dialog box, click Apply Changes to accept the default orientation.
Fo r
9. De-select all geometry and rename Group TAB1_1 to TAB2.
10. Right-click Group TAB2 and select Edit. 11. Select the 80 dimension, then right-click and select Make Dim Indep. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.
12. Edit the 80 dimension to 140 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Notice that the copy is created coincident with the original.
In
te rn
al
Module 17 | Page 9
U se
nl y
13. Select Group TAB1. Click Copy
and click Paste Special
14. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference configuration check box and click OK. 15. In the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box, select the first reference RIGHT and select datum plane MOUNT_2 from the model tree. Select the second reference SURF and select the left vertical cylindrical surface. Select the third reference TOP_2 and select datum plane MOUNT. 16. Click Apply Changes .
22. In the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box, select the first reference RIGHT and select datum plane MOUNT_2 from the model tree. Select the second reference SURF and select the right vertical cylindrical surface. Select the third reference TOP_2 and select datum plane MOUNT_3 from the model tree.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 10
PT
21. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Advanced reference configuration check box and click OK.
20. Select Group TAB1. Click Copy
In
19. Click Plane Display disable their display.
te rn
to and click Paste Special
18. De-select all geometry and rename Group TAB1_1 to TAB3.
al
.
2012 PTC
17. In the Preview dialog box, click Apply Changes .
U se
nl y
23. Click Apply Changes
24. In the Preview dialog box, select the Offset direction and click Flip. Select the Section Orientation and click Flip. Click Apply Changes .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 17 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary

You can create copies of features that are fully dependent on the original but vary in specified ways.
Denoted in model tree with 'Copied' prefix. Right-click to access Copied Feature menu: Varied Items Break Dependence Remove Dependence
Fo r
Figure 2 Copied Feature in the Model Tree
PT
In
Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary

By default, when you copy a feature dependently using Paste Special, only dimensions and annotation element details of the resulting copy are dependent on the original. Selecting the Fully Dependent with options to vary option in the Paste Special dialog box enables you to create a feature copy that is fully dependent on the original. However, you can also specify items to vary in the copied feature. The fully dependent copied feature is identified in the model tree by its prefix 'Copied'; for example, Copied Extrude 3, as shown in Figure 2. Initially, this copied feature is created directly on top of the original feature in the graphics window. However, you can now vary options of the copied feature. When you right-click the copied feature, the following options are available in the Copied feature menu selection:
te rn
al
Figure 1 Copied Feature with Varied Dimensions
Figure 3 Varied Items Dialog Box
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 17 | Page 13
al
U se
Varied Items Enables you to edit the dependency of specific copied feature elements including Dimensions, References, 3D Notes, and Parameters. Each feature element specified is placed in the Varied Items dialog box. Within the Varied Items dialog box you can view the original value, and you can specify the new value of the feature element within the copied feature, as shown in Figure 3. An alternate method of adding dimensions to the Varied Items dialog box is to simply edit the feature and double-click the dimension you wish to vary. The system warns you that the dimension is to be added to the Varied Items table. Break Dependence Makes the copied feature temporarily independent of the original feature. This enables you to make changes to the copied feature or original feature while not affecting the other. You can then restore the dependency between the original feature and copied feature after the desired changes have been made. Remove Dependence Permanently breaks the link between the copied feature and the original feature. The copied feature becomes independent of the original feature.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Copying Features Fully Dependent with Options to Vary

Feature_Operations\Vary_Options FULL_DEP_VARY-OPTIONS.PRT Task 1: Copy a feature fully dependent and vary its dimensions.
2. Select Extrude 2 and click Copy from the Operations group. from the 3. Click Paste Special Paste types drop-down menu. 4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Fully Dependent with options to vary option. Click OK. 5. Notice the feature name in the model tree.
6. Notice that the copied feature is coincident with the original.
Fo r
8. In the graphics window, select the 2 feature length dimension, the 4.5 distance dimension, and the 1 feature width dimension. 9. Notice each dimension in the Varied Items dialog box.
10. Middle-click to finish selecting items.
Module 17 | Page 14
PT
7. In the model tree, right-click Copied Extrude 3 and select Copied feature > Varied items.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit New Value for the 2.000 Orig Value to 2.5. Edit the New Value for the 4.500 Orig Value to 1.75. Edit the New Value for the 1.000 Orig Value to 2.00. Click OK.
16. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 3 and select Copied feature > Restore dependence.
Fo r
17. Notice the feature name in the model tree. 18. Notice the copied feature height.
2012 PTC
PT
In
15. Edit the height from 1 to 3 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
te rn
Module 17 | Page 15
al
13. Notice the feature name in the model tree.
U se
12. In the model tree, right-click Copied Extrude 3 and select Copied feature > Break dependence.
nl y
19. In the model tree, right-click Copied Extrude 3 and select Copied feature > Varied items. 20. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit the 2.500 New Value to 3. Click OK.
Fo r
25. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 3 and notice that there is no Copied feature selection.
Module 17 | Page 16
PT
In
24. Edit the height from 1 to 3 and click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
te rn
23. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit.
al
2012 PTC
22. Read the contents of the Warning dialog box and click Yes.
U se
21. In the model tree, right-click Copied Extrude 3 and select Copied feature > Remove dependence.
nl y
Module
18
U se O te rn al
Module 18 | Page 1
Advanced Patterns
Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to create complex patterns of features by using various advanced options such as Curve pattern, Fill pattern, and pattern tables. You can use pattern tables if your design calls for irregular patterns of features, components, or groups of features. Using pattern tables, you can specify unique dimensions for each instance in the pattern. Multiple tables can be established for a pattern, enabling you to change the pattern by switching the table that drives it. You can also perform editing operations such as unpatterning. You can even move and mirror patterns, and create patterns of patterns.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand pattern regeneration options. Create dimensional patterns in one and two directions. Create rotational dimension patterns in one and two directions. Create fill patterns and specify fill pattern settings. Create and apply pattern tables. Create curve patterns. Create point patterns. Understand how to unpattern patterned members. Create patterns of patterns. Move and mirror patterns.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options

The three types of pattern regeneration are a trade-off between robustness and regeneration speed.
Pattern regeneration options: General Default regen option Most robust Slowest regen speed Variable Identical Least robust Fastest regen speed
General Patterns are the most robust, but take the longest to regenerate. All patterns are created as General by default. For the general pattern regeneration option, the pattern members may intersect each other and other features. In Figure 1, the pattern must be a general pattern because its members intersect both themselves and other geometry. Variable Patterns' members cannot intersect each other, but may intersect other features. In Figure 2, the pattern can be set to variable because its pattern members do not intersect, but it does intersect other features. This pattern can also be set to general, but cannot be set to identical. Identical Patterns are the least robust, but regenerate the fastest. For the identical pattern regeneration option, the pattern members must be identical to the original pattern leader. They cannot intersect each other, nor can they intersect other features. This option automatically becomes grayed out if the pattern leader intersects other features. In Figure 3, the pattern can be set to identical because its pattern members do not intersect each other or other features.
Fo r
PT
There are three types of regeneration options when creating a pattern. The three regeneration types are a trade-off between robustness and regeneration speed. The three types of pattern regeneration option are:
Understanding Pattern Regeneration Options
In
Figure 2 Variable Pattern
te rn
al
Figure 3 Identical Pattern
U se
Figure 1 General Pattern
nl y
Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction

The dimension pattern enables you to linearly pattern features in a given direction.
Direction and increments based on selected dimension. Dimension must be in feature or in another feature within the group. Select a first direction dimension and specify the increment. Specify number of members. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.
Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction
Fo r
The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features linearly in a given direction. The following items are required to create a dimension pattern in one direction: Specify a First Direction dimension The pattern extends in a direction based on the dimension selected. The dimension selected must belong to the feature being patterned, or, in the case of a group, belong to a feature in the group. In Figure 1, the first direction dimension specified is the 1 distance dimension. Specify the increment in the first direction The increment is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension reference, you must specify the increment to be used. You can edit the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction Type the number of members in the dashboard. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image has four
2012 PTC
PT
Figure 2 Editing the Dimension Pattern and Pattern Leader
In
te rn
al
Module 18 | Page 3
U se
Figure 1 Dimension Patterning an Extrude in One Direction
nl y
pattern members, while in the image second from the left, the number of pattern members is six. Make sure to select a distance dimension when specifying the direction dimension. If you select a dimension that denotes the width or height of the feature you are patterning, all pattern instances are created directly on top of the pattern leader, because it is the width or height dimension that is being incremented rather than the distance between pattern members.
Incrementing Additional Dimensions
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
Make sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected dimension.
al
U se
Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Specify the increment value In Figure 2, the extrude feature height was incremented 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's height increases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.
nl y
2012 PTC
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
PROCEDURE - Creating Dimension Patterns in One Direction

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIM_PATTERN_1ST.PRT
Pattern\Dim_Pattern_1st Task 1:
Dimension pattern an extrude feature in one direction.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Extrude 2 and click Pattern from the Editing group. 3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Dimension, if necessary. 4. Select the 1 distance dimension. Edit the spacing to 2. 5. Edit the number of members to 4. 6. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
9. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
8. Edit the number of patterned extrudes from 4 to 6.
In
7. With the Pattern feature still selected, right-click and select Edit.
te rn
al
Module 18 | Page 5
U se
nl y
10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 11. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Press CTRL and select the 1 height dimension. Edit the increment to 0.5.
12. Click Complete Feature 13. De-select all features.
14. In the model tree, expand the pattern feature.
Fo r
15. Select the pattern leader, then right-click and select Edit.
16. Edit the width from 2 to 3. 17. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
Module 18 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions

The dimension pattern enables you to linearly pattern features in a given direction.
Direction and increments based on selected dimensions. Select a first and second direction dimension and specify the increments. Specify number of members in first and second directions. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.
Figure 2 Dimension Patterning a Group in Two Directions Result
Fo r
The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features linearly in two directions. The following items are required to create a dimension pattern in two directions: Specify the First and Second Direction dimensions The pattern extends in the directions based on the dimension references selected. In Figure 1, the first direction dimension reference specified is the 2 distance dimension, and the second direction dimension reference specified is the 1 distance dimension. Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions The increment is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension reference, you must specify the increment to be used for that direction. You can edit the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. The increment can be different between the first and second directions. In Figure 2, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction increment is 2.0. Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions Type the number of members in the dashboard. Again, the number of pattern members can be different for each direction. The number of pattern
PT
Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Dimension Pattern, Two Directions, Three Additional Dimensions
U se
Figure 1 Dimension Patterning a Group in Two Directions
nl y
members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the first direction has four pattern members, while the second direction has five pattern members. Be sure to select distance dimensions when specifying the direction dimensions. If you select dimensions that denote the width or height of the feature you are patterning, all pattern instances are created directly on top of the pattern leader, because it is the width or height dimension that is being incremented rather than the distance between pattern members.
Be sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected dimension.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimensions selected can be different for each direction. Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure 3, the extrude feature width was incremented by -0.2 in the first direction, the radius dimension was incremented 0.075 in the first direction, and the extrude feature height was incremented 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern member's width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height increases by 0.5 in the second direction over the previous pattern member. Additionally, each pattern member's radius increases by 0.075 in the first direction.
al
U se
nl y
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time to create a varying pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Dimension Patterns in Two Directions

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DIM_PATTERN_2ND.PRT
Pattern\Dim_Pattern_2nd Task 1:
Dimension pattern an extrude feature in two directions.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude 2 and Round 1. 3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Rename the group to OVAL. 5. Select Group OVAL and click from the Editing Pattern group. 6. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Dimension, if necessary. 7. Select the 2 distance dimension as the first direction reference. Edit the spacing increment to 2.50. 8. Edit the number of members to 4. 9. In the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Reference collector. Select the 1 distance dimension as the second direction reference. Edit the second direction spacing increment to 2. Edit the second direction number of members to 5.
Fo r
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 18 | Page 9
U se
nl y
11. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of OVAL. 12. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Press CTRL and select the 2 extrude width dimension. Edit the increment to -0.20. Press CTRL and select the R 0.1 radius dimension and edit the increment to 0.075. 13. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector. 14. Press CTRL and select the 1 extrude height dimension and edit the increment to 0.50. 15. Click Complete Feature .
16. In the model tree, expand the pattern feature.
Fo r
17. Select the pattern leader, then right-click and select Edit.
18. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75. 19. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
Module 18 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns

The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features angularly and radially.
Direction and increments based on selected dimension. Dimension must be in feature or in another feature within the group. Select a first and second direction dimension and specify the increment. Specify number of members in each direction. Specify additional, optional dimensions to increment.
Specify the First and Second Direction dimensions The pattern extends in the directions based on the dimensions selected. The dimension selected must belong to the feature being patterned. In the case of a group, the dimension selected must belong to a feature in the group. In Figure 1, the first direction dimension specified is the 30 degree dimension. In Figure 2, the second direction dimension specified causes the pattern to extend outward. When creating a rotational dimension pattern of a sketch-based feature (such as extrude), use a datum plane to create the angle dimension. Do NOT use an angle dimension from a centerline in the sketch for patterning. Unlike datum planes, centerlines do not have a distinct positive and negative side that the system can use to correctly determine the angular pattern dimension. Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions The increment is the spacing between pattern members. When you select the dimension reference, you must specify the increment to be used. You can edit the increment in the Dimensions tab in the dashboard. In Figure 1, the increment is 45 degrees. In Figure 2, the increment was edited from 45
Fo r
PT
The dimension pattern enables you to pattern features both angularly and radially in a given direction. The following items are required to create a rotational dimension pattern in two directions:
Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns
In
Figure 2 Dimension Pattern in Two Directions and Incrementing Additional Dimensions
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Dimension Patterning an Extrude in One Direction
nl y
degrees to 90 degrees in the first direction, and set at 2.5 in the second direction. Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions Type the number of members in the dashboard. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. The number of pattern members can be different for each direction. In Figure 2, the left and center images have eight pattern members in the first direction, and the right image has four pattern members in the first direction. There are three pattern members in the second direction.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 12
PT
Be sure to press CTRL when specifying additional dimensions to be patterned. If you do not press CTRL, the original dimension that was selected for patterning is replaced with the newly selected dimension.
In
te rn
Select additional dimensions to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimensions selected can be different for each direction. In Figure 2, the left hole diameter is incremented in the first direction by 0.075. The right hole diameter, feature height, and angle are also incremented. It is important to note that the same 30 degree dimension was incremented in both directions, which results in the pinwheel effect. Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure 2, the 30 degree dimension was incremented 45 degrees in the first direction and the same 30 degree dimension was incremented 10 degrees in the second direction. In the right image, the increment was edited to 90 degrees.
al
U se
nl y
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time to create a varying pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Rotational Dimension Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ROT_DIM_PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Rot_Dim_Pattern Task 1:
Create a rotational dimension pattern in two directions.
3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Rename the group to TAB. 5. Select Group TAB and click from the Editing Pattern group. 6. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Dimension, if necessary. 7. Select the 30 dimension as the first direction reference. Edit the spacing angle to 45.
In
8. Edit the number of members in the first direction to 8. .
11. In the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Reference collector. Select the 2 distance dimension as the second direction reference. Edit the second direction spacing increment to 2.5. Edit the second direction number of members to 3.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of TAB.
te rn
Module 18 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
2. Press CTRL and select ANGLE, Extrude 2, Hole 1, and Hole 2.
12. Click Complete Feature 13. Disable Plane Display
. .
15. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Zoom in, press CTRL, and select the left 0.25 hole diameter dimension. Edit the increment to 0.075. 16. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector. Press CTRL, select the right 0.25 hole diameter dimension, and edit the increment to 0.25. Press CTRL, select the 1 height dimension, and edit the increment to 1. Press CTRL, select the 30 degree angle dimension, and edit the increment to 10.
Fo r
PT
Module 18 | Page 14
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
14. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of TAB.
19. Right-click Pattern 1 of TAB and select Edit. 20. Edit the pattern from 8 LOCAL GROUPS to 4. 21. Edit the 45 dimension to 90. 22. Click twice in the background of the graphics window to regenerate.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
Creating Geometry Patterns

You can select geometry, not features, and use Geometry Pattern to pattern it.
Create geometry patterns using any conventional pattern type except for Dimension patterns. Use cases: Pattern resultant geometry from multiple features. Features to be patterned are not consecutive in the model tree. Pattern geometry exists on imported geometry not in conventional features.
Figure 1 Geometry Selected from Multiple Features
PT
In
Fo r
Figure 2 Creating a Geometry Pattern
Creating Geometry Patterns

You can select geometry, not features, and use Geometry Pattern to pattern it. You can select surfaces using any method, including manually, seed and boundary, and so on. You can create geometry patterns using any of the conventional pattern types available, except for Dimension patterns. Geometry patterns are useful in the following cases where: Resulting geometry from multiple features is to be patterned. Features to be patterned are not consecutive in the model tree, and therefore cannot be easily grouped. Geometry to be patterned exists on imported geometry that does not have conventional features. The resulting feature creates a pattern of copy geometry surface features, and therefore does not include the pattern leader in the geometry pattern
te rn
Figure 3 Viewing the Completed Geometry Pattern
al
U se
nl y
branch in the model tree. However, the total quantity of the pattern is maintained as in a typical feature pattern. Geometry pattern functionality is technically not new for Creo Parametric, but it is easier to find. It was available in Creo Elements/Pro 5.0 (formerly Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0), although only from the Edit menu and not via the pattern icon from the feature toolbar.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Geometry Patterns

Close Window Pattern\Geometry Task 1: Erase Not Displayed GEOM_PATTERN.PRT
Investigate and select geometry to be patterned.
4. Press ALT to directly select the surface.
Fo r
6. Release SHIFT and notice the resulting surface selection.
Module 18 | Page 18
PT
5. Press SHIFT and select the boundary surface.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. The geometry that these features create is to be patterned, however the features are not consecutive.
nl y
2. Press CTRL and select Hole 1 and Extrude 2 from the model tree.
Task 2:
Create a geometry pattern.
1. With the surfaces still selected, from the Editing group select from the Geometry Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu. 2. Select the front face of the model.
3. In the dashboard, click Flip Pattern Direction . 4. Edit the number of members to 3 and edit the spacing to 250.
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
6. Notice that the pattern in the model tree contains two instances, but the total pattern quantity is three.
te rn
.
Module 18 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
Creating Fill Patterns

A fill pattern fills the area of a sketch with the specified feature or group.
Select or define a Sketch feature for filling. Fill spacing types include: Square Diamond Hexagon Circle Spiral Curve Fill options: Spacing Boundary Spacing Grid Rotation Radial Spacing
Figure 3 Spiral Fill Pattern
PT
In
Creating Fill Patterns
Fo r
A fill pattern fills in the area of a selected sketch feature with the feature or group of features you wish to pattern. The sketch feature defines the outline for filling. You can either select an existing sketch or define a new, internal sketch. If the shape or size of the sketch feature referenced by the Fill pattern is edited, the pattern updates.
Fill Pattern Spacing Types

The following fill pattern spacing types are available: Square Spacing Diamond Spacing pattern. Hexagon Spacing pattern.
Module 18 | Page 20
Spaces the pattern members in a square pattern. Spaces the pattern members in a diamond Spaces the pattern members in a hexagon
te rn
al
Figure 2 Circle Fill Pattern
Figure 4 Curve Fill Pattern
U se
2012 PTC
Figure 1 Square Fill Pattern
nl y
Circle Spacing pattern. Spiral Spacing Curve Spacing sketch feature.
Spaces the pattern members in a concentric circle Spaces the pattern members in a spiral pattern. Spaces the pattern members along the specified
Fill Options
Once the fill pattern type has been specified, you can edit the following fill options:
Sets the radial spacing. Available only for Pattern Radial Spacing Circular and Spiral fill pattern types.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 21
al
U se
Pattern Grid Rotation Sets the grid rotation angle about the origin. The origin is the location of the pattern leader.
Pattern Boundary Spacing Sets the minimum distance between the pattern member centers and the sketch boundary. Negative values enable centers to lie outside the sketch.
nl y
Pattern Spacing
Sets the spacing between pattern member centers.
PROCEDURE - Creating Fill Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed FILL_PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Fill_Pattern Task 1:
Experiment with the different fill pattern spacing types and options.
5. Edit the Pattern Spacing 1.5. 6. Click Complete Feature .
to
8. Edit the Pattern Grid Rotation to 45. 9. Click Complete Feature
11. Edit the Pattern Boundary
Fo r
Spacing
PT
10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. to 1. .
Module 18 | Page 22
In
te rn
.
7. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2.
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Select Sketch 2 from the model tree.
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Fill.
nl y
2. Select Extrude 2 and click Pattern from the Editing group.
13. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 14. Select Hexagon Spacing from the Spacing types drop-down menu. 15. Edit the Pattern Boundary Spacing back to 0. 16. Edit the Pattern Grid Rotation back to 0. 17. Click Complete Feature .
20. Edit the Pattern Radial Spacing to 2.5. 21. Click Complete Feature .
22. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 23. Select Spiral Spacing from the Spacing types drop-down menu.
Fo r
25. Select Curve Spacing from the Spacing types drop-down menu. 26. Edit the Pattern Spacing 2. to
27. De-select the pattern leader dot and the two corner pattern members. 28. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
2012 PTC
PT
24. Edit the Pattern Radial Spacing to 2.
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 23
al
U se
from 19. Select Circle Spacing the Spacing types drop-down menu.
nl y
Specifying Fill Pattern Settings

Fill pattern settings can be edited to affect how the resulting fill pattern geometry appears.
Options include: Use alternate origin Follow leader location Follow surface shape Follow surface direction Spacing As projected Map to Surface space Map to Surface UV space
Specifying Fill Pattern Settings
Fo r
Once you have specified a Fill pattern, you can set some options to affect how the resulting geometry appears.
Use Alternate Origin

The default origin specified for a fill pattern is the pattern leader center. The resulting pattern members are created based on this location. You can specify an alternate origin location using the Use alternate origin option. Selecting an alternate origin enables the system to recalculate the pattern member arrangement as if the pattern leader were in that newly specified origin. Note that the pattern leader is not actually relocated to the newly specified origin; instead, the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement, but the system adjusts the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern leader. You can select any one of the following as the alternative origin: Datum points Coordinate systems A vertex
PT
Figure 2 Follow Surface Shape: Follow Surface Direction Enabled and Disabled
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Using an Alternate Origin
nl y
The end of a sketched curve You can only select features created before the pattern leader as the alternative origin.
Follow Leader Location

With Follow leader location enabled, the system offsets pattern members from the sketch plane of the fill curve by the same distance as the leader. With the option disabled, the system centers the pattern members around the sketch plane of the fill curve.
Spacing Options
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
As projected Map to surface space Map to surface UV space
In
When using the Follow surface shape option, you have the following spacing options available:
te rn
You can then control the instance orientation to follow the surface direction, if desired. Enabling the Follow surface direction option ensures that each pattern member is oriented to follow the surface, as shown in the left image of Figure 2. Disabling the Follow surface direction option ensures that all pattern members have a constant orientation on the selected surface, but will still relocate according to the shape of the surface. The orientation of all members is the same as the pattern leader, as shown in the right image of Figure 2.
al
U se
You can configure the pattern members to follow a surface contour by enabling the Follow surface shape option. In the images of Figure 2, the pattern members move up and down with respect to the surface shape specified.
nl y
Follow Surface Shape
Module 18 | Page 25
PROCEDURE - Specifying Fill Pattern Settings

Close Window Erase Not Displayed FILL_PATT_SETTINGS.PRT
Pattern\Fill_Settings Task 1:
Create a fill pattern and specify an alternate origin.
Spacing
to 1.0.
4. Select Diamond Spacing from the spacing types drop-down menu. 5. Click Named Views select BOTTOM.
Fo r
7. Enable Point Display
PT
6. Notice that the pattern is using the leader as the pattern origin, and therefore it is not symmetrical within the sketch.
8. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Use alternate origin check box. Select datum point PNT0 as the new origin. Notice that the pattern is now using the point as the pattern origin, and is symmetrical within the sketch.
Module 18 | Page 26
In
te rn
and .
al
2012 PTC
U se
Edit the Pattern Spacing to 1.5. Edit the Pattern Boundary
3. Edit the pattern type to Fill. Select SKETCH_1.
nl y
2. Select EXTRUDE_1 and click from the Editing Pattern group.
10. Select SKETCH_1 to view it. Notice that the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement, but the system has adjusted the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern leader.
11. Disable Point Display Task 2:
Create a fill pattern and make it follow a surface shape.
1. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Select EXTRUDE_2 and click Pattern . 3. Edit the pattern type to Fill. Select SKETCH_2.
Spacing
In
Edit the Pattern Spacing to 2.00. Edit the Pattern Boundary .
to 0, if necessary.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Module 18 | Page 27
al
U se
nl y
5. In the model tree, right-click SHAPE and select Unhide. 6. Right-click Pattern 2 of EXTRUDE_2 and select Edit Definition. 7. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Enable Follow surface shape. Select the surface quilt. Enable Follow surface direction, if necessary. 8. Click Complete Feature . Notice that all pattern members follow the specified surface contour. 9. Right-click Pattern 2 of EXTRUDE_2 and select Edit Definition. 10. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Disable Follow surface direction. 11. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
Notice that all pattern members are now facing in the same orientation as the pattern leader, but they still follow the specified surface contour.
Module 18 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Pattern Tables

You can create complex or irregular patterns of features, components, or groups using pattern tables.
Specify the dimensions for the table. Table Dimensions tab Edit the table using Pro/TABLE. Exit and Save Quit does not save
Figure 1 Table Dimensions Tab
Fo r
Figure 2 Pro/TABLE Editor
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Created Table Pattern
Creating Pattern Tables

A pattern table is a pattern created by specifying pattern instances in a tabular format within Creo Parametric's Pro/TABLE editor. You can create complex or irregular patterns of features, components, or groups using pattern tables. Using pattern tables, you can also control the location of individual instances by specifying absolute dimensions for each instance in the pattern to the same reference, such as the pattern leader. You can use pattern tables in Assembly mode to pattern assembly features and components. Pattern tables do not act as family tables. Pattern tables can only drive pattern dimensions. You have to unpattern the members to make them independent. You can also include pattern tables in family tables, so a particular family instance can use a specified pattern table.
2012 PTC
al
Module 18 | Page 29
U se
nl y
Specifying the Dimensions for the Table

A pattern table is similar to a family table. Within a family table you must specify the items you wish to vary from instance to instance. Within a pattern table you must specify the feature dimensions you wish to vary from pattern member to pattern member. For example, if you know a hole feature's diameter must change for different pattern members, you must specify that hole diameter dimension to be varied in the pattern table. Or, if you know the pattern members must grow vertically, you must specify the feature dimension that enables this direction of pattern member growth. Pressing CTRL enables you to add multiple dimensions to the pattern table. The added dimensions can be viewed within the Table Dimensions tab of the dashboard, as shown in Figure 1.
Editing the Table using the Pro/TABLE Editor
Fo r
It can be beneficial to create the pattern as a Dimension pattern first, and then edit the definition of the Dimension pattern and edit its type to Table. Doing this automatically propagates the pattern table with all pattern members from the Dimension pattern and the dimension values used. Pattern member rows can then be deleted from the table and additional Table Dimensions can be added.
You can modify a table pattern at any time after you create the pattern. When editing table patterns, it is important to understand the difference between variable and invariable dimensions. Variable dimensions are those that are listed in the pattern table and can vary from one instance to another. All other dimensions of the patterned feature are invariable. All instances share the same value for invariable dimensions. Any change to a variable dimension affects only the instance that contains that variable dimension and the table updates with the new value. Any change you make to an invariable dimension affects all instances. Suppressing or deleting a table-driven pattern suppresses or deletes the pattern leader.
Module 18 | Page 30
PT
Each pattern member resides in its own row in the Pro/TABLE editor. Edit the Table Dimensions as desired for each pattern member. Specifying a value of * causes that pattern instance's Table Dimension to be equivalent to that of the pattern leader. Distance values are measured from the pattern leader. When finished editing the pattern table, you must click File > Exit from the Pro/TABLE editor to save the table and return to Creo Parametric. File > Quit aborts all changes.
In
te rn
al
When you edit the pattern table, the system launches the Pro/TABLE editor with the Table Dimensions you have specified, as shown in Figure 2. Each Table Dimension is placed in its own column, in the order it was selected. The system automatically creates the first column with a header name of idx. This is simply an index number for the pattern members, and begins with a value of 1. Each pattern member must contain an index number, and each index number must be unique. The pattern table starts numbering at zero (for the lead instance) but does not display this instance in the table since it cannot be modified using the table.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Pattern Tables

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PATTERN_TEMPLATE.PRT
Pattern\Create_Pat_Table Task 1:
Create a pattern template on a part model.
Fo r
6. The Pro/TABLE Editor launches. 7. Notice that each Table Dimension is added as its own column in addition to the idx column. 8. Notice that each Table Dimension is given a name. 9. Notice that the Table Dimension values in the graphics window have been replaced by the corresponding column name from Pro/TABLE.
PT
5. In the dashboard, select the Tables tab. Click in the Name field, edit the table name to HOLES, and press ENTER. Click Edit.
In
te rn
al
4. Notice that these dimensions are added to the Table Dimensions tab.
U se
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Table. Select the Table Dimensions tab. Press CTRL and select the 7.5, 8, and 3 dimensions, respectively.
nl y
2. Select Hole 1 and click Pattern from the Editing group.
10. In the idx column of Pro/TABLE, starting in row R12, type number 1 through 15. 11. Edit the remainder of the table as shown in the figure. 12. In the Pro/TABLE Editor, click File > Exit.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Applying Pattern Tables

You can reuse a pattern table by writing it to a *.ptb file and reading it into another model's pattern table.
Write a *.ptb from a pattern table. Read a *.ptb file into a pattern table. Number of Table Dimensions must equal number of columns in table. The order of Table Dimensions does matter. You can switch the Active Table.
In
te rn Fo r
Applying Pattern Tables
You can reuse a pattern table by writing it to a *.ptb file. This is done by right-clicking the table you want to reuse in the Tables tab and selecting Write. The *.ptb file has the same name as the table from which it was written. You can maintain a library of *.ptb files for use with standard pattern configurations, and read them into various part models to easily switch between configurations.
Reading *.ptb Files into a Model

You can read an existing *.ptb file into a pattern table by right-clicking in the Tables tab of the Pattern table dashboard and selecting Read. You can then browse to find the desired *.ptb file for your pattern table. The rules about reading in an existing pattern table *.ptb file, are as follows: The number of dimensions specified in the Table Dimensions tab must equal the number of dimensions found within the *.ptb file. If the number is different, the table fails to be read in.
PT
al
Figure 2 Applying a Different Pattern Table
U se
Figure 1 Applying a Pattern Table
nl y
The order in which you specify dimensions in the Table dimensions matters. The system maps the Table Dimensions to the pattern table columns in the order they are found in the Table Dimensions tab. Thus, if your first Table Dimension is a diameter dimension and the first column in the pattern table is a distance, you will most likely not achieve the desired pattern results.
Switching the Active Table

Multiple tables can be established for a pattern, so you can change the pattern by switching the table that drives it. You can either read in a *.ptb file to create a new table or you can add a new one by right-clicking in the Tables tab and selecting Add. Once the table is created you can edit it appropriately. While multiple tables can be established for a pattern, only one table can be the Active table at any given time. The Active table is displayed in the dashboard. You can specify a different Active table by selecting it from the drop-down list or right-clicking the desired table in the Tables tab and selecting Apply. For example, Figure 1 displays a pattern table that is the active pattern table. Figure 2 displays a different pattern table that was made the active table. You can also edit the table name in the Tables tab of the dashboard.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Applying Pattern Tables

Close Window Erase Not Displayed APPLY_PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Apply_Pat_Table Task 1:
Apply pattern tables to a part model.
3. In the dashboard, select the Tables tab. Right-click #1 (Active) and select Write. 4. Expand the message window and notice the message that states, Pattern table MUFFLER-1 was written to the file MUFFLER-1.PTB.1. 5. Click Complete Feature 6. Click Folder Browser the Navigator. .
Fo r
8. Select Hole 1 and click Pattern .
9. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Table. Press CTRL and select the 7.5, 8, and 3 dimensions, respectively.
2012 PTC
PT
7. In the Folder Browser, click and Working Directory double-click MUFFLER.PRT to open it.
In
te rn
from
Module 18 | Page 35
al
U se
nl y
2. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Hole 1.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
.
12. In the Tables tab, right-click MUFFLER-1 and select Apply. Right-click TABLE1 and select Remove.
al
2012 PTC
U se
11. Right-click in the collector and select Read. In the Open dialog box, select MUFFLER-2.PTB and click Open. Note that TABLE3 is created. Edit the name of TABLE3 to MUFFLER-2.
nl y
10. In the dashboard, select the Tables tab. Notice that the Active table is TABLE1. Right-click in the collector and select Read. In the Open dialog box, select MUFFLER-1.PTB and click Open. Note that TABLE2 is created. Edit the name from TABLE2 to MUFFLER-1 and press ENTER.
14. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Hole 1. 15. In the dashboard, select MUFFLER-2 from the Active table drop-down list. 16. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 37
al
U se
nl y
Creating Curve Patterns

A Curve pattern follows the shape of a curve.
The curve can be open or closed. Spacing options: Spacing between pattern members Pattern options: Use alternate origin Follow surface shape Follow surface direction Spacing Follow curve direction
Figure 1 Follow Surface Shape Enabled
Figure 2 Follow Curve Direction Enabled
Creating Curve Patterns
Fo r
The original feature should be located at the starting point of the reference curve to prevent the pattern objects from being offset from the curve. Creo Parametric determines the starting point by the first sketched entity. The location at which you first click to begin sketching the curve becomes the starting point.
Controlling the Number of Pattern Members

You can control the number of pattern members that are created using either of the following methods: option to Member Spacing You can use the Use Member Spacing specify the spacing between pattern member centers. The total quantity of pattern members created is determined by the spacing specified. Member Quantity You can use the Use Member Quantity option to specify the total number of pattern members that are created. The spacing between pattern members is determined by the total quantity of pattern members.
PT
You can create a Curve pattern of a feature or a group of features by selecting an existing curve as the reference. In a Curve pattern, the pattern members follow the shape of the curve. The selected curve can be open or closed.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Follow Curve Direction Disabled
U se
nl y
Use Alternate Origin

The default origin specified for a fill pattern is the pattern leader center. The resulting pattern members are created based on this location. You can specify an alternate origin location using the Use alternate origin option. Selecting an alternate origin enables the system to recalculate the pattern member arrangement as if the pattern leader were in that newly specified origin. Note that the pattern leader is not actually relocated to the newly specified origin; the pattern remains in the alternate arrangement, but the system adjusts the pattern placement to be centered on the pattern leader. You can select any one of the following as the alternative origin: Datum points Coordinate systems A vertex The end of a sketched curve
Follow Surface Shape
Fo r
As projected Map to surface space Map to surface UV space
Follow Curve Direction

You can also configure the pattern members to follow the curve direction. Enabling Follow curve direction specifies that each pattern member be oriented to follow the curve on the sketch plane. For example, if the pattern leader is normal to the curve, then each pattern member is also normal to the curve, as shown in Figure 2. Constant, however, specifies that all pattern members have a constant orientation along the curve on the sketch plane. The orientation of all members is the same as the pattern leader, as shown in Figure 3.
2012 PTC
PT
The following spacing options are available when using Follow Surface Shape:
You can then set the member orientation to follow the surface direction. Enabling Follow surface direction specifies that each pattern member be oriented to follow the surface, as shown in Figure 1. Disabling Follow surface direction specifies that all pattern members have a constant orientation on the selected surface. The orientation of all members is the same as the pattern leader.
In
te rn
You can configure the pattern members to follow the shape of a specified surface. Enabling Follow surface shape causes the pattern member placement to follow the shape of the selected surface, as shown in Figure 1.
al
U se
You can only select features created before the pattern leader as the alternative origin.
nl y
Module 18 | Page 39
PROCEDURE - Creating Curve Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CURVE_PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Curve_Pattern Task 1:
Create a curve pattern in a model.
4. Select Sketch 1. 5. Edit the Use Member Spacing value to 1. 6. Click Complete Feature .
8. In the dashboard, click Use Member Quantity . Edit the quantity to 7.
11. Edit the Use Member Quantity
Fo r
12. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Disable Follow curve direction. 13. Click Complete Feature .
14. Notice all pattern members follow the curve but are oriented the same as the pattern leader.
Module 18 | Page 40
PT
10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 1. to 8.
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Curve.
nl y
2. Select Extrude 1 and click Pattern from the Editing group.
15. In the model tree, right-click SURFACE and select Unhide. 16. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 1. 17. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Enable Follow curve direction. Enable Follow surface shape. Select SURFACE. 18. Click Complete Feature .
20. Spin the model and notice that the pattern members follow the surface shape.
21. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 1. 22. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Disable Follow surface direction for the Member orientation. 23. Click Complete Feature
PT
In
Fo r
24. Notice that all pattern members still follow the curve and the surface shape, but they are all oriented the same as the pattern leader.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 18 | Page 41
al
U se
19. Right-click Sketch 1 and select Unhide.
nl y
Creating Point Patterns

Create a pattern by referencing multiple points.
Points can be: Datum point features containing multiple points. Sketch features containing multiple Geometry Points.
Figure 2 Datum Point Selected
Figure 3 Point Pattern Created
The points referenced for the pattern can be of two types: A standard datum point feature containing multiple points. A sketch feature containing multiple Geometry Points. The sketch can also contain other geometry, however the pattern members are only created at Geometry Point locations. The sketch can preexist and be selected at the time of pattern creation. The sketch can also be created as an internal sketch, within the Point Pattern feature. Like other internal sketches, the sketch containing the points is hidden upon pattern creation.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 42
PT
In
You pattern a feature by selecting a datum point or sketch that contains multiple points. By default, a pattern member is then created for each of the multiple points. However, like other pattern types, you can disable instances by clicking the preview dots. You can also create reference patterns based on a created point pattern. Other pattern properties also apply to Point Patterns.
te rn
al
Creating Point Patterns
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Point Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed POINT_PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Point_Pattern Task 1:
Create point patterns using different types of datum points.
3. Click Pattern . Select Point as the pattern type. 4. Click Use Point Feature from the dashboard. 5. Select a point from the POINT_1 feature. 6. Select the preview dots to disable two pattern members, as shown. 7. Click Complete Feature
In
Fo r
9. Select Extrude 2 from the model tree. .
10. Click Pattern
11. Select Point as the pattern type. .
12. Click Use Sketch Point
13. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. Click Use Previous.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Disable Point Display
te rn
. .
Module 18 | Page 43
al
U se
nl y
2. Select Extrude 1 from the model tree.
14. Click Offset . Select the left curved outside edge and type -0.25 as the offset. from the Editing 15. Click Divide group and select a point on the arc to divide it in half. 16. Click Point from the Datum group and place five points: three on the arc ends and two on the arc midpoints. 17. Click OK .
Fo r
21. Select Draft 1, then right-click and select Pattern. Select Reference as the pattern type and then click Complete Feature . 22. Select Draft 2, then right-click and select Pattern. Select Reference and then click Complete Feature .
Module 18 | Page 44
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
19. Select the preview dot to disable the pattern member shown.
U se
18. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select 3D.
nl y
Unpatterning Group Patterns

You can unpattern a Group Dimension pattern or a Group Reference pattern.
Pattern feature removed, leaving Group features. Each Group is independent, enabling individual manipulation.
Figure 1 Unpatterning a Patterned Group
Figure 2 Deleted Independent Groups
Unpatterning Group Patterns

A group Dimension pattern and a group Reference pattern can both be unpatterned. When a pattern is unpatterned, the Pattern feature is removed from the model tree, leaving each of the resulting group members, as shown in Figure 1. These group features are now independent and can be individually manipulated. For example, in Figure 2, each of the group features in the middle of the model were deleted because they are independent of each other. The groups could not have been deleted if they were still part of the pattern. Furthermore, the tab groups in the top row were ungrouped, enabling the round features to be deleted.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 45
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Unpatterning Group Patterns

Close Window Pattern\Unpattern Task 1: Erase Not Displayed UNPATTERN.PRT
Pattern and unpattern groups in a part model.
3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Dimension, if necessary. 4. Select the 2 distance dimension as the first direction reference. Edit the spacing increment to 2.50. 5. Edit the number of members to 4. 6. In the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Reference collector. Select the 1 distance dimension as the second direction reference. Edit the second direction spacing increment to 2. Edit the second direction number of members to 5. 7. Click Complete Feature
PT
Fo r
9. Press CTRL and select Hole 1 and Hole 2. Right-click and select Group. Rename the group to HOLES.
Module 18 | Page 46
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Select Group TAB and click Pattern .
10. Select Group HOLES and click Pattern . 11. Verify the pattern type is Reference and the Reference type is Group. 12. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
17. In the model tree, right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP_29 and select Ungroup. Delete the second hole feature and click OK.
In
16. In the model tree, right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP_26 and select Ungroup. Delete the first hole feature and click OK.
te rn
Module 18 | Page 47
al
U se
15. Notice that all features are still present in the graphics window.
14. Notice that the Pattern feature has been replaced by Group features in the model tree.
nl y
13. In the model tree, right-click Pattern 2 of HOLES and select Unpattern.
18. In the model tree, right-click Pattern 1 of TAB and select Unpattern. 19. Again, notice that the Pattern feature has been replaced by Group features in the model tree. 20. Again, notice that all features are still present in the graphics window. 21. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP_12 and select Delete. Click OK to also delete the child local hole group. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 48
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Patterns of Patterns

You can now select an existing pattern to create a pattern.
You can create patterns of an existing pattern: You can reference pattern a pattern along an existing pattern. Feature Group Both
Fo r
Creating Patterns of Patterns

You can now create a pattern of an existing pattern. The pattern types do not need to be the same for example, you can create a linear pattern of an axis pattern, or vice versa. You can also use the Unpattern option to remove each of the patterns. In addition, you can reference pattern a feature along a pattern of a pattern, provided a feature is created on the pattern leader of another pattern. Depending on how the features were created, there are three different reference pattern types that can be created: Feature The Reference pattern references an existing feature pattern. In Figure 2, in the left image, the round feature is being Reference patterned based on the existing axis pattern. Group The Reference pattern references either a group or existing pattern of a pattern. In Figure 2, in the middle image, an axis pattern is then
PT
In
Figure 2 Reference Pattern Types (Feature, Group, Both)
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Patterning a Pattern
nl y
direction patterned, resulting in a pattern of a pattern. The round feature is Reference patterned based on the axis pattern that was patterned. Both The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern and a group pattern. In Figure 2, in the right image, the round is Reference patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the group pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern).
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 50
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Patterns of Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PATTERN-PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Pattern_Patterns Task 1: Pattern an existing pattern.
3. Click Pattern group.
from the Editing
PT
Click Flip First Direction Type 3 as the quantity. Type 50 as the spacing.
In
4. Select Direction as the type. Select datum plane FRONT from the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
te rn
. .
Module 18 | Page 51
al
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, select AXIS_PATTERN.
Task 2:
Reference pattern a round feature on an existing pattern of a pattern.
1. Select ROUND_1. 2. Click Pattern . Notice the default pattern type is Reference pattern and that the default Reference type is Feature. Also notice that the reference pattern only occurs on the axis pattern.
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 52
PT
In
te rn
3. In the dashboard, edit the Reference type to Group. Notice that the round only patterns once per direction pattern group.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. In the dashboard, edit the Reference type to Both. Notice that the round patterns on each member of the axis pattern as well as each member of the direction pattern of the axis pattern. 5. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 53
al
U se
nl y
Moving/Mirroring Patterns
You can now move and mirror patterns.
Move and Mirror Patterns Additional pattern types: Fill Direction Axis
You can move or mirror patterns using Copy and Paste Special.
Fo r
You can perform multiple translate or rotate operations within a single copy operation.
Module 18 | Page 54
PT
These operations can be performed on fill, direction, axis, dimension and table patterns. However, the operations cannot be performed on group or reference patterns.
In
Moving/Mirroring Patterns
te rn
al
Figure 2 Pattern Mirrored and Rotated
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Moving/Mirroring Patterns

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MIRROR_PATTERN.PRT
Pattern\Mirror_Pattern Task 1:
Mirror the pattern of slots around datum RIGHT.
Task 2:
Copy and paste the pattern of slots.
Fo r
from Select Paste Special the Paste types drop-down list. The Paste Special dialog box appears. Select Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies. Click OK.
2. Click Rotate from the dashboard. Select axis through the middle of the cover as the axis to rotate the copy around. In the dashboard, type 25 for the angle and press ENTER. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 55
1. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 1 in the model tree. Press CTRL+C to copy the pattern to the clipboard.
al
U se
from the Click Mirror Editing group. Select the RIGHT datum plane from the model tree. Click Complete Feature .
nl y
2. Select Pattern 1 of Extrude 1 in the model tree.
Copyright
Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.0
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively "PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
PRINTING HISTORY Document No. T3903-390-02
Date
05/04/2012
Order Number DT-T3903-390-02 Printed in the U.S.A
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Description
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 01012012
Initial Printing of: Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.0
al
Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software.
U se
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
nl y

T3903-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T3903-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.

Authored and published using

About PTC University

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information.

Precision Learning After the Class

Precision Learning Recommendations

Module Module Module Module Module Module

Table of Contents Advanced Modeling using Creo Parametric 2.0

8-13 8-14 8-19 8-21 8-27 8-31 8-35 8-39

12-18 12-22 12-26 12-30 12-34

18-33 18-38 18-42 18-45 18-49 18-54

Student Preface Using the Header

Course Handbook Layout

Procedure / Exercise Header

until the icon is no longer displayed.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

Set the initial datum display options.

Open the file for this procedure.

4. The model should now appear as shown.

This completes the procedure.

Advanced Chain Selection

Figure 1 Intent Chain

Advanced Chain Selection

Figure 2 Surface Loop

PROCEDURE - Advanced Chain Selection

Experiment with the different chain selection types.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Extrude 3.

5. De-select all geometry. 6. Select the top, front horizontal edge.

12. De-select all geometry.

10. Select the top, front horizontal edge.

This completes the procedure.

24. Select the quilt again.

Advanced Surface Selection

Advanced Surface Selection

Surface Set Types

Figure 1 Selecting Multiple Individual Surfaces

PROCEDURE - Advanced Surface Selection

Experiment with the different surface set selections.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Extrude 1.

11. Select the Intent surface.

10. Right-click to query and select cut Extrude 2.

4. Press CTRL and select the second individual surface.

3. Select the front surface of Extrude 1.

16. Select the top, flat surface.

This completes the procedure.

18. Release SHIFT to select the Surface loop.

17. Press SHIFT and select the front edge.

Advanced Datum Features

Creating Datum Graphs

Creating Datum Graphs

Figure 2 Creating a Datum Graph using Lines

Figure 3 Creating a Datum Graph from a Spline

Figure 1 Datum Graph Features

PROCEDURE - Creating Datum Graphs

Create a datum graph comprised of lines.

11. Notice the datum graph feature in the model tree.

Create a datum graph comprised of two arcs. .

1. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Graph

11. Notice the datum graph feature in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.